HomeMy WebLinkAboutConformed_Technical Specs_CD1TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
Cornell University
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall
Thermal System Upgrade
CHA Project Number: 060624
Prepared for:
Cornell University
121 Humphreys Service Building
Ithaca, New York 14853
Prepared by:
III Winners Circle
Albany, New York 12205
Phone: (518) 453-4560
Conformed Construction Documents (CD1)
December 15, 2020
V:\Projects\ANY\K5\060624.000\Specs\Construction Documents (CD)\Technical Specs\00 00 00_TR_Table of
Contents_Conf.doc
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall Technical Requirements Page 1
Thermal System Upgrade Table of Contents
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Ithaca, New York
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section No. Description
Division 2 – Existing Conditions
02 32 00 SOIL EXPLORATION DATA
02 41 00 DEMOLITION
02 82 13 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
Division 3 – Concrete
03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE (CIP) CONCRETE
03 40 00 PRECAST CONCRETE
Division 5 – Metals
05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS
Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection
07 10 00 DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING
Division 9 – Finishes
09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING
Division 22 – Plumbing
22 00 00 GENERAL MECHANICAL UTILITY REQUIREMENTS
22 05 00 PIPING – GENERAL
22 07 00 THERMAL INSULATION
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall Technical Requirements Page 2
Thermal System Upgrade Table of Contents
Division 23 – Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
23 22 13 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
23 25 00 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
Division 26 – Electrical
26 05 19 WIRE & CABLES (600V & LESS)
26 05 26 GROUDING & BONDING SYSTEMS
26 05 34 CONDUIT SYSTEMS
Division 31 – Earthwork
31 00 00 EARTHWORK
31 05 00 SOILS AND AGGREGATES
31 41 00 EXCAVATION PROTECTION
Division 32 – Exterior Improvements
32 00 00 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
32 91 00 SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION
32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES
Division 33 – Utilities
33 00 00 DRAINAGE
33 10 00 WATER UTILITIES
33 13 00 WATER ACCEPTANCE TESTING
33 21 13.13 UNDERGROUND HOT WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE
33 21 13.14 UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE
Miscellaneous
Water Main Acceptance Form
High Performance Butterfly Valves and Accessories for Steam Service
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 02 32 00
SOIL EXPLORATION DATA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................... 02-32-00 1
1.1 Description ...................................................................................................... 02-32-00 1
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOIL EXPLORATION DATA 02-32-00 1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02 32 00
Ithaca, New York SOIL EXPLORATION DATA
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Description
A. No soils data gathered for this project location.
** END OF SECTION **
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 02-41-00
DEMOLITION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page No.
1.0 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 02 41 00-1
1.1 Scope ........................................................................................................ 02 41 00-1
1.2 Submittals ................................................................................................ 02 41 00-1
1.3 Job Conditions ......................................................................................... 02 41 00-1
1.4 Traffic ...................................................................................................... 02 41 00-2
1.5 Utility Services ......................................................................................... 02 41 00-2
1.6 Protections................................................................................................ 02 41 00-3
2.0 PRODUCTS........................................................................................................ 02 41 00-3
3.0 EXECUTION ..................................................................................................... 02 41 00-3
3.1 Preparation ............................................................................................... 02 41 00-3
3.2 Demolition ............................................................................................... 02 41 00-3
3.3 Disposal of Demolished Materials ........................................................... 02 41 00-5
3.4 Cleanup and Repair .................................................................................. 02 41 00-5
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DEMOLITION 02-41-00 1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02-41-00
Ithaca, New York DEMOLITION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
A. This section requires the selective removal and subsequent off-site disposal of the
following:
1. Manholes, catch basins, concrete paving, sidewalks, pipes, and other
mechanical work as specified or required.
2. Asbestos removal as shown on the drawings and in accordance with
Asbestos Removal Specification Section 02 82 13.
3. Removal and disposal of materials shall be in accordance with Construction
Waste Management Section 01 74 00.
1.2 Submittals
A. Schedule: Indicate proposed sequence of operations for demolition work to
Owner's Representative for review prior to start of work. Include coordination for
shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with
details for dust and noise control protection.
1. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure
uninterrupted progress of Owner's on-site operations.
2. Coordinate with Owner's continuing occupation of portions of the site.
B. Photographs: Provide digital photographs of existing conditions of structure
surfaces, equipment, and adjacent improvements that might be misconstrued as
damage related to removal operations. File with Owner's Representative prior to
start of work.
1.3 Job Conditions
A. Occupancy: Owner will occupy portions of the site immediately adjacent to areas
of demolition. Conduct demolition work in a manner that will minimize the need
for disruption of Owner's normal operations. Provide a minimum of 72 hours
advance notice to Owner of demolition activities that will affect Owner's normal
operations.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DEMOLITION 02-41-00 2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. Condition of Structures: Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of
items or structures to be demolished.
1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be
maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However, minor variations
may occur due to Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of
demolition work.
C. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with
intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature
and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Owner's Representative in written,
accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner's Representative,
rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job
progress without undue delay.
1.4 Traffic
A. Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal to ensure minimum
interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities.
B. Do not close, block, or otherwise obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used
facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic-ways if required by governing
regulations. Areas inside the contract limit line are intended to be closed for the
duration of the project unless noted otherwise on the plans.
1.5 Utility Services
A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during demolition operations.
1. Before commencing excavation, contact Frank Perry of the Cornell
University Utilities Department at 607 592-2194 or fdp1@cornell.edu.
2. Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when
authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary
services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to the
Owner.
3. Maintaining fire protection services will be required during periods of
utility interruption for relocation or other reasons.
4. Only Cornell personnel to do work on medium voltage (600V plus),
telephone lines and will operate all steam, chilled water and potable water
valves. The Owner will bear all costs for this work.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DEMOLITION 02-41-00 3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.6 Protections
Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection to protect Owner's personnel
and general public from injury.
2.0 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Preparation
A. General: Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent
movement, settlement, or collapse of areas to be demolished and adjacent facilities
to remain.
1. Cease operations and notify Owner's Representative immediately if safety
of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure
until determination is made for continuing operations.
2. Cover and protect equipment and fixtures from soilage or damage when
demolition work is performed in areas where such items have not been
removed.
3. Locate, identify, and notify the engineer and the Owner of any utility service
not clearly identified on the drawings.
4. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service
to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 7 days' advance notice
to Owner if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover.
3.2 Demolition
A. General: Perform demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as
required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition
schedule and governing regulations.
1. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and
masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power-driven
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DEMOLITION 02-41-00 4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power-driven impact tools without
permission of the Owner.
2. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls, as required
by local authorities having jurisdiction.
3. For slabs on grade, use removal methods that will not crack or structurally
disturb adjacent slabs or partitions. Use power saw where possible.
4. Do not use methods which may dislodge concealed asbestos.
5. Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of
flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior ducts and pipe
spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame-cutting
operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame-cutting
operations.
B. Pavement and Walks
Remove existing Portland cement and asphaltic concrete surfaces, including
granular bases, within indicated limits that are not part of demolition of structures.
Sawcut two inches minimum depth at removal limits. Removal limits in Portland
cement concrete may be extended to the next adjacent joint, provided the remaining
panels are sound and extend at least 5 feet from the joint.
C. Miscellaneous Structures
Remove existing fences, signs, and similar structures within indicated limits.
Follow plans for what items are to be replaced.
D. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other
methods to limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations
pertaining to environmental protection.
1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions
such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
2. Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work.
E. Salvaged Materials: Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to
Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. See General
Requirements. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed.
1. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DEMOLITION 02-41-00 5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.3 Disposal of Demolished Materials
A. Remove from site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition
operations. Transport and legally dispose off site.
1. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations,
comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning the
removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental
pollution.
2. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site.
3.4 Cleanup and Repair
A. General: Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and
demolished materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom
clean.
1. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of
construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start of
operations. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by
demolition work.
** END OF SECTION **
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 02-82-13
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page No.
1.0 GENERAL……………………………………………………………………...02 82 13-2
1.1 Related Documents……………………………………………………...02 82 13-2
1.2 Scope of Work……………………………...…………………………...02 82 13-2
1.3 Special Job Conditions………..………………………………….……...02 82 13-3
1.4 Permits and Compliance………………………………………………...02 82 13-3
1.5 Submittals…………………………………………..…………….……...02 82 13-4
1.6 Pre-Bid Meeting…………………………………………………….…...02 82 13-5
1.7 Applicable Standards and Regulations…………………………..….…...02 82 13-5
1.8 Notices………………………………………………...………………...02 82 13-5
1.9 Project Monitoring and Air Sampling………...………………….……...02 82 13-6
1.10 Contractor Air Sampling……...………………………………….……...02 82 13-8
1.11 Project Supervisor………………………………………………..……...02 82 13-8
1.12 Medical Requirements…………………..……………………….……...02 82 13-8
1.13 Training……………………………………………………….….……...02 82 13-9
1.14 Respiratory Protection……………………...…………………….……...02 82 13-9
1.15 Delivery and Storage…………………….…………………….…….....02 82 13-10
1.16 Temporary Utilities………………………………………………..…...02 82 13-10
2.0 PRODUCTS……………………………………………………………….....02 82 13-10
2.1 Protective Clothing…………………………………..………………...02 82 13-10
2.2 Signs and Labels…………………………………………..…………...02 82 13-11
2.3 Daily Project Log……………………………………….……………...02 82 13-12
2.4 Scaffolding and Ladders…………………………..………….……......02 82 13-12
2.5 Surfactant (Amended Water) ……………..…………………..…..…...02 82 13-12
2.6 Encapsulant…………………………………………..………..…….....02 82 13-12
2.7 Disposal Bags, Drums, and Containers…………...…………………...02 82 13-12
2.8 Hepa Vacuum Equipment………………………………..………..…...02 82 13-13
2.9 Power Tools……………………………………………..………...…...02 82 13-13
2.10 Polyethylene Sheeting………………………...…………………..…...02 82 13-13
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 02-82-13
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page No.
3.0 EXECUTION………………………………………..……...………………...02 82 13-13
3.1 General Requirements……………...………………………..………...02 82 13-13
3.2 Personnel Decontamination Enclosure……..……………………..…...02 82 13-14
3.3 Waste Decontamination Enclosure………………………………..…...02 82 13-15
3.4 Work Area Entry and Exit Proc……………………………….…..…...02 82 13-16
3.5 Negative Air Pressure Filtration System……...…………………….....02 82 13-16
3.6 Removal of Asbestos Containing Material………………………….....02 82 13-17
3.7 Equipment and Waste Container Decontamination and Removal…....02 82 13-18
3.8 Tent Enclosures……….…………………………………………….....02 82 13-19
3.9 Glovebag Removal………………………………………………..…...02 82 13-20
4.0 DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTE…...……………………………..…...02 82 13-20
4.1 Transportation and Disposal Site…………………………..….…..…...02 82 13-20
4.2 Waste Storage Containers……………………………………..…..…...02 82 13-21
4.3 Asbestos Waste Manifests………………………………….……..…...02 82 13-21
SPECIFICATION SECTION 02-82-13
Asbestos Abatement
at
Cornell University’s Clark Hall
for the
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall Thermal System Upgrade Project
Prepared for:
Cornell University
121 Humphreys Service Building
Ithaca, NY 14853
Prepared by:
860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760
Phone: 607-231-6600
Fax: 607-231-6640
Delta Project No. 2016.304.004
Stephen Prislupsky, Director of Environmental Services
NYS DOL Certified Asbestos Project Designer
Certificate No. 90-10891
Construction Documents
Dated:
August 26, 2020
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 2 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 02-82-13
Ithaca, New York ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The asbestos abatement work listed below and shown on Drawings AR-100 / AR-101 shall be
included as Alternate No. 1 and will consist of the removal and disposal of non-asbestos materials,
asbestos containing materials and asbestos contaminated materials in the Clark Hall Sub-Basement.
B. Reference Drawing AR-100 for asbestos abatement notes and Drawing AR-101 for Sub-Basement
abatement locations, quantities, and details. Reference the GR Section 01 35 29 – General Health
and Safety for the Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Report.
C. Asbestos containing and asbestos contaminated materials to be removed include the following:
1. Asbestos Containing In-Line and Fitting Insulation on Steam Line: The Asbestos Containing
Hard-Packed in-line and fitting pipe insulation to be removed is present in the Clark Hall Sub -
basement on a 280 linear feet section of the existing 8” steam line as shown on Drawing AR-
101. The ACM Insulation starts at the south end near the 10” Steam Main that enters the
building and continues past column line 7 (where the insulation changes to non-suspect
fiberglass).
2. Asbestos Containing Hard-packed Fitting Insulation on non-asbestos fiberglass in-line
insulation: The Asbestos Containing Hard-Packed Pipe Fitting Insulation is present in the Clark
Hall Sub-basement on non-asbestos in-line fiberglass insulation associated with the hot water
supply and return piping at the “steam-to-HW” exchanger lines (between column line 9 & 10).
Approximately 10 LF (i.e. 10 fittings) are to be removed for pipe removals and new tie-ins.
Fitting insulation abatement shall be performed via glovebag operations in negative pressure
tent work areas having attached airlock systems for work area access/egress as per the
requirements of 12 NYCRR Part 56 for Glovebag in Tent operations. A remote large-project
decontamination enclosure system shall be constructed in the Sub-basement and utilized for the
project.
D. The Contractor shall be aware of all conditions of the Project and is responsible for verifying quantities
and locations of all Work to be performed. Failure to do so shall not relieve the Contractor of its
obligation to furnish all labor and materials necessary to perform the Work.
E. All Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the Project Documents and all governing
codes, rules, and regulations. Where conflicts occur between the Project Documents and applicable
codes, rules, and regulations, the more stringent shall apply.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 3 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.3 SPECIAL JOB CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor may submit for a Site Specific Variance to accomplish the Project. Variance petition
shall be submitted to the Owners Representative for review and approval prior to submission to the
New York State Department of Labor (NYS DOL).
B. Work shifts and working hours shall be as necessary to complete the project in the required time frame
and shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative for review/approval. The Contractor shall
coordinate and schedule all Work with the facility, the Owner, and the Owner’s representative.
C. Contractor is to provide “ADD” unit rates for the following items. Reference Section 01 22 00 “Unit
Pricing” for additional unit pricing information and requirements.
1. Removal of Asbestos Pipe/Pipe Fitting Insulation, per LF - This “Add” Unit Price is being
included to address the removal of Asbestos Containing Pipe/Pipe fitting insulation if
encountered during the project within currently inaccessible hard ceiling plenums, interstitial
wall spaces or underground pipe tunnels. If this material is encountered during construction
activities, it shall be removed as per 12 NYCRR Part 56 for glovebag operations within a
negative pressure tent enclosure. Unit Price to be based on removal of up to 25 linear feet at a
given location (i.e. glovebag within a minor-project tent enclosure at a given location). All
excavation and shoring operations required for pipe tunnel access shall be performed by others.
D. Contractor to submit man power and work schedule with bid.
E. Owner will provide a tie-in location for electric and water source. The contractor will be responsible
for providing GFCI electrical panel(s) and connecting to the building system as necessary for project
power.
F. Any air sampling necessary to meet OSHA requirements will be the responsibility of the Asbestos
Contractor.
G. Waste Dumpster locations shall be approved by the Facility Representative. All dumpsters receiving
RACM Waste shall be lined, enclosed and lockable (i.e. no open-to dumpsters).
H. Locations of the Sub-Basement Remote Decontamination Enclosure System shall be approved by the
Facility Representative.
1.4 PERMITS AND COMPLIANCE
A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for compliance with all applicable Federal,
State, and local laws, rules, and regulations pertaining to Work practices, protection of Workers,
authorized visitors to the site, persons, and property adjacent to the Work.
B. Perform asbestos related Work in accordance with New York State Industrial Code Rule 56 (herein
referred to as Code Rule 56), 40 CFR 61, 29 CFR 1926, and as specified herein. Where more stringent
requirements are specified, adhere to the more stringent requirements.
C. The Contractor must maintain current licenses pursuant to New York State Department of Labor and
Department of Environmental Conservation for all Work related to this Project, including the removal,
handling, transport, and disposal of asbestos containing materials.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 4 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
D. The Contractor must have and submit proof upon request that any persons employed by the Contractor
to engage in or supervise Work on any asbestos Project have a valid NYS asbestos handling certificate
pursuant to Code Rule 56.
E. Failure to adhere to the Project Documents shall constitute a breach of the Contract and the Owner
shall have the right to and may terminate the Contract provided, however, the failure of the Owner to
so terminate shall not relieve the Contractor from future compliance.
F. The contractor shall be responsible for any waste water permits required to perform his work under
this contract. Any cost associated with waste water permits shall be included in his Bid.
G. The contractor shall be responsible for any Local City and/or State building permits required to
perform his work. Any cost associated with building permits shall be included in his Bid.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Reference the Front–end and Division 01 documents for eBuilder submittal requirements/procedures.
B. Pre-Work Submittals: Within 7 days prior to the pre-construction conference, the Contractor shall
submit via eBuilder an electronic pdf format copy of the documents listed below for review and
approval prior to the commencement of asbestos abatement activities:
1. Contractor license issued by New York State Department of Labor.
2. Progress Schedule:
a. Show the complete sequence of abatement activities and the sequencing of Work for each
floor.
b. Show the dates for the beginning and completion of each major element of Work including
substantial completion dates for each Work Area and Floor.
3. Project Notifications: As required by Federal and State regulatory agencies together with proof of
transmittal (i.e. certified mail return receipt).
4. Building Occupant Notification: As required by regulatory agencies.
5. Abatement Work Plan: Provide plans that clearly indicate the following:
a. All Work Areas/containments numbered sequentially.
b. Proposed locations and types of all decontamination enclosures.
c. Location of water and electrical connections to building services.
d. Waste transport routes through the building to the waste storage container.
6. Disposal Site/Landfill Permit from applicable regulatory agency.
7. NYS Department of Environmental Conservation Waste Transporter Permit.
C. On-Site Submittals: Refer to Part 3.01.D for all submittals, documentation, and postings required to be
maintained on-site during abatement activities.
D. Project Close-out Submittals: Within 15 days of project completion, the Contractor shall submit an
electronic pdf format copy of the documents listed below for review and approval prior to the
Contractor’s final payment.
1. OSHA compliance air monitoring records conducted during the Work.
2. Daily progress log, including the entry/exit log.
3. A list of all Workers used in the performance of the Project, including name, NYS DOL
certification number and type of certification (i.e. supervisor, asbestos handler, etc.).
E. Fully executed/signed Originals of all waste disposal manifests shall be submitted as per applicable
State and Federal Regulations and time frame requirements.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 5 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
F. The contractor shall also be responsible for completing and submitting the Owner’s “Contractor Waste
Material Disposal Plan” form included in the front-end Bid Documents. This form shall be submitted
and approved by the Cornell Project Manager prior to the Owner issuing any payment for the project.
1.6 PRE-BID MEETING
A. Bidders shall attend a pre-bid meeting. Bidding Contractors will be notified in advance of the
meeting.
B. Contractors shall familiarize themselves with the Contract Documents prior to attending the
conference.
1.7 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
A. The Contractor shall comply with the following codes and standards, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified:
B. Federal Regulations:
1. 29 CFR 1910.1001, "Asbestos" (OSHA)
2. 29 CFR 1910.1200, "Hazard Communication" (OSHA)
3. 29 CFR 1910.134, "Respiratory Protection" (OSHA)
4. 29 CFR 1910.145, "Specification for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags" (OSHA)
5. 29 CFR 1926, "Construction Industry" (OSHA)
6. 29 CFR 1926.1101, "Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite" (OSHA)
7. 29 CFR 1926.500 "Guardrails, Handrails and Covers" (OSHA)
8. 40 CFR 61, Subpart A, "General Provisions" (EPA)
9. 40 CFR 61, Subpart M, "National Emission Standard for Asbestos" (EPA)
10. 49 CFR 171-172, Transportation Standards (DOT)
C. New York State Regulations:
1. 12 NYCRR, Part 56, "Asbestos", Industrial Code Rule 56 (DOL).
2. 6 NYCRR, Parts 360, 364, Disposal and Transportation (DEC)
3. 10 NYCRR, Part 73, "Asbestos Safety Program Requirements" (DOH)
D. Standards and Guidance Documents:
1. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) Z88.2-80, Practices for Respiratory Protection
2. ANSI Z9.2-79, Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems
3. EPA 560/585-024, Guidance for Controlling Asbestos Containing Materials in Buildings (Purple
Book)
4. EPA 530-SW-85-007, Asbestos Waste Management Guidance
5. ASTM Standard E1368 “Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement
Projects.”
1.8 NOTICES
A. The Contractor shall provide notification of intent to commence asbestos abatement activities as
indicated below.
1. If applicable, at least ten (10) Working days prior to beginning abatement activities, send written
notification to:
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 6 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPS) Coordinator
26 Federal Plaza
New York, NY 10007.
The Contractor is required to send notification via mail or package delivery service that will
provide proof of delivery and receipt.
2. At least ten (10) days prior to beginning abatement activities, submit notification to:
New York State Department of Labor
Division of Safety and Health, Asbestos Control Program.
State Office Campus
Building 12 - Room 454
Albany, NY 12240
Contractor shall print copy of electronic NYS DOL Notification Notice and post onsite.
B. The Contractor shall post and/or provide Building Occupant Notification at least 10 days prior to
beginning abatement activities as required by Code Rule 56.
1.9 PROJECT MONITORING AND AIR SAMPLING
A. The Owner shall engage the services of an Environmental Consultant (the Consultant) who shall
provide Project Monitoring and Air Sampling for the project.
B. The Contractor is required to ensure cooperation of its personnel with the Consultant for the air
sampling and Project monitoring functions described in this section. The Contractor shall comply with
all direction given by the Consultant during the course of the Project.
C. The Consultant shall review and approve or disapprove all onsite submittals as required by section 3.01.
D. The Consultant shall staff the Project with a trained and certified person(s). This individual shall be
designated as the Asbestos Project Monitor (APM).
1. The APM shall be on-site at all times the Contractor is o n-site. The Contractor shall not be
permitted to conduct any Work unless the APM is on-site (except for inspection of barriers and
negative air system during non-working days).
2. The APM shall have the authority to direct the actions of the Contractor verbally and in writing to
ensure compliance with the Project documents and all regulations. The APM shall have the
authority to Stop Work when gross Work practice deficiencies or unsafe practices are observed,
or when ambient fiber concentrations outside the removal area exceed .01 f/cc or background
level.
a. Such Stop Work order shall be effective immediately and remain in effect until corrective
measures have been taken and the situation has been corrected.
b. Standby time required to resolve the situation shall be at the Contractor's expense.
3. The APM shall provide the following services:
a. Inspection of the Contractor's Work, practices, and procedures, including temporary
protection requirements, for compliance with all regulations and Project specifications.
b. Provide abatement Project air sampling as required by applicable regulations and the
Owner’s requirements. Sampling will include background, work area preparation,
asbestos handling, and final cleaning and clearance air sampling.
c. Verify daily that all Workers used in the performance of the Project are certified by the
appropriate regulatory agency.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 7 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
d. Monitor the progress of the Contractor's Work, and report any deviations from the
schedule to the Owner’s Representative.
e. Monitor, verify, and document all waste load-out operations.
f. Verify that the Contractor is performing personal air monitoring daily, and that results are
being returned and posted at the site as required.
g. The APM shall maintain a log on site that documents all project related and Consultant
and Contractor actions, activities, and occurrences.
4. The following minimum inspections shall be conducted by the APM. Additional inspections shall
be conducted as required by Project conditions. Progression from one phase of Work to the next
by the Contractor is only permitted with the written approval of the APM.
a. Pre-Construction Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to verify the existing
conditions of the Work Areas and to document these conditions.
b. Pre-Abatement Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to verify the integrity of
each containment system prior to disturbance of any asbestos containing material. This
inspection shall take place only after the Work Area is fully prepped for removal.
c. Work In-Progress Inspections: The purpose of this inspection is to monitor the Work
practices and procedures employed on the Project and to monitor the continued integrity
of the containment system. Inspections within the removal areas shall be conducted by
the APM during all preparation, removal, and cleaning activities a t least twice every
Work shift. Additional inspections shall be conducted as warranted.
d. Visual Clearance Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to verify that: all materials
in the scope of work have been properly removed; no visible asbestos debris/residue
remains; no pools of liquid or condensation remains; and all required cleanings are
complete. This inspection shall be conducted before final air clearance testing.
e. Post-Clearance Inspection: The purpose of this inspection is to ensure the complete
removal of ACM, including debris, from the Work Area after satisfactory final clearance
sampling and removal of all isolation/critical barriers and equipment from the Work Area.
E. The Consultant shall provide abatement Project air sampling and analysis as required by applicable
regulations (New York State and/or AHERA). Sampling will include background , work area
preparation, asbestos handling, and final cleaning and clearance air sampling.
1. Unless otherwise directed by the Owner, the Consultant shall have samples analyzed by Phase
Contrast Microscopy (PCM). If TEM clearance is required by the Owner, AHERA
protocols/methodology shall be followed.
2. Samples shall be collected as required by applicable regulations (New York State and/or
AHERA) and these specifications. If Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) clearance air
sampling is utilized by the owner, the clearance criteria and sampling protocols must be in
compliance with AHERA. If PCM air sample analysis results exceed the satisfactory clearan ce
criteria, then TEM analysis of the entire set of clearance air samples may be used, provided that a
standard NIOSH/ELAP accepted laboratory analysis method is utilized that shall report each air
sample result in fibers per cubic centimeter.
3. If the air sampling during any phase of the abatement project reveals airborne fiber levels at or
above .01 fibers/cc or the established background level, whichever is greater, outside the
regulated Work Area, Work shall stop immediately and corrective measures required by Code
Rule 56 shall be initiated. Notify all employers and occupants in adjacent areas. The Contractor
shall bear the burden of any and all costs incurred by this delay.
4. The Environmental Consultant shall submit copies of all elevated air sampling results collected
during abatement and all final air clearance results to the Commissioner of Labor.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 8 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.10 CONTRACTOR AIR SAMPLING
A. In addition to the requirements of OSHA 1926.1101, the Contractor shall be required to perform
personal air monitoring every Work shift in each Work Area during which abatement activities occur in
order to determine that appropriate respiratory protection is being worn and utilized.
B. The Contractor shall conduct air sampling that is representative of both the 8-hour time weighted
average and 30-minute short-term exposures to indicate compliance with the permissible exposure and
excursion limits.
C. The Contractor's laboratory analysis of air samples shall be conducted by an NYS DOH ELAP
approved laboratory, subject to approval of the Owner’s Representative.
D. Results of personnel air sample analyses shall be available, verbally, within twenty-four (24) hours of
sampling and shall be posted upon receipt. Written laboratory reports shall be delivered and posted at
the Work site within five (5) days. Failure to comply with these requirements may result in all work
being stopped until compliance is achieved.
1.11 PROJECT SUPERVISOR
A. The Contractor shall designate a full-time Project Supervisor who shall meet the following
qualifications:
1. The Project Supervisor shall hold New York State certification as an Asbestos Supervisor.
2. The Project Supervisor shall meet the requirements of a "Competent Person" as defined by OSHA
1926.1101 and shall have a minimum of one year experience as a supervisor.
3. The Project Supervisor must be able to read and write English fluently, as well as communicate in
the primary language of the Workers.
B. If the Project Supervisor is not on-site at any time whatsoever, all Work shall be stopped. The Project
Supervisor shall remain on-site until the Project is complete. The Project Supervisor cannot be
removed from the Project without the written consent of the Owner. The Project Supervisor shall be
removed from the Project if so requested by the Owner.
C. The Project Supervisor shall maintain the bound Daily Project Log that also includes the entry/exit logs
as required by New York State Department of Labor and section 2.03 of the specifications and the
Waste Disposal Log required by section 4.04 of the specifications.
D. The Project Supervisor shall be responsible for the performance of the Work and shall represent the
Contractor in all respects at the Project site. The Supervisor shall be the primary point of contact for
the Asbestos Project Monitor.
1.12 MEDICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Before exposure to airborne asbestos fibers, provide Workers with a comprehensive medical
examination as required by 29 CFR 1910.1001, and 29 CFR 1926.1101.
1. This examination is not required if adequate records show the employee has been examined as
required by 29 CFR 1910.1001, and 29 CFR 1926.1101 within the past year.
2. The same medical examination shall be given on an annual basis to employees engaged in an
occupation involving asbestos fibers and within thirty (30) calendar days before or after the
termination of employment in such occupations.
3. Medical Examination records shall be maintained on site for each employee.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 9 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.13 TRAINING
A. As required by applicable regulations, prior to assignment to asbestos Work instruct each employee
with regard to the hazards of asbestos, safety and health precautions, and the use and requirements of
protective clothing and equipment.
B. Establish a respirator program as required by ANSI Z88.2 and 29 CFR 1910.134, and 29 CFR
1926.1101. Provide respirator training and fit testing.
C. An onsite "tool box talk" is mandatory for all Contractor field personnel before the asbestos removal
can begin. This talk will review Cornell University practices and procedures pertaining to asbestos
control. Workers not complying with these specifications or Cornell University practices and
procedures will be asked to leave the job.
1.14 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
A. Select respirators from those approved by the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA), and the
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), Department of Health and Human
Services.
B. Respirators shall be individually fit-tested to personnel under the direction of an Industrial Hygienist on
a yearly basis. Fit-tested respirators shall be permanently marked to identify the individual fitted, and
use shall be limited to that individual. Fit-test records shall be maintained on site for each employee.
C. Where fiber levels permit, and in compliance with regulatory requirements, Powered Air Purifying
Respirators (PAPR) are the minimum allowable respiratory protection permitted to be utilized during
gross removal operations of OSHA Class I or OSHA Class II friable ACM.
D. No respirators shall be issued to personnel without such personnel participating in a respirator training
program.
E. High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) respirator filters shall be approved by NIOSH and shall
conform to the OSHA requirements in 29 CFR 1910.134 and 29 CFR 1926.1101.
F. A storage area for respirators shall be provided by the Contractor in the clean room side of the
personnel decontamination enclosure where they will be kept in a clean environment.
G. The Contractor shall provide and make available a sufficient quantity of respirator filters so that filter
changes can be made as necessary during the work day. Filters will be removed and discarded during
the decontamination process. Filters cannot be reused. Filters must be changed if breathing beco mes
difficult.
H. Filters used with negative pressure air purifying respirators shall not be used any longer than one eight
(8) hour work day.
I. Any authorized visitor, Worker, or supervisor found in the Work Area not wearing the required
respiratory protection shall be removed from the Project site and not be permitted to return.
J. The Contractor shall have at least two (2) Powered Air Purifying Respirators stored on site designated
for authorized visitors use. Appropriate respirator filters for authorized visitors shall be made available
by the Contractor.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 10 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.15 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver all materials to the job site in original packages with containers bearing manufacturer's name
and label.
B. Store all materials at the job site in a suitable and designated area.
1. Store materials subject to deterioration or damage away from wet or damp surf aces and under
cover.
2. Protect materials from unintended contamination and theft.
3. Storage areas shall be kept clean and organized.
C. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from the job site. Materials contaminated with asbestos
shall be disposed of as asbestos debris as herein specified.
1.16 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Temporary shutdown of HVAC and lock out of electric power to abatement work areas shall be the
responsibility of the contractor and shall be coordinated with the owner. If electrical c ircuits,
machinery and other electrical systems in or passing through a given regulated abatement work area
must stay in operation, the contractor shall isolate/seal the live electric as per the requirements of 12
NYCRR Part 56 Subpart 56-7.7.
B. The Owner will provide a tie-in location to building power for the Contractor’s GFCI electric panel for
project power. All temporary power to the work areas shall be brought in from outside the work area
through a ground-fault circuit interrupter at the source. The contractor will be responsible for all
temporary power (including the power required by the owner's representative for air sampling
equipment). All operations associated with electrical service work (i.e. lockout, temporary power
hook-up, etc.) shall be performed by a licensed electrician.
C. Provide temporary lighting with "weatherproof" fixtures for all Work Areas including decontamination
chambers.
1. The entire Work Area shall be kept illuminated at all times.
2. Provide lighting as required by the Environmental Consultant for the purposes of performing
required inspections.
D. All temporary devices and wiring used in the Work Area shall be capable of decontamination
procedures including HEPA vacuuming and wet-wiping.
E. Utilize domestic water service, if available, from Owner's existing system. Provide hot water heaters
with sufficient capacity to meet Project demands.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
A. Provide personnel utilized during the Project with disposable protective whole body c lothing, head
coverings, gloves and foot coverings. Provide disposable plastic or rubber gloves to protect hands.
Cloth gloves may be worn inside the plastic or rubber for comfort, but shall not be used alone. Make
sleeves secure at the wrists and make foot coverings secure at the ankles by the use of tape, or provide
disposable coverings with elastic wrists or tops.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 11 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. Provide sufficient quantities of protective clothing to assure a minimum of four (4) complete
disposable outfits per day for each individual performing abatement Work.
C. Eye protection and hard hats shall be provided and made available for all personnel entering any Work
Area.
D. Authorized visitors shall be provided with suitable protective clothing, headgear, eye protection, and
footwear whenever they enter the Work Area.
2.2 SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Provide warning signs and barrier tapes at all approaches to asbestos Work Areas. Locate signs at such
distance that personnel may read the sign and take the necessary protective steps requi red before
entering the area.
1. Provide danger signs in vertical format conforming to 29 CFR 1926.1101, minimum 20" x 14"
displaying the following legend.
DANGER
ASBESTOS CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE
HAZARD
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA
2. Provide 3" wide yellow barrier tape printed with black lettered, "DANGER ASBESTOS
REMOVAL". Locate barrier tape across all corridors, entrances and access routes to asbestos
Work Area. Install tape 3' to 4' AFF.
B. Provide asbestos danger labels affixed to all asbestos materials, scrap, waste, debris and other products
contaminated with asbestos.
1. Provide asbestos danger labels of sufficient size to be clearly legible, displaying the following
legend:
DANGER
CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS
AVOID CREATING DUST
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
2. Provide the following asbestos labels, of sufficient size to be clearly legible, for display on waste
containers (bags or drums) which will be used to transport asbestos contaminated material in
accordance with United States Department of Transportation 49 CFR Parts 171 and 172:
RQ HAZARDOUS
SUBSTANCE
SOLID, NOS
ORM-E, NA 9188
ASBESTOS
3. Generator identification information shall be affixed to each waste container indicating the
following printed in indelible ink:
Generator Name
Facility Name
Facility Address
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 12 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
2.3 DAILY PROJECT LOG
A. Provide a Daily Project Log. The log shall contain on title page the Project name, name, address and
phone number of Owner; name, address and phone number of Owner’s Representative; name, address
and phone number of Environmental Consultant; name, address and phone number of Abatement
Contractor; emergency numbers including, but not limited to local Fire/Rescue department and all
other New York State Department of Labor requirements.
B. All entries into the log shall be made in non-washable, permanent ink and such pen shall be strung to or
otherwise attached to the log to prevent removal from the log-in area. Under no circumstances shall
pencil entries be permitted.
C. All persons entering and exiting the Work Area shall sign the log and include name, social security
number, and time.
D. The Project Supervisor shall document all Work performed daily and note all inspections required by
Code Rule 56, i.e. testing and inspection of barriers and enclosures.
2.4 SCAFFOLDING AND LADDERS
A. Provide all scaffolding and/or staging as necessary to accomplish the Work of this Contract.
Scaffolding may be of suspension type or standing type such as metal tube and coupler, tubular welded
frame, pole or outrigger type or cantilever type. The type, erection and use of all scaffolding and
ladders shall comply with all applicable OSHA construction industry standards.
B. Provide scaffolding and ladders as required by the Environmental Consultant for the purposes o f
performing required inspections.
2.5 SURFACTANT (AMENDED WATER)
A. Wet all asbestos-containing materials prior to removal with surfactant mixed and applied in accordance
with manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Approved Manufacturer:
1. International Protective Coatings Corp.: Serpiflex Shield
2. American Coatings Corp.: EPA 55 Asbestos Removal Agent
3. Certified Technologies: CerTane 2075 Penetrating Surfactant
2.6 ENCAPSULANT
A. Encapsulant shall be tinted or pigmented so that application when dry is readily discernible.
2.7 DISPOSAL BAGS, DRUMS, AND CONTAINERS
A. Provide 6 mil polyethylene disposal bags printed with asbestos caution labels. Bags shall also be
imprinted with U.S. Department of Transportation required markings.
B. Provide 30 or 55 gallon capacity fiber, plastic, or metal drums capable of being sealed air and water
tight if asbestos waste has the potential to damage or puncture disposal bags. Affix asbestos caution
labels on lids and at one-third points around drum circumference to assure ready identification.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 13 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
C. Containers and bags must be labeled in accordance with 40 CFR Part 61 NESHAPS and Code Rule 56.
When the bags/containers are moved to the lockable hardtop dumpster from the waste decontamination
system washroom, the bags must also be appropriately labeled with the date they are moved on th e
bag/container in waterproof markings.
D. Labeled ACM waste containers or bags shall not be used for non-ACM waste or trash. Any material
placed in labeled containers or bags, whether turned inside out or not shall be handled and disposed of
as ACM waste.
2.8 HEPA VACUUM EQUIPMENT
A. All dry vacuuming performed under this contract shall be performed with High Efficiency Particulate
Absolute (HEPA) filter equipped industrial vacuums conforming to ANSI Z9.2.
B. Provide tools and specialized equipment including scraping nozzles with integral vacuum hoods
connected to a HEPA vacuum with flexible hose.
2.9 POWER TOOLS
A. Any power tools used to drill, cut into, or otherwise disturb asbestos material shall be manufacturer
equipped with HEPA filtered local exhaust ventilation.
2.10 POLYETHYLENE SHEETING
A. All polyethylene (plastic) sheeting used on the Project (including but not limited to sheeting used for
critical and isolation barriers, fixed objects, walls, floors, ceilings, waste container) shall be at least 6
mil fire retardant sheeting.
B. Decontamination enclosure systems shall utilize at least 6 mil opaque fire retardant plastic sheeting. At
least 2 layers of 6 mil reinforced fire retardant plastic sheeting shall be used for the flooring.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Should visible emissions or water leaks be observed outside the Work Area, immediately stop Work
and institute emergency procedures per Code Rule 56. Should there be elevated fiber levels outside the
Work Area, immediately stop Work, institute emergency procedures per Code Rule 56, and notify all
employers and occupants in adjacent areas. All costs incurred in decontaminating such non-Work
Areas and the contents thereof shall be borne by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Medical approval, fit test reports, and NYS DOL certificates shall be on site prior to admittance of any
Contractor’s employees to the asbestos Work Area.
C. The following submittals, documentation, and postings shall be maintained on-site by the Contractor
during abatement activities at a location approved by the Abatement Project Monitor:
1. Contractor license issued by New York State Department of Labor.
2. Certification, Worker Training, Medical Surveillance:
a. New York State Asbestos Handler certification cards for each person employed in the
removal, handling, or disturbance of asbestos.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 14 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
b. Evidence that Workers have received proper training required by the regulations and the
medical examinations required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101.
c. Documentation that Workers have been fit tested specifically for respirators used on the
Project.
3. Daily OSHA personal air monitoring results.
4. NYS Department of Health ELAP certification for the laboratory that will be analyzing the
OSHA personnel air samples.
5. NYS Department of Environmental Conservation Waste Transporter Permit.
6. Project documents (specifications and drawings.)
7. Notifications and variances (site specific and applicable.) Ensure that the most up-to-date
notifications and variances are on-site.
8. Applicable regulations.
9. Material Safety Data Sheets of supplies/chemicals used on the Project.
10. Approved Abatement Work Plan.
11. List of emergency telephone numbers.
12. Magnahelic manometer semi-annual calibration certification.
13. Daily Project Log.
D. The following documentation shall be maintained on-site by the Abatement Project Monitor during
abatement activities:
1. Contractor license issued by New York State Department of Labor.
2. Air Sample Log.
3. Air sample results.
4. Project Monitor Daily Log
5. Asbestos Survey Report.
6. A copy of ASTM Standard E1368 “Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos
Abatement Projects.”
E. The Work Area must be vacated by building occupants prior to decontamination enclosure construction
and Work Area preparation.
F. All demolition necessary to access asbestos containing materials for removal must be conducted within
negative pressure enclosures by licensed asbestos handlers. Demolition debris may be disposed of as
construction and demolition debris provided the Abatement Project Monitor determines that it is not
contaminated with asbestos and there has been no disturbance of ACM within the enclosure. If the
demolition debris is determined to be contaminated or ACM has been disturbed, it must be disposed of
as asbestos waste.
3.2 PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE
A. Provide a personnel decontamination enclosure system. The system shall be contiguous to the Work
Area unless the use of a remote unit is permitted by Code Rule 56 or a Site Specific Variance. The
decontamination enclosure shall not be located within the work area unless isolation barriers are
installed. If the decontamination unit is accessible to the public it shall be fully framed and sheathed to
prevent unauthorized entry.
B. For attached Unit, access to the Work Area will be from the clean room through an air-lock to the
shower and through an air lock to the equipment room. Each airlock shall be a minimum of three feet
from door to door. Additional air locks shall be provided as required by Code Rule 56 for remote
decontamination enclosures.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 15 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
C. The decontamination enclosure ceiling and walls shall be covered with one layer of opaque 6 mil
polyethylene sheeting. Two layers of reinforced polyethylene sheeting shall be used to cover the floor.
D. The entrance to the clean room shall have a lockable door. Provide suitable lockers for storage of
Worker's street clothes. Storage for respirators along with replacement filters and disposable towels
shall also be provided.
E. Provide a temporary shower with individual hot and cold water su pplies and faucets. Provide a
sufficient supply of soap and shampoo. There shall be one shower for every six Workers. The shower
room shall be constructed in such a way so that travel through the shower chamber shall be through the
shower. The shower shall not be able to be bypassed.
F. Shower water shall be drained, collected and filtered through a system with at least a 5.0 micron
particle size collection capability containing a series of several filters with progressively smaller pore
sizes to avoid rapid clogging of the system. The filtered waste water s hall then be discharged in
accordance with applicable codes and the contaminated filters disposed of as asbestos waste.
G. The equipment room shall be used for the storage of tools and equipment. A walk-off pan filled with
water shall be located in the Work Area outside the equipment room for Workers to clean foot
coverings when leaving the Work Area. A labeled 6 mil plastic ACM waste bag for collection of
contaminated clothing shall be located in this room.
H. The personal decontamination enclosure shall be cleaned and disinfected minimally at the end of each
Work shift and as otherwise directed by the Asbestos Project Monitor.
3.3 WASTE DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE
A. Provide a waste decontamination enclosure system. The system shall be contiguous to the Work Area
unless the use of a remote unit is permitted by Code Rule 56 or a Site Specific Variance. The
decontamination enclosure shall not be located within the work area unless isolation barriers are
installed. If the Unit is accessible to the public it shall be fully framed and sheathed to prevent
unauthorized entry.
B. The waste decontamination enclosure system shall consist of a holding area, air lock and washroom.
The airlock shall be a minimum of three feet from door to door. The entrance to the holding area shall
have a lockable door.
C. The decontamination enclosure ceiling and walls shall be covered with one layer of opaque 6 mil
polyethylene sheeting on walls and ceiling. Two layers of reinforced polyethylene sheeting shall be
used to cover the floor.
D. Where there is only one egress from the Work Area, the holding area of the waste decontamination
enclosure system may branch off from the personnel decontamination enclosure equipment room,
which then serves as the waste wash room.
E. The waste wash room water shall be drained, collected, and filtered through a system with at least a 5.0
micron particle size collection capability containing a series of several filters with progres sively
smaller pore sizes to avoid rapid clogging of the system. The filtered waste water shall then be
discharged in accordance with applicable codes and the contaminated filters disposed of as asbestos
waste.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 16 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
F. In small asbestos Projects where only one egress from the Work Area exists, the shower room may be
used as a waste washroom. In this instance, the clean room shall not be used for waste stora ge, but
shall be used for waste transfer to carts, which shall immediately be removed from this enclosure.
3.4 WORK AREA ENTRY AND EXIT PROCEDURES
A. Access to and from the asbestos Work Area is permitted only through the personnel decontamination
enclosure unless otherwise stipulated in a Site Specific Variance, the Cornell Ithaca Campus-Wide
Variance, or 12 NYCRR Part 56 Subpart 11 Special Projects.
B. Workers shall sign the entry/exit log upon every entry and exit.
C. The following procedures shall be followed when entering the Work Area:
1. Before entering the Work Area, Workers shall proceed to the clean room, remove all street
clothes, and don protective clothing, equipment, and respirators.
2. Workers shall proceed from the clean room through the shower room and the equipment room
and into the Work Area.
D. The following procedures shall be followed when exiting the Work Area:
1. Before leaving the Work Area, gross asbestos contamination will be removed by brushing, wet
cleaning and/or HEPA vacuuming.
2. In the equipment room, Workers shall remove disposable clothing, but not respirators, and shall
place clothing in plastic disposal bags for disposal as contaminated debris prior to entering the
shower room.
3. Workers shall shower thoroughly while wearing respirators, then wash respirator with soap and
water prior to removal.
4. Upon exiting the shower, Workers shall don new disposable clothing if the Work shift is to
continue or street clothes to exit area. Under no circumstances shall Workers enter public non-
Work Areas in disposable protective clothing.
E. If remote decontamination enclosures are permitted by Code Rule 56 or a Site Specific Variance,
workers shall wear two disposable suits for all phases of Work. Workers exiting the work area shall
HEPA vacuum the outer suit, enter the airlock, remove the outer suit and then place it back into the
Work Area. A clean second suit shall be donned before exiting the airlock and proceeding to the
decontamination enclosure or another work area via the designated pathway required by Code Rule 56.
3.5 NEGATIVE AIR PRESSURE FILTRATION SYSTEM
A. For Minor Project negative pressure tent work areas, a HEP-vacuum shall be utilized for negative air as
per 12 NYCRR Part 56-11.3
B. For small-project and large-project work areas, provide a portable asbestos filtration system that
develops a minimum pressure differential of negative 0.02 in. of water column within all full enclosure
areas relative to adjacent unsealed areas and that provides a minimum of 4 air changes per hour in the
Work Area during abatement and 6 air changes for non-friable flooring and/or mastic removal.
C. Such filtration systems must be made operational after critical and isolation barriers are installed but
before wall, floor, and ceilings are plasticized and shall be operated 24 hours per day during the entire
Project until the final cleanup is completed and satisfactory results of the final air samples are received
from the laboratory.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 17 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
D. The system shall include a series of pre-filters and filters to provide High Efficiency Particulate Air
(HEPA) filtration of particles down to 0.3 microns at 100% efficiency and below 0.3 microns at 99.9%
efficiency. Provide sufficient replacement filters to replace pre-filters every 2 hours, secondary
pre-filters every 24 hours, and primary HEPA filters every 600 hours of operation.
E. A minimum of one additional filtration unit of at least the same capacity as the primary unit(s) shall be
installed and fully functional to be used during primary unit (s) filter changing and in case of primary
failure.
F. At no time will the unit exhaust indoors, within 15 feet of a receptor, including but not limited to
windows and doors, or adversely affect the air intake of the building. Exhaust ducting shall not exceed
25’ in length unless the conditions of AV-A-2 are utilized. Provide construction fencing at ground level
exhaust termination locations per Code Rule 56.
G. Upon electric power failure or shut-down of any filtration unit, all ab atement activities shall stop
immediately and only resume after power is restored and all filtration units are fully operating. For
shut-downs longer than one hour, all openings into the Work Area, including the decontamination
enclosures, shall be sealed.
H. The Contractor shall provide a manometer to verify negative air pressure. Manometers shall be read
twice daily and recorded within the Daily Project Log.
I. There shall be at least a 4 hour settling period after the Work Area is fully prepared and the negative
filtration units have been started to ensure integrity of the barriers.
J. Once installed and operational, the Contractor’s Supervisor shall conduct daily inspections of the Work
Area to insure the airtight integrity of the enclosure and operation of the negative air system. Findings
shall be recorded within the Daily Project Log. Inspections shall also be conducted on days when no
abatement activities are in progress per Code Rule 56 (i.e. weekends).
3.6 REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS
A. Asbestos-containing materials shall be removed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the
approved Asbestos Work Plan. Only one type of ACM shall be abated at a time within a Work Area.
Where there are multiple types of ACM requiring abatement, Code Rule 56 procedures for sequential
abatement shall be followed.
B. Sufficiently wet asbestos materials with a low pressure, airless fine spray of surfactant to ensure full
penetration prior to material removal. Re-wet material that does not display evidence of saturation.
C. One Worker shall continuously apply amended water while ACM is being removed.
D. Perform cutting, drilling, abrading, or any penetration or disturbance of asbestos containing material in
a manner to minimize the dispersal of asbestos fibers into the air. Use equipment and methods
specifically designed to limit generation of airborne asbestos particles. All power operated tools used
shall be provided with HEPA equipped filtered local exhaust ventilation.
E. Upon removal of ACM from the substrate, the newly exposed surfaces shall be HEPA vacuumed
and/or wet cleaned. Surfaces must be thoroughly cleaned using necessary methods and any required
solvents to completely remove any adhesive, mastic, etc.
F. All removed material shall be placed into 6 mil plastic disposal bags or other suitable container upon
detachment from the substrate. Cleanup of accumulations of loose debris or waste shall be performed
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 18 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
whenever there is enough accumulation to fill a single bag or container and minimally at the end of
each workshift.
G. Large components shall be wrapped in two layers of 6 mil polyethylene sheeting. Sharp components
likely to tear disposal bags shall be placed in fiber drums or boxes and then wrapped with sheeting.
H. Power or pressure washers are not permitted for asbestos removal or clean -up procedures unless
approved in a Site Specific Variance.
I. All open ends of pipe and duct insulation not scheduled for removal shall be encapsulated using lag
cloth.
J. All construction and demolition debris determined by the Environmental Consultant to be
contaminated with asbestos shall be handled and disposed of as asbestos waste.
K. The use of metal shovels, metal dust pans, etc. are not permitted inside the work area.
3.7 EQUIPMENT AND WASTE CONTAINER DECONTAMINATION AND REMOVAL
PROCEDURES
A. External surfaces of contaminated containers and equipment shall be cleaned by wet cleaning and/or
HEPA vacuuming in the Work Area before moving such items into the waste decontamination
enclosure system airlock by persons assigned to this duty. The persons in the Work Area shall not
enter the airlock. No gross removal operations are permitted when waste transfer is in progress.
B. The containers and equipment shall be removed from the airlock by persons stationed in the washroom
during waste removal operations. The external surfaces of containers and equipment shall be cleaned a
second time by wet cleaning.
C. The cleaned containers of asbestos material and equipment are to be dried of any excessive pooled or
beaded liquid, placed in uncontaminated 6 mil plastic bags or sheeting, as the item's physical
characteristics demand, and sealed airtight.
D. The clean recontainerized items shall be moved into the airlock that leads to the holding area. Workers
in the washroom shall not enter this airlock.
E. Containers and equipment shall be moved from the airlock and into the holding area by persons dressed
in clean personal protective equipment, who have entered from the holding area.
F. The cleaned containers of asbestos material and equipment shall be placed in water tight carts with
doors or tops that shall be closed and secured. These carts shall be held in the holding area pending
removal. The carts shall be wet cleaned and/or HEPA vacuumed at least once each day.
G. The exit from the decontamination enclosure system shall be secured to prevent unauthorized entry.
H. Where the waste removal enclosure is part of the personnel decontamination enclosure, waste removal
shall not occur during shift changes or when otherwise occupied. Precautions shall be taken to prevent
short circuiting and cycling of air outward through the shower and clean room.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 19 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.8 TENT ENCLOSURES
A. Tent enclosures may only be used where specifically permitted by Code Rule 56 or a Site Specific
Variance issued by the NYS Department of Labor.
B. The Contractor shall restrict access to the immediate area where tent removal procedures are taking
place using barrier tape and/or construction barriers. Caution signs shall be posted.
C. Remote personnel and waste decontamination enclosures shall be constructed when required, based on
the scope of the tent work scope. Configuration shall be as required by Project size. For tent enclosures
with gross abatement of friable materials, a contiguous decontamination system shall be constructed,
maintained and utilized, except for minor size tent enclosure work areas where a remote
decontamination enclosure is permitted by Code Rule 56.
D. The Work Area shall be precleaned. All objects and equipment that will remain in the restricted area
during abatement shall be sealed with two layers of six mil polyethylene and tape.
E. The tent shall be a single use barrier constructed with a rigid frame and at least two layers of six mil
polyethylene unless one layer of six mil polyethylene is otherwise permitted by Code Rule 56. Tents
with twenty (20) square feet or less of floor space or no gross removal of friable ACM s hall be
constructed of one (1) layer of six mil polyethylene and shall include walls, ceilings and a floor (except
portions of walls, floors and ceilings that are the removal surface) with double folded seams. All seams
shall be sealed airtight using duct tape and/or spray adhesive.
F. The tent shall be constructed with at least one airlock for worker/waste egress.
G. A manometer shall be used for all OSHA Class I abatement.
H. Negative air shall be maintained at four (4) air changes per hour for non-friable and glovebag
abatement tent enclosure work areas. Eight (8) air changes shall be maintained for friable gross
removal tent enclosure work areas. In a Minor size abatement tent enclosure work area a HEPA
vacuum may be used to maintain the required air changes.
I. OSHA compliance air monitoring is required per section 1.09.
J. ACM removal shall follow procedures defined in section 3.07.
K. Waste material shall be placed in properly labeled 6 mil plastic bags or other appropriate containers.
The outside of the bags or containers shall be wet wiped and/or HEPA vacuumed and shall then be
placed in a second bag/container before being transported to the waste storage container. All
transportation of waste bags and containers outside the Work Area shall be in watertight carts. These
carts shall be held in the holding area pending removal. The carts shall be wet cleaned and/or HEPA
vacuumed at least once each day.
L. Following completion of gross abatement and after all accumulations of asbestos waste materials have
been containerized, the following decontamination procedures shall be followed.
1. All bagged asbestos waste and unnecessary equipment shall be decontaminated and removed
from the Work Area.
2. All surfaces in the Work Area shall be wet cleaned. A wet-purpose shop vacuum may be used
to pick up excess liquid, and shall be decontaminated prior to removal from the Work Area.
3. The Asbestos Project Monitor shall conduct a visual inspection of the Work Area for cleanliness
and completion of abatement.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 20 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
4. After the waiting/settling and drying time requirements have elapsed, aggressive final clearance
air sampling shall then be conducted by the Environmental Consultant.
5. Upon receipt of satisfactory final clearance air sampling results, the tent shall be collapsed into
itself, placed in suitable disposal bags, and transported to the waste decontamination enclosure.
Isolation and critical barriers shall then be removed.
3.9 GLOVEBAG REMOVAL
A. Glovebag removals may only be used as specifically permitted by Code Rule 56 or a Site Specific
Variance issued by the NYS Department of Labor. Glovebags may only be used on piping.
B. In addition to conformance with applicable regulations and variances, glovebag removals are only
permitted to be conducted within tent enclosures complying with these specifications.
C. The Contractor shall restrict access to the immediate area where tent/glovebag removal procedures are
taking place using barrier tape and/or construction barriers. Caution signs shall be posted.
D. Remote personnel and waste decontamination enclosures shall be constructed. Configuration shall be
as required by Project size.
E. Glovebag removals shall utilize commercially available glovebags of at least six mil thickne ss. Use
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the following minimum requirements:
1. The sides of the glovebag shall be cut to fit the size pipe being removed. Tools shall be inserted
into the attached tool pocket.
2. The glovebag shall be placed around the pipe and the open edges shall be folded and sealed with
staples and duct tape. The glovebag shall also be sealed at the pipe to form a tight seal.
3. Openings shall be made in the glovebag for the wetting tube and HEPA vacuum hose. The
opening shall be sealed to form a tight seal.
4. All glovebags shall be smoke tested by the Asbestos Project Monitor under negative pressure
using the HEPA vacuum before removal operations commence. Glovebags that do not pass the
smoke test shall be resealed and then retested.
5. After first wetting the materials to be removed, removal may commence. ACM shall be
continuously wetted. After removal of the ACM, the piping shall be scrubbed or brushed so that
no visible ACM remains. Open ends of pipe insulation shall be encapsulated.
6. After the piping is cleaned, the inside of the glovebag shall be washed down and the wetting
tube removed. Using the HEPA vacuum, the glovebag shall be collapsed and then twisted and
sealed with tape with the ACM at the bottom of the bag.
7. A disposal bag shall be placed around the glovebag that is then detached from the pipe. The
disposal bag is then sealed and transported to the decontamination enclosure.
F. After glovebag removals are complete, tent decontamination procedures shall be followed.
PART 4 DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTE
4.1 TRANSPORTATION AND DISPOSAL SITE
A. The Contractor's Hauler and Disposal Site shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative.
B. The Contractor shall give twenty-four (24) hour notification prior to removing any waste from the site.
Waste shall be removed from the site only during normal working hours unless otherwise specified.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 21 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
No waste may be taken from the site unless the Contractor and Environmental Consultant are present
and the Environmental Consultant authorizes the release of the waste as described herein.
C. All waste generated as part of the asbestos project shall be removed from the site within ten (10)
calendar days after successful completion of all asbestos abatement work.
D. Upon arrival at the Project Site, the Hauler must possess and present to the Environmental Consultant a
valid New York State Department of Environmental Conservation Part 364 Asbestos Hauler's Permit.
The Environmental Consultant may verify the authenticity of the hauler's permit with the proper
authority.
E. The Hauler, with the Contractor and the Environmental Consultant, shall inspect all material in th e
transport container prior to taking possession and signing the Asbestos Waste Manifests.
F. Unless specifically approved by the Owner, the Contractor shall not permit any off-site transfers of the
waste or allow the waste to be transported or combined with any other off-site asbestos material. The
Hauler must travel directly to the disposal site as identified on the notifications with no unauthorized
stops.
4.2 WASTE STORAGE CONTAINERS
A. All waste containers shall be fully enclosed and lockable (i.e. enclosed dumpster, trailer, etc.). No open
containers will be permitted on-site (i.e. open dumpster with canvas cover, etc.) unless specifically
permitted by a Site Specific Variance.
B. The Environmental Consultant shall verify that the waste storage container and/or truck tags (license
plates) match that listed on the New York State Department of Environmental Conservation Part 364
permit. Any container not listed on the permit shall be removed from the site immediately.
C. The container shall be plasticized and sealed with two (2) layers of 6 mil polyethylene. Once on site, it
shall be kept locked at all times, except during load out. The waste container shall not be u sed for
storage of equipment or contractor supplies.
D. While on-site, the container shall be labeled with EPA Danger signage:
DANGER
CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS
AVOID CREATING DUST
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
E. The New York State Department of Environmental Conservation Asbestos Hauler's Permit number
shall be stenciled on both sides and back of the container.
F. The container is not permitted to be loaded unless it is properly plasticized, has the appropriate danger
signage affixed, and has the permit number appropriately stenciled on the container.
4.3 ASBESTOS WASTE MANIFESTS
A. The proposed asbestos waste manifest shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative prior to the
start of the project for review and approval.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall ASBESTOS ABATEMENT 02-82-13 22 Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. The Manifest shall be completed by the Contractor and verified by the Environmental Consultant that
all the information and amounts are accurate and the proper signatures are in place.
C. The Manifests shall have the appropriate signatures prior to any waste being removed from the site.
D. Copies of the completed Manifest shall be retained by the Environmental Consultant and the
Contractor and shall remain on site for inspection.
E. Upon arrival at the Disposal Site, the Manifest shall be signed by the Disposal Facility operator to
certify receipt of ACM covered by the manifest. The Disposal Facility operator shall return the
original Manifest to the Contractor.
F. The Contractor shall forward copies of the Manifest to the Owner’s Representative within 14 days of
the waste container being removed from the site. Failure to do so may result in payment being
withheld from the Contractor.
G. Originals of all waste disposal manifests shall be submitted b y the Contractor to the Owner’s
Representative with the final close-out documentation.
END OF SECTION 02 82 13
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 03-30-00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Work Included ........................................................................................................ 1
1.2 Related Work .......................................................................................................... 2
1.3 Reference Specifications ......................................................................................... 2
1.4 Submittals ............................................................................................................... 2
1.5 Testing and Control for Concrete ........................................................................... 3
1.6 Notification of Related Trades ................................................................................ 4
2.0 PRODUCTS........................................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Materials for Concrete ............................................................................................ 4
2.1.1 Cement ................................................................................................................ 5
2.1.2 Aggregates .......................................................................................................... 5
2.1.3 Water .................................................................................................................. 5
2.1.4 Admixtures ......................................................................................................... 5
2.1.5 Fly Ash ............................................................................................................... 5
2.1.6 Silica Fume ......................................................................................................... 6
2.1.7 Concrete Reinforcement ..................................................................................... 6
2.3 Concrete Mixtures ................................................................................................... 8
3.0 EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................ 8
3.1 Forming ................................................................................................................... 8
3.2 Mixing Process........................................................................................................ 9
3.3 Fabrication and Placing Reinforcing ...................................................................... 9
3.4 Embedded Items.................................................................................................... 10
3.5 Joints ..................................................................................................................... 10
3.6 Waterstops............................................................................................................. 10
3.7 Placing................................................................................................................... 11
3.8 Finishes ................................................................................................................. 12
3.8.1 Floor and Other Flatwork Finishes ................................................................... 12
3.8.2 Formed Surface Finish ..................................................................................... 12
3.9 Curing and Protection ........................................................................................... 12
3.10 Moisture Barrier .................................................................................................... 14
3.11 Surface Repairs ..................................................................................................... 14
3.12 Cutting of Holes .................................................................................................... 15
3.13 Grout ..................................................................................................................... 15
SECTION 03-30-00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
3.14 Evaluation ............................................................................................................. 15
3.14.1 Strength .......................................................................................................... 15
3.14.2 Additional Tests.............................................................................................. 15
3.15 Acceptance ............................................................................................................ 16
3.16 Strength of Structure ............................................................................................. 17
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03-30-00 1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03-30-00
Ithaca, New York CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Work Included
A. For Steam Distribution Structures see Table below.
Concrete
Component
Location
Cast-in-
Place or
Precast
Rebar Type
Concrete Name in
Specification
Section 033000
Minimum F°c
at 28 Days
Max Water-
Cement
Ratio
Air
Entrainment
Waterproofing
Admix Additional Information
Steam Vault Floors and Walls
Cast-in-Place or Precast Black Bar Exterior Exposure Concrete 4500 PSI 0.45 1% to 3% None
Substitute 15% to 20% of total cementitious material (by weight) with Type F Fly Ash (Conforming to ASTM C618). Substitute 5% to 15% of the total cementitious material by weight with Silica Fume conforming to ASTM C1240.
Steam Vault Roofs Precast Black Bar Exterior Exposure Concrete 4500 PSI 0.45 1% to 3% None
Substitute 15% to 20% of total
cementitious material (by weight) with
Type F Fly Ash (Conforming to ASTM C618). Substitute 5% to 15% of the total cementitious material by weight with Silica Fume conforming to ASTM C1240.
Steam Tunnel
Base Slabs
Cast-in-
Place Black Bar Exterior Exposure
Concrete 4500 PSI 0.45 1% to 3% None
Substitute 15% to 20% of total
cementitious material (by weight) with
Type F Fly Ash (Conforming to ASTM
C618)
Steam Tunnel Doghouse Sections Precast Black Bar Exterior Exposure Concrete 6000 PSI 0.45 1% to 3% None
Substitute 15% to 20% of total cementitious material (by weight) with Type F Fly Ash (Conforming to ASTM C618). Substitute 5% to 15% of the total cementitious material by weight with Silica Fume conforming to ASTM C1240.
General Notes:
1) Refer to Specifications for complete concrete mix requirements.
B. Furnish and install the following as shown on the drawings and as specified herein:
1. Cast-in-place concrete including walls, slabs, equipment bases, and other
concrete work shown on the drawings.
2. SF concrete (concrete containing silica fume and fly ash) where indicated
3. Lean concrete fill where indicated
4. Formwork for cast-in-place concrete.
5. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete.
6. Non-shrink and fast setting grout.
7. Do all cutting, patching, finishing of rough cut edges and repairing of
concrete which may be required for proper completion of the work.
8. Install the following items furnished under the designated section:
a. Sleeves, inserts, and other items required to be built into the
concrete by trade sections requiring same.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03-30-00 2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
b. Anchor bolts by trade sections requiring same.
1.2 Related Work
A. Section 31 41 00 - Excavation Protection
B. Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork
C. Section 31 05 00 - Soils and Aggregates
D. Section 33 00 00 - Drainage
E. Section 33 10 00 - Water Utilities
F. Section 07 10 00 - Dampproofing and Waterproofing
G. Section 23 22 13 - Steam and Condensate Piping
1.3 Reference Specifications
A. ASTM C31 - Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
B. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates
C. ASTM C39 - Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
D. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete
E. ASTM C143 - Slump of Cement Concrete
F. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement
G. ASTM C171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
H. ASTM C172 - Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
I. ASTM C231 - Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure
Method
J. ASTM C260 - Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
K. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
L. ASTM C457 - Microscopical Determination of Parameters of the Air-Void
System in Hardened Concrete.
M. ASTM C618 - Fly Ash and Raw or Calcified Natural Pozzolan for Use as
Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete
N. ASTM C1202 - Electrical Indication of Concrete Ability to Resist Chloride
Ion Penetration
O. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in
Cementitious Mixtures
P. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete.
Q. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings
R. ACI 302 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab
Construction
S. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting
T. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting
U. ACI 309R - Guide for Consolidation of Concrete
V. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and
Commentary
1.4 Submittals
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03-30-00 3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
A. Submit concrete mixes and test data to substantiate compliance.
B. Submit data sheets for admixtures selected for use.
C. Submit certified aggregate test results indicating conformance with ASTM C33
Class 4S. Aggregate reactivity test results will not be required if low-alkali
cement is used in the concrete mix.
D. Submit cement manufacturer’s certified mill test reports demonstrating that
material supplied meets the requirements specified herein.
E. Submit data sheets for fly ash selected for use.
F. Submit data sheets for Silica fume selected for use.
G. Submit reinforcing bar lists and placing drawings.
H. Submit data sheets for products selected for use.
I. Submit methods and product data to be used for curing.
J. Submit specified methods and materials to be used for hot weather and cold
weather concreting, if concrete is to be placed under these conditions.
1.5 Testing and Control for Concrete
A. The Contractor shall furnish copies of test results from the concrete supplier as
listed below. Tests shall be at the expense of the concrete supplier by an
independent testing laboratory and shall have been made within the past six
months.
1. Aggregate standard gradation and physical properties meeting these
specifications.
2. Aggregate potential alkali reactivity data as specified in ASTM C33.
3. Historical compressive strength data of the concrete proposed to satisfy
the performance requirements specified herein.
B. Tests occasioned by changes of materials or mix proportions shall be at the
expense of the Contractor.
C. Tests for slump will be made at place of deposit and in accordance with ASTM
C143 by the Owner. Tests shall be made for each concrete load at point of
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03-30-00 4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
discharge as approved by and in the presence of the Engineer or his
representative.
D. The Owner will make, in accordance with ASTM C31, four test cylinders for each
50 cu. yds. or one day's pour, whichever is less. Tests shall be made in accordance
with method of "Test for Compressive Strength of Molded Concrete Cylinders,
ASTM C39". One cylinder shall be tested at 7 days, two cylinders tested at 28
days. The fourth cylinder shall be used for additional tests as necessary, being
retained at the laboratory for necessary period as approved by the Engineer.
E. Tests for air content shall be made in accordance with ASTM, C94, using ASTM
C231 method of test. Intermediate Chase Meter tests shall be made on each load
of concrete or as considered necessary by the Engineer's office. Results shall be
sent to the Engineer's office within three days after the tests are made, except
notifications at once when tests show low test results. Submit test results to
Owner within 24 hours of test. The Owner reserves the right to verify water to
cement ratio compliance with the microwave test method.
F. Additional Tests necessary to resolve disputes will be made by an independent
testing laboratory designated by the Engineer. If work is found to be deficient,
testing cost shall be paid by the Contractor. If work is satisfactory, testing cost
for additional tests will be paid by the Owner.
G. Provide certification that plant, equipment and materials to be used in concrete
comply with the requirements of this specification.
H. Provide certification (i.e., signed letter) that mix proportions selected will produce
concrete of specified quality, yield and strength, and that mix design is adjusted to
pavement alkali aggregate reactivity problems.
1.6 Notification of Related Trades
A. Notify all other trades responsible for installing chases, inserts, sleeves, anchors,
louvers, etc., when ready for such installation, and for final checking immediately
before concrete is placed. Cooperate with such trades to obtain proper
installation.
B. Leave openings in walls for pipes, ducts, etc., for mechanical and electrical work,
as shown on drawings, or required by layout of mechanical and electrical systems.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials for Concrete
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03-30-00 5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
2.1.1 Cement
A. Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type I, with maximum alkali content of 1.0%.
2.1.2 Aggregates
A. Coarse aggregate shall be hard, durable, uncoated crushed stone or gravel
conforming to ASTM, C33 (Class 4S). Coarse aggregate shall be 3/4-inch
maximum size.
B. Fine aggregate shall be sand; clean, hard, durable, uncoated grains, free from silt,
loam, and clay, to meet ASTM C33.
2.1.3 Water
A. Water shall be potable from the local municipal supply.
2.1.4 Admixtures
A. Water reducing agent, "WRDA" by W.R. Grace and Company, " MasterSet R
100" by Master Builders Company, or equal approved by the Engineer and
conforming with ASTM 494, Type A. Water reducing agent must be by the same
manufacturer as air entraining agent.
B. High Range Water-Reducing Non-Chloride Admixture, “MasterPolyheed 997” or
“MasterRheobuild 1000” by Master Builders Technologies or equal, approved by
the Engineer and conforming with ASTM C494, Type F.
C. Air entraining agent, " MasterAir VR 10 " by Master Builders Company, or equal
approved by the Engineer conforming to ASTM C-260. To be used to obtain
percent air entrainment specified unless obtained by cement used.
D. Acrylic latex bonding agent shall be EVERBOND by L & M Construction
Chemicals Inc. or approved equal.
E. Epoxy Bonding Compound shall be:
1. "Epoxy No. 452" by Euclid Chemical Co.
2. "Epobond" by L & M Construction Chemicals Inc.
3. "Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod" by Sika Chemical Co.
F. No other admixture may be used without the Engineer's approval. Calcium
chloride will not be permitted.
2.1.5 Fly Ash
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03-30-00 6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
A. Fly ash in concrete shall be between 15 and 20 percent of the total cementitious
material by weight conforming with ASTM C618, Type F.
B. Do not use re-injected fly ash.
2.1.6 Silica Fume
A. Silica fume in concrete mix shall be between 5 and 15 percent of the total
cementitious material by weight conforming to ASTM C1240.
2.1.7 Concrete Reinforcement
A. All black bar reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615
Grade 60.
B. Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A-185.
C. Bar supports, spacers and other devices necessary for proper assembly of concrete
reinforcing shall be made of plastic. Wire for tying black bar shall be 18-gauge
black annealed wire conforming to ASTM A-82. Wire for tying stainless steel bar
shall be 18-gauge stainless steel wire. Supports on grade shall be concrete
block.
2.1.8 Formwork
A. Forms: Concrete surfaces without special finish shall be "plyform"
Class 1, B-3. EXT-DFPA or as approved by the Engineer.
B. Form Oil: Oil shall be of a nonstaining type, specifically manufactured for
concrete forms.
C. Form Ties: Factory fabricated, removable or snap back of approved design.
Wire shall be at least back 1-1/2" from the surface and leave a hole less than 1" in
diameter after snapped.
2.1.9 Joint Filler
A. Refer to Section 07 10 00.
2.1.10 Grout
A. Non-Shrink Grout
Premixed, non-shrink grout, consisting of aggregate base, Portland cement and
sand, and with all necessary plasticizers, densifiers and other control ingredients:
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03-30-00 7
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1. Nonmetallic:
a. Euclid Chemical Co. "Euco N-S Grout"
b. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. "Crystex"
c. Sauereisen Cements "F-100"
d. Master Builders Inc. "928"
e. W. R. Meadows, Inc. "588 Grout"
B. Fast Setting Grout
1. "SET 45 Chemical Action Concrete" by Master Builders.
2.1.11 Moisture Barrier
A. 10 mil polyethylene plastic sheeting.
2.1.12 Waterstops
A. Field Molded (FM) Waterstop:
1. Field molded waterstop shall be bentonite/butyl rubber composition
supplied in coil form or approved equal, unless otherwise indicated.
a) Acceptable Products:
(i) Waterstop-RX101, as manufactured by Colloid
Environmental Technologies Company (CETCO).
(ii) Other products with comparable properties and
performance.
2.2 Storage Materials
A. All materials shall be stored to prevent damage from the elements and other
causes.
B. Cement and aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent
deterioration or intrusion of foreign matter. Any materials which have
deteriorated, or which have been damaged, shall not be used for concrete.
C. Store reinforcement steel on wood skids to protect it from weather, oil, earth and
damage from trucking or other construction operations. Reinforcement shall be
free from loose mill scale, rust, form oil, concrete spatter, and other extraneous
coatings at the time it is embedded in the concrete.
D. All forms shall be stored in a neat manner and orderly fashion, protected from the
weather and abuse.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03-30-00 8
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
E. Materials which are judged not acceptable for this project shall not be stored on
the site, but shall be immediately removed from the site.
2.3 Concrete Mixtures
A. Strength, cement and water requirements:
1. Concrete (Exterior Exposure)
a. Minimum strength at 28 days per Section 1.1
b. Maximum size of coarse aggregates 3/4"
c. % Air ( 1) 2
d. Slump 1″ - 3″
e. Maximum W/C .45
f. The slump of the concrete shall not exceed 3 inches before the
addition of the superplasticiser.
2. Lean Concrete Fill
a. Minimum compressive strength 400 psi
B. For concrete containing silica fume, the average coulomb rating for 28 or 56 day
concrete shall not exceed 1500 based on a test of 3 specimens tested in
accordance with ASTM C1202.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Forming
A. Formwork shall conform to ACI 347 R-88.
B. Forms shall be constructed to conform to shapes, lines, and dimension shown,
plumb and straight, and shall be maintained sufficiently rigid to prevent
deformation under load. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent the leakage
of grout. Securely brace and shore forms to prevent displacement and to safely
support the construction loads.
C. Treat forms and form linings with a form release agent applied according to the
manufacturer's instructions, by roller, brush, or spray to produce a uniform thin
film without bubbles or streaks. Apply the release agent in two coats for the first
use of the form and in one coat for each additional use.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03-30-00 9
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
D. Removal of formwork for columns, walls, sides of beams, and other parts not
supporting the weight of the concrete may be removed as soon as concrete has
hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations, but must remain
a minimum of 3 days after the placement of the concrete.
E. Removal strength: Formwork for slabs shall not be removed until the concrete
has reached 75% of its specified 28-day strength. When formwork removal is
based on the concrete reaching its specified 28-day strength (or a specified
percentage thereof), the concrete shall be presumed to have reached this strength
when any of the following conditions have been met:
1. When tests cylinders, field cured under the most unfavorable conditions
prevailing for any portion of the concrete presented, have reached the
required strength. Except for the field curing and age at test, the cylinders
shall be molded and tested as specified in the Concrete Testing Section of
this division.
2. When the concrete has been cured as specified for the same length of time
as the age at test of laboratory cured cylinders, which reached the required
strength. The length of time the concrete has been cured in the field shall
be determined by the cumulative number of days or fractions thereof, not
necessarily consecutive, during which the temperature of the air in contact
with the concrete is above 50F and the concrete has been damp or
thoroughly sealed from evaporation and loss of moisture.
3. When the concrete has reached a specified strength as determined by
nondestructive tests approved by the Engineer.
F. Form continuous drip edge on the underside of the top slab around all openings.
Refer to structural drawings for detail.
3.2 Mixing Process
A. Use ready mix process, ACI 301-89.
3.3 Fabrication and Placing Reinforcing
A. Fabricate rebars to the following requirements:
1. stirrups and ties 1/2"
2. all other bends 1"
B. Place bars to the following tolerances:
1. concrete cover to formed surfaces 1/4"
2. minimum spacing between bars 1/4"
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03-30-00 10
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3. top bars in slabs and beams:
a. members 8" deep or less 1/4"
b. crosswise of members - spaced evenly within 2" overall
c. lengthwise of members 2"
C. If number of bars is shown on drawings the number given shall govern over the
spacing.
D. Bars may be moved up to one bar diameter for conduits, pipes, or embedded
items. If moved more, the arrangement must be approved by the Engineer.
E. Splicing of bars and details not covered herein shall be in accordance with the
recommendations of "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced
Concrete Structures" ACI 315-80.
F. Lap WWF mats not less than one full cross wire spacing. Use same type supports
as for rebars.
G. Obtain Engineer's approval of all splices not shown on the project drawings.
H. Maintain specified cover to reinforcing by plastic chairs and internal metal ties to
rigidly hold reinforcing in position within a tolerance of 1/4-inch. Concrete
brick chairs may be used under concrete placed on the ground. Supports shall in
no case be spaced more than 4 feet on centers.
3.4 Embedded Items
A. Comply with ACI 318, Chapter 6, Pipes Embedded in Concrete.
B. Coordinate the installation of all inserts required by other trades. Such inserts
normally are to be in place prior to the placing of reinforcing steel.
C. Place all anchor bolts, etc., furnished under other sections.
3.5 Joints
A. Construction Joints: Cast structures as monoliths between designed expansion
joints. When additional construction joints are required, submit location of joints
for approval of Owner.
B. Construction joints shall be formed with bulkheads. Reinforcement shall continue
through the joint, and additional reinforcement shall be placed if indicated on the
drawings. Clean and roughen existing concrete surface before casting new
concrete against existing and bond with epoxy bonding compound.
3.6 Waterstops
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03-30-00 11
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
A. Carefully position waterstop prior to concrete placement to form a continuous
watertight diaphragm across each joint.
B. Support and protect the waterstops to the satisfaction of the Engineer during the
progress of the work.
C. Replace damaged waterstop prior to concrete embedment.
D. The concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated in the vicinity of the waterstop.
E. Suitable guards shall be provided to protect exposed projecting edges and ends of
partially embedded waterstops from damage.
F. Locate waterstops within the thickness of the walls as indicated on the drawings.
G. Adhere field molded waterstop to substrate using manufacturer’s recommended
adhesive and in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations.
H. Maintain at least the minimum required concrete cover (edge distance) at all
locations of field molded waterstop.
I. Splice field molded waterstop as recommended by manufacturer.
3.7 Placing
A. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours prior to each placement.
B. Do not place concrete until soil bottoms, reinforcing steel, inserts, sleeves, and
other work to be built into the concrete have been inspected and approved by the
Engineer and by all trades concerned.
C. Conveying: Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit
as rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent separation or loss of
ingredients and in the manner which will assure that the required quality of the
concrete is retained.
D. Depositing: Delivery and placement of concrete shall be programmed so that the
time lapse between batching and placement shall not exceed 1-1/2 hours.
Concrete shall not be allowed a free fall of over 4 feet. Concrete shall be
deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to
rehandling or flowing.
E. Concrete shall be deposited continuously, in horizontal layers of such thickness
(not deeper than 18 inches) that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which
has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03-30-00 12
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
within the section. Placing shall be carried out at such a rate that the concrete
which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic. Concrete which has
partially hardened or has been contaminated with foreign materials shall not be
deposited.
F. Concrete shall be compacted thoroughly by vibrating to produce a dense,
homogeneous mass without voids or pockets. Vibrators should be placed in
concrete rapidly so as to penetrate approximately 3 inches to 4 inches into the
preceding lift so as to blend the two layers. Vibrating techniques must assure that
when the course aggregate reaches the form, it stops and the matrix fills the voids.
G. SF concrete should be placed at the highest practical slump (7 to 9 in) and
compacted by vibrating.
3.8 Finishes
3.8.1 Floor and Other Flatwork Finishes
A. Tunnel base slabs shall have a non-slip broom finish per ACI 301.
B. Interior slabs shall have a trowelled finish per ACI 301.
C. The floor shall be sloped to drains where provided to ensure that the floor
can be hosed and dried with no puddles.
3.8.2 Formed Surface Finish
A. Provide standard rough form finish, in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter
10, to all concrete formed surfaces that are to be concealed in the finished
work, unless shown or specified.
B. Provide standard smooth form finish, in accordance with ACI 301,
Chapter 10, to all concrete formed surfaces that are to be exposed to view,
or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the
concrete or a covering material bonded to the concrete such as
waterproofing, dampproofing, painting, or other similar system.
C. Irrespective of finish, all tie holes shall be filled with cement mortar.
3.9 Curing and Protection
Structural Concrete:
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03-30-00 13
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
A. Protect newly placed concrete against low and high temperature effects and
against rapid loss of moisture. Moist cure all concrete for at least seven days at a
temperature of at least 50 degrees F by curing methods approved by the Engineer.
B. For vertical or near vertical surfaces, moist cure by keeping the form in contact
with the concrete, or by other effective means approved by the Engineer.
Intermittent wetting and drying does not provide acceptable curing.
C. Cure floor slabs if exposed to sun and warm weather by covering with sisal or
other waterproof curing paper conforming to ASTM Specification C171, lapped 4
inches at edges and sealed with tape at least 3 inches wide.
D. In hot weather, be adequately prepared to protect the concrete from the adverse
influence of heat before the placement of any concrete. Take special precautions
to avoid cracking of the concrete from rapid drying during placement of concrete
when the air temperature exceeds 70 degrees F, particularly when the work is
exposed to direct sunlight. Follow "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather
Concreting" (ACI 305 R-89).
1. Cool forms by fog spraying with water or by protecting them from the direct
rays of the sun.
2. If requested by the Contractor, deemed advisable by the Testing Engineer, and
approved by the Engineer, a retardant may be used to delay the initial set of
the concrete.
E. In cold weather, be adequately prepared to protect the concrete from the adverse
influence of cold before placement of any concrete, and follow the
"Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting" (ACI-306, latest edition).
After placement, maintain all concrete at a temperature of at least 50F for seven
days.
SF Concrete:
Additional requirements for curing of the SF concrete are:
A. Cover slabs with wet burlap and plastic sheeting. If wet curing is used, the
concrete must be protected against plastic shrinkage since there is usually a time
delay associated with placing burlap that could allow cracking.
B. To protect SF concrete against plastic shrinkage, use a fog misting or an
evaporation retarder until the concrete has enough strength to support the
placement of the wet burlap and plastic. Leave the burlap and plastic in place and
keep the concrete wet for at least three days and preferably for five to seven days.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03-30-00 14
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
C. Cover concrete surfaces with 8 mil polyethylene curing concrete, placed in widest
practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3″ and sealed by waterproof
tape or adhesive. Concrete shall remain covered for a minimum of seven (7)
days.
D. Alternatively, a chlorinated-rubber based curing compound meeting the
requirements of ASTM C309 may be used in place of wet curing. Apply curing
compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete
(within 1 hour). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or
roller in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. Re-coat areas subjected to
heavy rainfall within three (3) hours after initial application. Maintain continuity
of coating and repair damage curing period.
3.10 Moisture Barrier
A. Apply 10 mil polyethylene moisture barrier under all interior or exterior (if
indicated) slabs-on-grade after ensuring that crushed stone base is level and well
compacted.
B. Apply moisture barrier parallel with the direction of the concrete pour. Lap and
seal all joints to a minimum width of 6 inches with adhesive provided by the
moisture barrier manufacturer. Insure that the moisture barrier lies flat against
sides and bottom of wall footing trenches. Trim moisture barrier to fit neatly
around column bases; seal to concrete footings for a minimum of 6 inches around
base.
C. Do not damage the moisture barrier at any time; repair any accidental punctures
with a patch of the same material extending a minimum of 6 inches in all
directions, and sealed as specified.
3.11 Surface Repairs
A. Any repair work shall not proceed without the written authorization of the Owner.
B. Remove all honeycombed and other defective concrete down to sound concrete.
Dampen area to be patched and area around it to prevent absorption of water from
patching mortar. Areas concealed in the finished work may be filled with trowel.
C. Make patching mixture of same sand and cement used in concrete. Mix not more
than 1/2 to 1. Use white cement as necessary to match color of existing concrete
as determined by trial patches in exposed areas.
D. Limit amount of mixing water to that necessary for handling and placing. Mix
mortar in advance, allow to stand with frequent manipulation with a trowel,
without addition of water, until it has reached the stiffest consistency that will
permit placing.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03-30-00 15
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
E. After surface water has evaporated from the area to be patched, brush area with
neat cement grout, let set until grout loses its sheen and apply the patching mortar.
Pack mortar thoroughly into place, strike off to leave the patch slightly higher
than surrounding surfaces to permit initial shrinkage. Leave undisturbed for at
least one hour before finally finished. Keep patched area damp for 7 days. Finish
exposed surfaces of patch to match adjacent surfaces.
F. After cleaning and thoroughly dampening, fill all tie holes with patch mortar.
Finish off as above specified for all exposed areas.
G. Review repair procedure with Engineer. Use epoxy or latex bonding agent for
large thick patches, use latex modified cement mortar for small thin patches.
3.12 Cutting of Holes
A. Cut holes required by other trades in any cast-in-place concrete which did not
receive sleeves. Use a core drilling process or sawing process which produces
clean sharp edges and the minimum hole size which accommodates the piping,
conduit, or equipment requiring the opening. For rectangular openings, pre-drill
at corners for a rounded edge. Do not overcut at corners.
B. Obtain approval of the Engineer before cutting any holes for any trades.
3.13 Grout
A. Grout solid all bearing plates with non-shrink grout in accordance with
Manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Fast Setting SET 45 Chemical Action Concrete can be used for the anchor to
minimize the length of shutdown with the Engineer’s approval. As this sets up
very fast, the Contractor shall do a trial batch to gain experience and work out
procedures to Owner's satisfaction before proceeding with the actual pour.
3.14 Evaluation
3.14.1 Strength
A. Strength of concrete shall be considered satisfactory if the average of any
five consecutive strength tests of the laboratory cured specimens
representing each strength of concrete is equal to or greater than the
specified strength and if no strength tests have values less than 85% of
the specified strength.
3.14.2 Additional Tests
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03-30-00 16
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
A. If concrete shown by laboratory strength tests is defective, the Contractor
may, at his own expense, conduct such testing as he may deem necessary.
Test results so obtained, unless properly calibrated and correlated with
other test data, shall not be used as a basis for acceptance or rejection.
B. If cores are taken for such determination they shall be in accordance with
ASTM C42. Testing shall be by an independent laboratory approved by
the Engineer.
C. At least three cores shall be taken from each potentially deficient area.
Locations will be determined by the Engineer. Damaged cores may be
replaced.
D. Strength of cores from each member or area shall be considered
satisfactory if their average is equal to or greater than 90% of the specified
strength.
E. Core holes shall be plugged solid with grout specified in this specification.
3.15 Acceptance
A. Work which meets all applicable requirements of 3.15 following will be accepted
without qualification.
B. Work which fails to meet one or more requirements of 3.15 following but which
has been repaired to bring it into compliance will be accepted without
qualification.
C. Work which fails to meet one or more requirements and which cannot be brought
into compliance may be accepted or rejected as determined by the Engineer.
D. Concrete failing to meet the strength requirements of this section may be required
to undergo additional curing as specified by the Engineer. Modifications may be
required to the concrete mix design for the remaining concrete work, at the
expense of the Contractor.
E. Formed surfaces that are not within the tolerances specified may be rejected. If
permission is granted to correct the error, such correction shall be directed and in
such a manner as to maintain the strength, function, and appearance of the
structure.
F. Concrete members cast in the wrong location may be rejected if the strength,
appearance, or function of the structure is adversely affected. Inaccurately formed
surfaces exposed to view may be rejected and shall be repaired or removed and
replaced if required by the Engineer.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03-30-00 17
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
G. Finished flatwork exceeding specified tolerances may be repaired by grinding
high spots or by patching low spots with an approved epoxy grout.
H. Concrete exposed to view with defects which adversely affect the appearance of
the structure may be repaired if possible. If, in the opinion of the Engineer the
defects cannot be repaired, the concrete may be accepted or rejected in
accordance with the decision of the Engineer.
3.16 Strength of Structure
A. The strength of the structure in place will be considered potentially deficient if it
fails to comply with any requirements which control the strength of the structure,
as outlined below:
1. Low concrete strength as evaluated by the requirements of this section.
2. Reinforcing steel size, quantity, strength, position, or arrangement at variance
with the project drawings.
3. Concrete which differed from the required dimensions or locations in such a
manner as to reduce the strength.
B. The work will be accepted or rejected as the work is produced by the Engineer or
his authorized representative.
** END OF SECTION **
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 03-40-00
PRECAST CONCRETE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 03 40 00-1
1.1 Summary .................................................................................................. 03 40 00-1
1.2 Quality Assurance .................................................................................... 03 40 00-1
1.3 Submittals ................................................................................................ 03 40 00-2
1.4 Owner Furnished Materials ...................................................................... 03 40 00-3
1.5 Coordination ............................................................................................ 03 40 00-4
1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling ............................................................... 03 40 00-4
2.0 PRODUCTS........................................................................................................ 03 40 00-3
2.1 Materials .................................................................................................. 03 40 00-3
2.2 Connection and Support Materials ........................................................... 03 40 00-4
2.3 Mortar Materials ...................................................................................... 03 40 00-5
2.4 Mixes........................................................................................................ 03 40 00-5
2.5 Fabrication ............................................................................................... 03 40 00-6
3.0 EXECUTION ..................................................................................................... 03 40 00-7
3.1 Erection .................................................................................................... 03 40 00-7
3.2 Source Quality Control ............................................................................ 03 40 00-8
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PRECAST CONCRETE 03-40-00 1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 03-40-00
Ithaca, New York PRECAST CONCRETE
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Summary
1.1.1 Scope
A. Provide reinforced structural precast concrete units for steam tunnels as
shown on the drawings or as specified. Included are:
1. Tunnel Sections: Tunnel sections shall be reinforced precast concrete
trenching units placed upside down. Each section shall form the roof
and walls of the tunnel, and be placed on a cast-in-place concrete
tunnel floor slab. Joints shall be spigoted, male-male, female-female,
to allow removal of individual sections for access. The end that butts
up to the structure shall be plain while the other end shall be male or
female (Contractor to determine for each section.
2. Tunnel Roof Sections: Provide reinforced precast concrete tunnel
roof slab sections at changes of direction in tunnel. Each slab section
shall form the roof of the tunnel, and be placed on cast-in-place or
concrete masonry block walls at changes in directions of tunnels.
3. Accessories: Provide all accessories such as lift rings, and sealant
and gaskets for tunnel joints, as required to install precast tunnel
sections and make joints watertight.
1.1.2 Related Work Specified Under Other Sections
A. Cast-in-place tunnel floor slabs - Section 03 30 00.
B. Dampproofing and Waterproofing– Section 07 10 00.
1.2 Quality Assurance
1.2.1 Applicable Reference Standards
A. Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete
B. Pre-stressed Concrete Institute "Manual of Quality Control", MNL 116.85.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PRECAST CONCRETE 03-40-00 2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
C. Structural Welding Code of the AWS. D1.1.
D. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
E. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
1.2.2 Fabricator Qualifications
A. Firms must have minimum 2 years’ successful experience in fabrication of
precast concrete units similar to units required for this project and approved
by Owner to be acceptable. Fabricator must have sufficient production
capacity to produce required units without causing delay in work.
B. Produce precast concrete units at fabricating plant engaged primarily in
manufacturing of similar units.
1.2.3 Design Criteria
A. Design all precast concrete units for an H-20 load bearing capacity, without
internal support. The Drawings indicate the minimum reinforcing required;
Contractor shall provide and design such additional reinforcing required to
meet the H-20 load bearing capacity and for all stresses and loadings
anticipated from handling and erecting. Assume all responsibility for the
adequacy of the design.
B. All cuts and penetrations shall be cleanly made, with no exposed reinforcing
steel and no spurious cracks. If field cuts are required, they shall be
sawcut.
C. The design of the precast units shall be altered if required to maintain the H-
20 rating with the required penetrations.
D. All precast sections shall contain at least three steel lifting points of sufficient
size to allow safe lifting, after repeated bending operations. The lifting
connection shall be “Swift Lift P-52 SL” (by Dayton Superior) and shall be
located in a recess in the concrete surface. They shall be filled with stone and
covered with mortar before applying the waterproofing.
1.2.4 Allowable Tolerances
A. Fabricate precast units to comply with allowable tolerances of PCI MNL 116.
1.3 Submittals
A. Shop Drawings: Submit a detailed set, sealed/signed by an engineer, registered in
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PRECAST CONCRETE 03-40-00 3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
New York.
Show:
1. Member dimensions and cross-section.
2. Location, size and type of reinforcement, including reinforcement and lifting
devices necessary for handling and erection.
3. Layout and identification of each precast unit corresponding to sequence and
procedure of installation.
4. Openings.
5. Inserts.
6. Joints, and sealing of joints per Section 07 10 00, and including at changes in
direction and at manhole intersections.
7. Erection procedure and sequences.
8. Recommended detail for field coring holes.
B. Product Data: Submit for manufactured materials and products.
C. Mix Design: Submit written reports of proposed concrete mix design.
1.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Deliver precast concrete units to project site in such quantities and at such times to
assure continuity of installation. Store units at project site to prevent cracking,
distortion, staining, or other physical damage, and so that markings are visible. Lift
and support units at designated lift points.
B. Deliver anchorage items which are to be embedded, in other construction before start
of such work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions and directions as
required for installation.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
A. Concrete Materials: Refer to Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PRECAST CONCRETE 03-40-00 4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. Reinforcing Materials: Refer to Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
C. Air-Entraining Admixture: Refer to Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
Adjust air entrainment to be suitable for freeze-thaw conditions if precast section is
exposed. Buried sections shall have no air entrainment.
D. Joint Sealing Materials: Refer to Section 07 10 00, Dampproofing and
Waterproofing.
2.2 Connection and Support Materials
A. Steel Plates and Shapes: Per ASTM A 36.
B. Protective Finish: Apply to all ferrous materials as follows:
1. Hot-dip galvanize shapes and plates after fabrication to provide not less than
2.0 ounces of zinc coating per square foot per ASTM A 123. Hot-dip
galvanize bolts per ASTM A 153, Table 1.
2. Touch-Up Paint on Galvanized Steel
a. Sherwin-Williams "Galvanized Metal Primer".
2.3 Mortar Materials
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or III.
B. Sand: Clean, washed, uniformly graded, natural sand per ASTM C 440.
C. Water: Potable
2.4 Mixes
2.4.1 Mix Design
A. Concrete Strength: Standard weight concrete having minimum 6,000 psi 28-
day compressive strength.
B. Prepare design mixes for each type of concrete required. Design mixes may
be prepared by an independent testing facility or by qualified precast
manufacturing plant personnel, at precast manufacturer's option.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PRECAST CONCRETE 03-40-00 5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
C. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods,
using materials to be employed on the project for each type of concrete
required, complying with ACI 318.
D. Submit written reports to Owner's Representative of proposed mix for each
type of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of precast unit production. Do
not begin concrete production until mixes and evaluations have been
reviewed by Owner's Representative.
E. Adjustments to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested
when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or
other circumstances warrant. Laboratory test data for revised mix designs
and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Owner's
Representative before using in the work.
2.4.2 Admixtures
A. Use air-entraining admixture in exposed concrete only. Buried vaults and
tunnel sections shall not have air-entraining admixture.
B. Use water-reducing admixtures in strict compliance with manufacturer's
directions. Admixtures to increase cement dispersion, or provide increased
workability for low-slump concrete, may be used subject to Engineer's
acceptance.
C. Use amounts as recommended by admixture manufacturer for climatic
conditions prevailing at time of placing. Adjust quantities of admixtures as
required to maintain quality control.
2.5 Fabrication
2.5.1 General
A. Fabricate precast concrete units complying with manufacturing and testing
procedures, quality control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances of
PCI MNL-116, and as specified for types of units required.
B. Comply with requirements of Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete and
with PCI MNL 116.
C. Adequately reinforce precast units to resist all transporting and handling
stresses. Include cast-in weld plates where required.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PRECAST CONCRETE 03-40-00 6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
D. Cast-in holes for openings larger than 12 inches diameter or 12 inches square
in accordance with final shop drawings. Other smaller holes will be field cut
by trades requiring them, as acceptable to Owner's Representative.
E. Coat surfaces of forms with bond-breaking compound before reinforcement
is placed. Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that
will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not
impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces requiring bond or
adhesion. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth and other materials,
which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
G. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement and inserts against
displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations.
Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and
hangers as required.
H. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverage for concrete
protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold
reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties
so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
I. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent formation of seams or
planes of weakness in precast units, complying with requirements of
ACI 304. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external
vibration without dislocation or damage to reinforcement and built-in items.
J. Identification: Provide permanent markings to identify pick-up points and
orientation in structure, complying with markings indicated on final shop
drawings.
K. Curing by low-pressure steam, by steam vapor, by radiant heat and moisture,
or other similar process may be employed to accelerate concrete hardening
and to reduce curing time.
2.5.2 Finish
A. Finish concrete surfaces in plant as provided in PCI MNL 116 and per
requirements specified herein.
B. Finish formed surfaces as follows:
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PRECAST CONCRETE 03-40-00 7
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1. Standard Finish: Normal plant run finish produced in forms that
impart a smooth finish to the concrete. Small surface holes caused by
air bubbles, normal form joint marks and minor chips and spalls will
be tolerated. No major or unsightly imperfections, honeycomb or
structural defects will be permitted.
C. Finish unformed surfaces as follows:
1. Smooth Finish: Consolidate concrete, bring to proper level with a
straightedge, float and trowel to a smooth, uniform finish.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Erection
3.1.1 Supporting Structure
A. Do not install precast units until supporting structures are in place and
secured.
B. Shore and brace supporting structure before and during precast erection as
required to prevent damage due to eccentric, concentrated or other temporary
load condition.
3.1.2 Damaged Units
A. Examine precast units prior to setting for cracks, breaks, chips or other
damage. Permanently mark damaged units and remove from site at once.
Units with minor cosmetic damage may be used only with written permission
of Owner's Representative.
3.1.3 Setting
A. Handle, lift, place and secure precast units per manufacturer's printed
instructions, accepted shop drawings, and applicable codes and standards.
B. Set units tight together, perpendicular to bearing supports with full even
bearing.
C. Level units accurately or set to uniform slope as indicated. Accurately align
units with adjacent units.
D. Construct concrete mortar cants (after sealing bottom joint per Section
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PRECAST CONCRETE 03-40-00 8
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
07112) at exterior joint between precast tunnel and cast-in-place concrete
floor slab; bond cants to concrete base slab with "Thorobond" latex bonding
agent.
3.1.4 Levelling
A. Align and level by methods, procedures and equipment as recommended by
the precast manufacturer.
3.1.5 Cutting
A. Do not cut holes larger than size permitted by precast manufacturer after
fabrication.
B. Do not cut reinforcing without approval of manufacturer and Owner's
Representative.
C. Field cut holes for openings that do not disturb reinforcing, per precast
manufacturer's instructions.
D. Use only abrasive saws or rotary drills to perform field cutting. Do not
attempt field cutting by punching, chipping or breaking.
3.1.6 Finishing
A. Fill all tie holes with mortar.
B. Repair all damaged surfaces exposed to view as recommended by precast
manufacturer, so color and texture of patch matches adjacent surfaces.
3.2 Source Quality Control
A. The Owner may employ a separate testing laboratory to evaluate precast
manufacturer's quality control and testing methods.
1. The precast manufacturer shall allow Owner's testing facility access to
materials storage areas, concrete production equipment, and concrete
placement and curing facilities. Cooperate with Owner's testing laboratory
and provide samples of materials and concrete mixes as may be requested for
additional testing and evaluation.
B. Dimensional Tolerances: Units having dimensions smaller or greater than required
and outside specified tolerance limits will be subject to additional testing as herein
specified.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PRECAST CONCRETE 03-40-00 9
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1. Precast units having dimensions greater than required will be rejected if
appearances or function of the structure is adversely affected, or if larger
dimensions interface with other construction. Repair, or remove and replace
rejected units as required to meet construction conditions.
C. Strength of Units: The strength of precast concrete units will be considered
potentially deficient if the manufacturing processes fail to comply with any of the
requirements which may affect the strength of the precast units, including the
following conditions:
1. Failure to meet compressive strength tests requirements.
2. Reinforcement of concrete not conforming to specified fabrication
requirements.
3. Concrete curing and protection of precast units against extremes in
temperature, not as specified.
4. Precast units damaged during handling and erection.
D. Testing Precast Units: When there is evidence that strength of precast concrete units
does not meet specification requirements, the concrete testing service shall take cores
drilled from hardened concrete for compressive strength determination, complying
with ASTM C 42 and as follows:
1. Take at least 3 representative cores from precast units of suspect strength,
from locations directed by Owner's Representative.
a. Test cores in a saturated-surface-dry condition per ACI 318 if
concrete will be wet during use of completed structure.
b. Test cores in an air-dry condition per ACI 318 if concrete will be dry
during use of completed structure.
2. Strength of concrete for each series of cores will be considered satisfactory if
their average compressive strength is at least 90% of 28-day design
compressive strength.
3. Test results will be made in writing on same day that tests are made, with
copies to Owner's Representative, Contractor, and precast manufacturer.
Include in test reports the project identification name and number, date, name
of precast concrete manufacturer, name of concrete testing service,
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PRECAST CONCRETE 03-40-00 10
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
identification letter, number, and type of member or members represented by
core tests, design compressive strength, compression breaking strength and
type of break (corrected for length-diameter ratio), direction of applied load
to core with respect to horizontal plan of concrete as placed, and moisture
condition of core at time of bearing.
E. Patching: Where core test results are satisfactory and precast units are acceptable for
use in work, fill core holes solid with patching mortar, and finish to match adjacent
concrete surfaces.
F. Defective Work: Precast concrete units which do not conform to specified
requirements, including strength, tolerances, and finishes, shall be replaced with
precast concrete units that meet requirements of this section. Contractor shall also be
responsible for cost of corrections to other work affected by, or resulting from,
corrections to precast concrete work.
** END OF SECTION **
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 05-50-00
METAL FABRICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 05 50 50-1
1.1 Summary ...................................................................................... 05 50 50-1
2.0 PRODUCTS........................................................................................................ 05 50 50-1
2.1 Materials ...................................................................................... 05 50 50-1
2.2 Fabrication ................................................................................... 05 50 50-2
3.0 EXECUTION ..................................................................................................... 05 50 50-5
3.1 Installation.................................................................................... 05 50 50-5
3.2 Touch-Up ..................................................................................... 05 50 00-5
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall METAL FABRICATIONS 05-50-00 1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 05-50-00
Ithaca, New York METAL FABRICATIONS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Summary
1.1.1 Scope
A. Provide all metal fabrications shown or specified.
1.1.2 Products Furnished, But Not Installed Under This Section
A. Metal fabrications for embedment in concrete.
B. Anchor bolts for embedment in concrete.
1.2 Submittals
A. Submit detailed shop drawings when specified, to show compliance with the design
intent.
B. High Strength Anchor Bolts, nuts and washers
C. Drilled in Anchors
D. Qualified Welder Certificates: Submit for each welder, from accredited, independent
testing laboratory, per AWS D1.1.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
A. Rolled Plates Checker Plate Covers and Shapes: ASTM A242 or ASTM A588; all
others: ASTM A36. Checker plate pit covers, grates, and items embedded in
concrete to be galvanized after fabrication.
B. High-Strength Bolts and Anchor Bolts: Heavy hex structural per ASTM A325, of
lengths required for thickness of members joined and for the type of connection. For
non-standard sizes and lengths, bolts made from 1045 round stock or other material
equivalent to A325 may be used.
a. Type: galvanized
b. Manufacturers: Any manufacturer fabricating bolts and matching nuts per
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall METAL FABRICATIONS 05-50-00 2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
ASTM A325 and with proper identification on bolt.
c. Nuts for High-Strength Bolts: Heavy hex per ASTM A563, galvanized.
d. Washers for High-Strength Bolts: Hardened steel per ASTM F 436,
galvanized.
C. Mild Steel Anchor Bolts: ASTM A36 steel rod, threaded and of lengths noted, but to
project not less than 1 inch above nut unless otherwise noted and galvanized after
fabrication.
a. Nuts for mild steel anchor bolts per ASTM A563, Grade 0, A or B.
D. Drilled in Anchors: Drilled in anchor bolts shall be stainless steel “Ramset Chemical
Anchors” or approved equal equivalent in strength to an A307 bolt and anchored for
a safety factor of four against pullout.
E. Hollow Structural Tubing: Min. yield strength of 46,000 psi conforming to ASTM
A500 grade B or C.
F. Epoxy Prime Paint on Carbon Steel:
1. Tnemec Company, Inc. "Epoxoline Series 66-1211."
G. Touch-up Paint on Galvanized Steel:
3. Sherwin-Williams "Galvanized Metal Primer".
2.2 Fabrication
2.2.1 Connections and Workmanship
A. Fabricate and install the items per:
1. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of
Structural Steel for Buildings".
2. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges".
3. AISC "Specification for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel".
4. AISC "Manual of Steel Construction".
5. AWS "Structural Welding Code", ANSI/AWS D1.1.
B. Welding and welding procedure to be compatible to the materials being
welded.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall METAL FABRICATIONS 05-50-00 3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
C. Make detail pieces with all projecting corners clipped and filler pieces
welded flush.
D. Weld shop connections, bolt or weld field connections, unless otherwise
noted or specified. Provide clips, lugs, brackets, straps, plates, bolts, nuts,
washers, and similar items, as required for complete fabrication and erection.
Use connections of type and design required by forces to be resisted, and to
provide secure fastening.
E. Grind welds exposed in the finish work smooth, flush with adjacent surfaces,
filleted at angular connections, unless otherwise specified.
F. In bolting, draw up bolts or nuts tight, and deform threads where possible.
Use bolts of lengths required so that bolts do not project more than 1/4 inch
beyond face of nut. Do not use washers unless specified. Provide hexagonal
head bolts with hexagonal nuts.
G. Provide holes required for the connection of other adjacent or adjoining work
wherever holes are noted or can be determined prior to fabrication of the
steel. Locate holes for bolting equipment to supports to a tolerance of plus or
minus 1/16 inch of dimensions indicated.
H. Furnish members true to length so that assembling may be done without
fillers, except where same are required or detailed. Trim projecting edges or
corners flush where different members are assembled. Items shall be free
from twists, bends, and open joints.
I. Fabricate members to a tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 inch in length except
those members called for to be fitted in the field. Fabricate these members a
minimum of 2 inches longer than dimensioned so that they may be properly
fitted in the field.
J. Tag miscellaneous iron and steel, including anchor bolts, sleeves, and bases
or otherwise mark for ease of identification at the project site.
K. Fit work together in the fabrication shop and deliver complete, or in parts,
ready to be set in place.
2.2.2 Galvanizing
A. Apply galvanizing after built-up members are completely fabricated. Plug
relief vents airtight. After galvanizing, remove plugs, ream holes to proper
size and re-tap threads. Straighten shapes and assemblies true to line and
plane after galvanizing. Repair damage to galvanized surfaces with
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall METAL FABRICATIONS 05-50-00 4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
galvanized prime paint specified under Materials.
B. Galvanize: Members specifically noted on the Drawings as galvanized.
1. Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips:
ASTM A 123; average weight of zinc coating per square foot of
actual surface, for 3/16 inch and less thickness members 2.0 ounces,
for 1/4 inch and heavier members 2.3 ounces.
2. Iron and Steel Hardware: ASTM A 153; minimum weight of zinc
coating, in ounces per square foot of surface per Table 1 of ASTM A
153, for the various classes of materials used on the project.
3. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 525; weight of zinc coating, per square foot on
both sides of sheet, Coating Designation G90, minimized spangle and
chemically treated.
2.2.3 Shop Painting
A. Shop paint ferrous metal one coat of epoxy priming paint, minimum 4 to 6
mils dry film thickness, except that those surfaces in contact after
assembling, and members embedded in concrete, need have no paint. Do not
shop paint items specified or noted to be galvanized. Shop paint surfaces not
in contact, but inaccessible after assembly, a second coat of priming paint
before assembling. Clean all surfaces of material to be painted and remove
all rust, scale, grease, and similar matter. Allow surface to thoroughly dry
before paint is applied.
1. Ferrous metal shall be abrasive blasted to SSPC-SP10 (near white
blast cleaned) before shop painting; do not blast and do not shop paint
galvanized steel, stainless steel, or sliding surfaces. Also do not shop
paint baseplate bottoms.
2.2.4 Steel Ladders
A. Fixed-rail Type Stainless Steel Ladders: Fabricate with side rails of stainless
steel flat bars of 2 1/2 inch by 3/8 inch, spaced 18 inches apart, unless other
size and spacing is noted. Fit 3/4-inch diameter deformed bar rungs (Rung
Knurled or use rebar deformation) solid section stainless steel bar rungs into
punched holes in side rails, at 12 inches on center. Weld rungs in place and
grind welds smooth. Weld 2 ½ inch by 3/8 inch stainless steel brackets to
side rails, at not over 4 feet 9 inch centers, to secure ladders in place.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall METAL FABRICATIONS 05-50-00 5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation
A. Fabricate items that are to be built into masonry or concrete and deliver to site for
setting. Furnish parts complete with bolts, anchors, clips, etc., ready to set.
B. Where necessary to secure work to the structure by means of expansion bolts, cinch
anchors, and similar connections, do the work of laying out and installing such
connections, installing the work and bolting up, unless otherwise specified. Drill
holes in concrete and masonry work with rotary driven twist drills only. Concrete
must be cured to 75% of specified strength before installing drilled in anchors.
C. Furnish, completely install and connect all other items. Erect items to proper lines
and levels, plumb and true, and in correct relation to adjoining work. Parts shall be
secured in a rigid and substantial manner using concealed connections whenever
practicable.
D. Plumb and true the vertical members to a tolerance of plus or minus 1/8-inch in 10
feet. Level the horizontal members that support equipment, walkways, etc., to a
tolerance of plus or minus 1/2-inch in 10 feet. Install such work flush with existing
members where required.
E. Provide bolts, shims, blocks, nuts, washers, wedging pieces, etc., required for
complete installation, unless otherwise specified.
F. Drill field holes for bolts. Do not burn holes.
G. Furnish fitting-up bolts, drift pins, other tools and equipment and do necessary
reaming of unfair holes found in field connections. New holes or enlargement of
unfair holes by use of cutting torch is cause for rejection of the entire member.
Replacement shall be made at Contractor's expense.
H. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for the installation of miscellaneous
metals work. When required, fit work in place before fastening.
I. Field welds shall be approved by Owner's Representative before prime painting.
Slag shall be cleaned from welds prior to inspection by Owner's Representative.
3.2 Touch-Up
A. Clean painted and galvanized surfaces after installation. Paint surfaces damaged
during shipment and erection, and all field welds and bolts. On painted surfaces, use
same paint as used in the shop; on galvanized surfaces, use galvanize touch-up paint.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall METAL FABRICATIONS 05-50-00 6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
** END OF SECTION **
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 07-10-00
DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 07 10 00-1
1.1 Scope ........................................................................................................ 07 10 00-1
1.2 Related Sections ....................................................................................... 07 10 00-1
1.3 Description of System .............................................................................. 07 10 00-1
1.4 Submittals ................................................................................................ 07 10 00-2
2.0 PRODUCTS........................................................................................................ 07 10 00-2
2.1 Compatibility ........................................................................................... 07 10 00-2
2.2 Joint Fillers and Premolded Joint Fillers ................................................. 07 10 00-2
2.3 Butyl Tape Sealant ................................................................................... 07 10 00-2
2.4 Sealant ...................................................................................................... 07 10 00-2
2.5 Membrane Protective Coating ................................................................. 07 10 00-2
2.6 Primers ..................................................................................................... 07 10 00-3
2.7 Bond-Preventive Materials ...................................................................... 07 10 00-3
2.8 Back-Up Material..................................................................................... 07 10 00-3
3.0 EXECUTION ..................................................................................................... 07 10 00-3
3.1 Joint Filling and Sealing .......................................................................... 07 10 00-3
3.2 Membrane Protective Coating – Tunnels ................................................ 07 10 00-4
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 07-10-00 1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 07-10-00
Ithaca, New York DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
A. Furnish and install the following as shown on the drawings and specified herein:
1. Butyl tape sealant
2. Sealant and joint filler
3. Dampproofing membrane
4. Polyethylene plastic sheeting covers
1.2 Related Sections
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete (for below slab polyethylene moisture
barrier)
1.3 Description of System
1.3.1 Butyl Tape Sealant
A. Provide butyl tape sealant at all joints exposed to earth or weather between
precast concrete and other concrete or masonry attachments including the
following:
1. Precast tunnel section to tunnel section (precast or cast-in-place).
2. Precast tunnel section to masonry or block corners.
3. Precast tunnel sections to manholes and buildings.
4. All joints between manhole cover frames and concrete or precast riser
sections and concrete except fully mortared joints.
5. Precast or block tunnel walls to cast-in-place tunnel floor slab.
6. On lifting lug area after filling cavity on precast roofs of vaults only.
1.3.2 Sealant and Joint Filler
A. Provide sealant at all joints exposed to earth or weather including the
following:
1. Expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 07-10-00 2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.3.3 Membrane Protective Coating
A. Apply membrane on the manhole cover, risers and onto the vault roof down
the vault walls to the base slab.
B. Apply membrane on top and sides to the base slab of all tunnels.
C. Apply membrane on vault to tunnel joint on three sides with minimum 18 –
inch overlap.
1.4 Submittals
A. Submit data sheet for all materials selected for use.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Compatibility
A. Select all products to be compatible.
2.2 Joint Fillers and Premolded Joint Fillers
1. W. R. Meadows Inc. Sponge Rubber
2. Sonneborn "Sonofex F"
2.3 Butyl Tape Sealant
A. Provide a preformed compressible tape sealant of butyl polyisobutylene, with or
without internal spacer rod, packaged in rolls with a release paper on one side.
1. Pecora Corp. "Extru-Seal Tape".
2. Tremco "440 Tape".
2.4 Sealant
A. Two-Part Polysulfide Sealant: Non-sag type, per Fed. Spec. TT-S-00227E, Type II.
Furnish in standard colors as selected.
1. Pecora Corp. "Synthacaulk GC-2"
3. Sonneborn, Division of Contech, Inc. "Sonolastic Two Part Sealant"
B. Use equivalent quality sealant compatible with membrane under dampproofing
membrane.
2.5 Membrane Protective Coating
A. Membrane Primer - Bituthene P-3000 Primer
B. Waterproofing Membrane - Bituthene 3000 Membrane
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 07-10-00 3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
- Bituthene 4000 Membrane
- Royston 10A Easy Pave Membrane.
(To be used under asphalt overlay)
2.6 Primers
A. Types recommended by the compound manufacturers to provide adhesion of the
compounds to, and to prevent staining of, adjacent surfaces for all conditions
encountered on the Project.
2.7 Bond-Preventive Materials
A. Types recommended by the sealant compound manufacturer to prevent bonding of
compound to back surface of recess, for all conditions encountered on the Project.
2.8 Back-Up Material
A. Round, solid section, skinned surfaced, soft polyethylene foam gasket stock in
diameters 1/16" to 1/8" larger than width of joints in which it is installed. Back-up
material skin shall be of proper consistency so as not to bond to sealant or caulking
compound.
1. Dow Chemical Corp. "Ethafoam SB Brand Sealant Backer Rod"
2. Sonneborn, Division of Contech, Inc. "Sonofoam Backer Rod"
3. Williams Products "Expand-O-Foam Cord"
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Joint Filling and Sealing
A. Prepare all joints to receive compound and verify suitability and compatibility of
materials. Failure of compound in the future, due to claimed unsuitability of joint or
incompatibility of materials, will not be valid. Installation of compound is
considered as evidence that joint is suitable to receive compound.
B. Clean recesses which are to receive compound so as to be free of dirt, dust, loose
material, oil, grease, form release agents and other substances detrimental to the
compound's performance.
C. Depth of recess to receive compounds are not to exceed joint width up to a maximum
of 1/2 inch. Where depth of recess is in excess of specified depth, place back-up
material in recess, forced into place under compression, to provide the specified
recess depth. Where depth of recess is less than specified depth, cut the back surface
of recess to the specified recess depth.
D. Recesses are to be dry when compounds are installed. Prime all recesses, in
accordance with the compound manufacturer's recommendations, to develop proper
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 07-10-00 4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
mechanical adhesion of compound to recess surfaces.
1. Where depth of recess for sealants is at proper depth, apply bond-preventive
material to back surface of recess.
E. Install materials per manufacturer's directions. Use materials as received from the
manufacturers, without additives or adulterations. Use one manufacturer's product
for each kind of product specified.
1. Mix two-component compound per manufacturer's directions, until the
compound is thoroughly and uniformly blended and install compound prior
to start of hardening of curing cycle.
F. Install compound immediately after adjoining work is in condition to receive such
work. Fill all joints completely, regardless of variation of joint widths, and to full
depth as prepared, at no extra cost to the Owner. Install compounds under pressure,
without smearing adjacent surfaces. Sealant compounds must have full and uniform
contact with, and adhesion to, side surfaces of recess.
G. Finish face of sealant compound in recesses smooth and even. At recesses in angular
surfaces, finish the compound with a flat face, flush with face of material at each
side. At recesses in flush surfaces, finish the compound with a concave face, flush
with face of material at each side. Compound may be tooled, provided that such
tooling does not damage the seal nor tear the compound. Surface of compounds shall
be free from dirt, stain or other defacements and shall be uniform in color.
H. Install continuous butyl tape sealant in joints, centered in the joint, before adjoining
concrete units are set in place. Tape sealant shall be compressed when adjoining
units are installed.
3.2 Membrane Protective Coating – Tunnels
A. Surface Preparation. Surfaces should be clean, dry and free from dust, dirt, mud, oil,
grease, and other contaminants. Holes, voids and uneven surfaces, with over 1/8”
deflection, should be prepared with suitable material to obtain a level substrate to
receive the membrane.
B. Primer. All primers should be stirred prior to use and applied by brush, squeegee, or
roller as thin as possible. Avoid excess build-up of primer and allowed to dry
completely prior to the application of membrane. Dry times will vary depending on
air temperatures, air flow and humidity with the average time being 20 – 30 minutes.
C. Application of Membrane. Bituthene 3000, 4000 or Royston 10A Easy Pave is
applied to vertical surfaces by using precut sections of membrane and running the
membrane from top to bottom. The release film is removed as membrane is pressed
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING 07-10-00 5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
into place. Membrane should run from 1/2-inch to 1-1/3-inch below fill level to a
minimum of half-way across the footer. Subsequent membrane sheets are
overlapped 3 – 6 inches, with the salvage edge release strip removed after sheets
have been overlapped and fully adhered.
Horizontal applications are accomplished using the same method with membrane
running from the low point in a shingle effect to the high point of the surface being
waterproofed. All lap joints are self-sealing with the removal of the zip strip and all
overlaps at roll terminations should be sealed with Bituthene Liquid Membrane. All
repairs and projections should also be sealed with Bituthene Mastic.
** END OF SECTION **
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 09-90-00
PAINTING AND COATING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 09 90 00-1
1.1 Work To Be Done .................................................................................... 09 90 00-1
1.2 Related Work Specified in Other Sections .............................................. 09 90 00-1
1.3 Surface Condition of Surfaces to be Painted ........................................... 09 90 00-1
2.0 PRODUCTS........................................................................................................ 09 90 00-2
2.1 Materials .................................................................................................. 09 90 00-2
3.0 EXECUTION ..................................................................................................... 09 90 00-2
3.1 General ..................................................................................................... 09 90 00-2
3.2 Surface Preparation .................................................................................. 09 90 00-3
3.3 Steelwork ................................................................................................. 09 90 00-3
3.4 Protection and Surfaces Not to be Painted ............................................... 09 90 00-3
3.5 Pipe Identification .................................................................................... 09 90 00-4
3.6 Cleaning Up and Repainting .................................................................... 09 90 00-4
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PAINTING AND COATING 09-90-00 1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 09-90-00
Ithaca, New York PAINTING AND COATING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Work To Be Done
Furnish all labor, materials, scaffolding, tools, and equipment necessary to complete the
painting and finishing requirements of the project as indicated on the drawings and stated in
these specifications.
Included in the painting work are the following:
Steam Anchors and Miscellaneous Steel
The work shall include cleaning and surface preparation, supply and application of primer, if
required, supply and application of top coating and the supply of all consumable materials
required for performing and completing the work.
1.2 Related Work Specified in Other Sections
Structural and Miscellaneous Steel primed and finish painted under Section 05 50 00.
1.3 Surface Condition of Surfaces to be Painted
For equipment supplied and installed under this contract it is the Contractor's responsibility
to ensure that any equipment that is not delivered final painted is suitably primed, if required,
and final painted after installation.
All piping will be received unpainted.
Pipe insulation aluminium cladding will not require painting.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PAINTING AND COATING 09-90-00 2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
All coatings shall be as manufactured by Tnemec, or approved alternate.
Each product used must be one of high quality and made by a manufacturer having an
established reputation. All coatings used must be satisfactory to the Owner. Products
containing lead shall not be used.
The type of coating to be used for specific applications shall be as listed in Table 2.1 of this
specification.
TABLE 2.1
Surface Type of Coating
Structural and Miscellaneous Steel and
Steam Anchors
Primer Coat and Finish Coat Tnemec Series 66
Hi-Build Epoxoline
One 4 - 6 mil prime coat and one 4-6 mil finish
coat. (Note: For miscellaneous steel primer coat,
see Section 05 50 00).
Only materials previously approved in writing by the Owner shall be brought to the site.
All materials shall be delivered to the building in unopened containers as packed by the
Manufacturer. Each container shall bear the Manufacturer's standard label for the catalog
item as approved showing trade name and number, formula, and directions for use.
Containers shall not be opened until contents are to be used.
No coating shall be thinned more than specifically recommended in the Manufacturer's
printed directions and thinner used shall be the highest type of those recommended. No
coating ready prepared for use shall be thinned without the approval of the Owner. No driers
shall be added at the job unless approved by the Owner.
All auxiliary materials shall be pure, of highest quality, and approved by the Owner. Such
materials shall bear identifying labels on the containers.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 General
All coatings shall be applied as per the Manufacturer's printed instructions by brush or roller
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PAINTING AND COATING 09-90-00 3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
unless spray application is specifically named as acceptable in the description of required
treatment, when air or airless spray shall be acceptable.
Coatings shall be thoroughly stirred and kept at a uniform consistency during application.
No work shall be done on damp surfaces unless printed instructions on label so recommend
for the particular coating being used.
Exterior painting shall not be done during or immediately following rainy or frosty weather
or when the temperature is below 50F or likely to drop to freezing. The application of
treatments while surfaces are exposed to hot sun or when temperature is above 90F or likely
to be during the drying period shall be avoided.
All work shall be done by skilled mechanics in a workmanlike manner; all coats flowed on
or brushed out to a uniform film. Completed work shall be free of runs, sags, blocked
angles, raised grain, and all other evidence of poor or careless workmanship.
Allow sufficient time before recoating to insure proper drying of the preceding coat.
For enamel finishes on metal of shop-primed surfaces sand original surface between coats
with fine sandpaper and remove all resulting grit and dust before application of each coat.
3.2 Surface Preparation
Follow manufacturer's specifications.
3.3 Steelwork
See Section 05 50 00. Note that all steelwork is to be sandblasted before applying epoxy
primer.
3.4 Protection and Surfaces Not to be Painted
The Contractor shall use tarpaulins, drops, and coverings as much as possible to protect
floors, equipment, etc., from over-spray, spatter, droppings, etc.
Glass, finished surfaces, accessories, electrical fixtures, etc., not to be painted shall be
specially protected.
The following are not to be painted:
Nameplates, tags, or labels.
Machined surfaces.
Valve stems (remove handles and paint separately).
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PAINTING AND COATING 09-90-00 4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
Swagelok or other compression fittings (leave clearance of not less than 1-1/2 inch).
Lubrication points.
Pivot points involving mechanical movement.
Aluminium clad insulation except where specifically required.
Metal checkered floor plate, trench covers, and support angles will be hot dipped
galvanized by others and are not to be painted.
3.5 Pipe Identification
Contractor shall stencil labels on the piping to identify fluid and direction of flow as directed
by the Owner.
3.6 Cleaning Up and Repainting
The Contractor shall remove all paint where it has been spilled, splashed, or spattered on
surfaces.
The Contractor shall touch up or repaint, as required by the Owner all painted surfaces that
are marred, marked, chipped, spalled, defaced, or deficient in any way before it is turned
over to the Owner.
** END OF SECTION **
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 22 00 00
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 22 00 00-1
1.1 Scope ...................................................................................................... 22 00 00-1
1.1.1 Work Specified in this Section .................................................... 22 00 00-1
1.1.2 Related Work Specified in Other Sections .................................. 22 00 00-1
1.2 Quality Assurance .................................................................................... 22 00 00-1
1.2.1 General ......................................................................................... 22 00 00-1
1.2.2 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies, Codes and Standards ..... 22 00 00-1
1.2.3 Referenced Specifications and Standards .................................... 22 00 00-1
1.2.4 Source Quality Control ................................................................ 22 00 00-2
1.3 Submittals ................................................................................................ 22 00 00-2
1.3.1 General ......................................................................................... 22 00 00-2
1.3.2 Proposal Data ............................................................................... 22 00 00-3
1.3.3 Materials and Equipment Source List .......................................... 22 00 00-3
1.3.4 Shop Drawings and Product Data ................................................ 22 00 00-3
1.3.5 Operation and Maintenance Data ................................................. 22 00 00-4
1.3.6 Test Reports ................................................................................. 22 00 00-4
1.4 Project Conditions .................................................................................... 22 00 00-4
1.4.1 Sequencing ................................................................................... 22 00 00-4
1.4.2 Existing Facilities ......................................................................... 22 00 00-4
1.4.3 Removal of Mechanical Equipment............................................. 22 00 00-5
1.4.4 Housekeeping/Safeguarding Construction ................................... 22 00 00-5
1.4.5 Trades Interference ...................................................................... 22 00 00-5
1.5 Materials/Equipment Inspection .............................................................. 22 00 00-5
1.5.1 Shipping/Storage/Handling .......................................................... 22 00 00-6
2.0 PRODUCTS........................................................................................................ 22 00 00-6
2.1 General ..................................................................................................... 22 00 00-6
3.0 EXECUTION ..................................................................................................... 22 00 00-7
3.1 General ..................................................................................................... 22 00 00-7
3.2 Installation and Application Instructions ................................................. 22 00 00-8
3.2.1 General ......................................................................................... 22 00 00-8
3.2.2 Installation.................................................................................... 22 00 00-8
3.2.3 Thermal Metal Joining and Cutting ........................................... 22 00 00-10
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 22 00 00
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Cont'd
Section Description Page No.
3.3 Building and Other Surface Penetrations ................................................. 22 00 00-9
3.3.1 General ......................................................................................... 22 00 00-9
3.3.2 Cutting.......................................................................................... 22 00 00-9
3.4 Supporting Elements .............................................................................. 22 00 00-10
3.4.1 General ....................................................................................... 22 00 00-10
3.5 Maintenance of Surfaces/Housekeeping ................................................ 22 00 00-10
3.6 Painting and Finishing ........................................................................... 22 00 00-10
3.7 Field Quality Control ............................................................................. 22 00 00-10
3.7.2 Structural Integrity/Leak/Performance
Acceptance/Miscellaneous Testing ............................................ 22 00 00-11
3.7.3 Systems Start-up ........................................................................ 22 00 00-11
3.8 Field Tests During Guarantee Period ..................................................... 22 00 00-11
3.9 Testing Services by Owner .................................................................... 22 00 00-12
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 22 00 00
Ithaca, New York GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.1.1 Work Specified in this Section
A. The Section includes General Mechanical Requirements applicable to the
Work specified in the accompanying 22 00 00 Series Sections.
1.1.2 Related Work Specified in Other Sections
A. Section 22 05 00 - Piping – General
B. Section 22 07 00 - Thermal Insulation
1.2 Quality Assurance
1.2.1 General
A. Comply with the requirements of the General Conditions which form a
part of the Contract Documents.
B. In the performance of the work, comply with the requirements of the
Contract Documents and of the equipment manufacturer, whichever is the
most stringent.
C. A deviation from Specifications which is not explicitly proposed/identified
as a deviation, is subject to removal/replacement at any time after
discovery and notification of the Contractor, at no additional cost to the
Owner.
1.2.2 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies, Codes and Standards
A. Provide materials and equipment and execute the work, including tests and
inspections, in compliance with the applicable provisions of the Federal,
State and Local Government laws and ordinances and referenced codes
and standards. Governing laws, ordinances, codes and standards constitute
minimum requirements. All more stringent requirements of the Contract
Documents shall modify, supplement and supersede applicable portions of
governing laws, ordinances, codes and standards.
1.2.3 Referenced Specifications and Standards
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
A. The provisions of the referenced specifications and standards, as
applicable and referenced under Articles of this Section or other 15000
Series Sections, govern the quality of materials, workmanship, and
installation required under the Contract.
B. AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
C. ANSI American National Standards Institute
D. API American Petroleum Institute
E. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
F. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
G. AWWA American Water Works Association
H. AWS American Welding Society
I. FM Associated Factory Mutual Insurance Companies
J. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
K. MSS Manufacturer's Standardization Society
L. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
M. NIACA National Insulation and Abatement Contractors Association
N. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
O. UL Underwriter's Laboratories
1.2.4 Source Quality Control
A. Materials and equipment shall be the products of manufacturers regularly
engaged in the manufacture of such products, shall essentially duplicate
equipment that has been in satisfactory service at least 2 years prior to
issue date of the Contract and shall be supported by a service organization
that is reasonably convenient to the site.
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 General
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
A. All Contractor supplied material and equipment shall be submitted for
review.
B. Submit per Section 01 33 00, General Requirements and as supplemented
herein.
C. Review of shop drawings does not constitute approval of a proposed
deviation from the Contract Documents unless it is specifically noted and
identified as a deviation in the shop drawings submitted for review.
1.3.2 Proposal Data
A. Provide upon request, prior to award of Contract, a materials and
equipment source list for the proposed work.
1.3.3 Materials and Equipment Source List
A. Upon request and prior to placing orders for materials and equipment,
submit for approval, a list of manufacturing sources from whom the
Contractor proposes to acquire materials and equipment to be incorporated
into the work. Source approvals are tentative and are subject to approval
of submittals/shop drawings verifying compliance with the Contract
Documents.
NOTE: MATERIALS IMPORTED FROM OR
MANUFACTURED IN CHINA OR TIAWAN
ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE
B. Specified manufacturers with or without model designation, shall be
acceptable only where the manufacturer's product complies with or is
modified as necessary to comply with specified and indicated
requirements, and inclusion of a manufacturer's name as a product source
does not void any specified criteria.
C. Materials and equipment not specified or indicated as to manufacturer, but
necessary for complete functioning systems, shall be provided from
sources optional to the Contractor but conforming to the quality levels and
functional requirements for corresponding materials and equipment
specified.
1.3.4 Shop Drawings and Product Data
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and shall be
numbered clearly according to the Submittal Schedule with reference to
the relevant specification section or drawings.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.3.5 Operation and Maintenance Data
A. Provide as supplemented herein.
B. After start-up, issue the O & M Manual with addenda/revisions to all
recipients of the O & M Manual within 10 working days following
acceptance of the system.
C. Manuals shall incorporate data to enable operators and maintenance
personnel to understand the equipment, its potentialities, performance,
limitations and maintenance needs. Data on design, construction,
installation and operating features shall be included. Data submitted shall
exclude or obliterate content which is not applicable to equipment
purchased under the Contract.
D. Manuals shall include the following:
1. System OEM (Original Equipment Manufacture) components and
assembly drawings as built.
1.3.6 Test Reports
A. Deliver test data required prior to final acceptance as part of the O & M
Manuals.
B. Detailed field test procedures and factory test procedures required by the
Contract Documents, shall be submitted for approval at least thirty (30)
days before actual testing begins. Procedures used shall be bound with
test reports.
1.4 Project Conditions
1.4.1 Sequencing
A. Make all connections to existing systems during designated periods, upon
written approval of Owner and at no increase in the Contract Sum.
B. Coordinate/schedule delivery of equipment and subsequent installation
work with interfacing work for required access, subsequent structural
work, drainage provisions, external systems connections, concrete work
and the like.
C. Maintain Steam at all time with maximum shutdowns of 6 hours.
1.4.2 Existing Facilities
A. Operation of valves in existing utilities will be performed only by the
Owner.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. Do not interrupt existing utilities except as specified or when approved in
writing, and then only after temporary utility services have been approved
and provided. Interruptions must be scheduled to suit Owner
requirements.
C. Verify all existing work. Where existing connections require modification
in order to match or connect work under this Contract, provide all
necessary labor, materials, and equipment to accomplish the work. In
addition, maintain integrity of the existing systems. Rectify any
contamination, degradation of cleanliness or damage to the existing
systems to the satisfaction of the Owner. Provide all work so required at
no increase in the Contract Sum.
1.4.3 Removal of Mechanical Equipment
A. Disconnect mechanical work to be removed at the nearest convenient
connection to existing services which are to remain. Disconnect the
mechanical equipment at fittings or valves and plug or cap. Do not
remove such equipment until approved by the Owner.
B. All materials and equipment which are removed, except for those items
indicated to be relocated or delivered to Owner storage or directed to be
relocated or delivered to Owner storage by the Owner, shall become the
property of the Contractor and shall be promptly removed from the site.
1.4.4 Housekeeping/Safeguarding Construction
A. Perform operations during construction and upon completion of the work
of this Contract in accordance with the applicable requirements of NFPA
Standard No. 241 and the Contract Documents.
1.4.5 Trades Interference
A. Sequence/coordinate exact location and clearances of construction to
preclude any interference between present and future work underground
piping, conduits, cables and substructures and aboveground piping, wiring,
lighting fixtures, mechanical/electrical, ducting, building equipment,
process equipment, control panels, and other construction, to facilitate the
installation of this work and compliance with applicable codes.
1.5 Materials/Equipment Inspection
A. All material and equipment, workmanship and performance thereof, shall be
subjected to inspection and test after its delivery to the site. In case any articles
are found to be defective in material or workmanship or otherwise not in
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
conformity with the Specification requirements, Owner reserves the right to reject
such articles or require their correction.
B. Rejected Work requiring correction shall be promptly removed or remedied by
and at the expense of the Contractor.
1.5.1 Shipping/Storage/Handling
A. Protect materials and equipment, including surface finish, against
detrimental conditions within Contractor's control, including freezing and
corrosion, during transport, storage, receipt, erection, connection, and until
acceptance by Owner.
B. Match mark disassembled components. Close and seal open ends and
maintain so until connection, in compliance with specified cleanliness
requirements. Modularize, reinforce, brace, pack for shipment and handle
per applicable commerce requirements and, for handling, within
constraints of site destination available access.
C. When storing equipment off-site, keep in dry, protected, environmentally
controlled space, at a temperature range of 40 to 90F, humidity range to
prevent condensation, packaged/sealed to prevent incursion of detrimental
particulate.
D. Nitrogen blanket, desiccant protection and shrink-wrapping is suggested
where applicable.
E. The Owner shall be informed of the fact when equipment will be stored
off-site.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 General
A. The Contract Documents define process concepts, materials and equipment,
systems duty, capacity, operating conditions and product requirements, setting
forth minimum requirements and details which will assist the Bidder in the
preparation of his Proposal and the successful Contractor in assuming
responsibility for the Work. However, these minimum requirements and details
shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from providing all Work in
accordance with the necessary expertise and capacity, even though some items
may not be complete or specifically mentioned or indicated, to suit the needs of
the required Work. Where any project service condition would adversely affect
product continuous service performance capability, de-rate or modify or propose
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-7
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
replacement of the product, as necessary to obtain continuous service
performance required by the Contract Documents.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 General
A. Execute the Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents, to provide the
Owner with first class materials, equipment, state-of-the-art workmanship and
appearance/finish, subject to the closest inspection by the Contractor, whether or
not the Owner or authorities having jurisdiction perform any part of the
inspection.
B. Execute the Work in accordance with: requirements of referenced codes,
standards and regulations; requirements of authorities having jurisdiction; and
where specified, in accordance with submitted and approved procedures.
C. Perform the Work with required expertise in accordance with manufacturer's
published and written project specific instructions, and where necessary for
proper execution of the Work, under the specific direction of a competent
authorized representative of the manufacturer.
D. Materials and equipment furnished, and Work done, shall be subject to inspection
by the Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Such inspection shall not
relieve the Contractor's responsibility for furnishing qualified labor and material
in strict accordance with these Specifications.
E. Materials and equipment not meeting specified requirements shall be rejected and
replaced at once with materials or equipment of the specified type and quality, at
no additional cost to the Owner.
F. Systems shall be complete in all details, interfaces and ancillaries necessary to the
specified Work, and even though not all items of Work necessary thereto are
specifically mentioned by the Contract Documents, they shall be provided.
G. Provide, subject to Owner's approval, all modifications to ancillary facilities
required by the proposed equipment, at no increase in Contract Sum.
H. During construction and testing procedures, maintain integrity of existing
structures.
I. Provide for and fit materials and equipment into available maintenance
access/clearance space indicated.
J. Provide, maintain and enforce safety and environmental protection provisions
necessary to the Work.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-8
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
K. Refer to referenced sources for applicable requirements which are modified or
supplemented herein.
L. No changes or deviations from this Specification shall be permitted without prior
written approval and credit to Owner where due.
M. It is incumbent upon the Contractor to ensure the Owner's Representative
witnesses and inspects all work before closure or burial. Cost to uncover or
excavate for inspection and recovering shall be at Contractor's expense.
3.2 Installation and Application Instructions
3.2.1 General
A. Furnish, apply, install, adjust, test and operate all materials, equipment and
systems in conformance with the approved/certified drawings and
manufacturer's published instructions, except as more stringently modified
and supplemented by the Contract Documents. In the event of conflict
between manufacturer's specific criteria and the Contract Documents,
bring such conditions to the Owner's attention for resolution to result in
construction suited to project conditions.
B. The procedures and means employed for doing the various classes of work
shall: be at the option of the Contractor and subject to the Contract
Documents; provide the Owner with first class workmanship, and
acceptable appearance/finish; and subject to the closest inspection by the
Contractor himself, whether or not the Owner performs any part of the
inspection.
3.2.2 Installation
A. Unload, receive, store, relocate, handle, uncrate, inspect, check, clean,
assemble, rig, install, test and adjust all materials and equipment, each in
its proper location as indicated or specified herein, complete with ancillary
items, in satisfactory operation condition.
B. Also provide all necessary: setting equipment to accurate line and grade,
levelling equipment with metallic shims, filler plates; grouting; aligning
equipment components; field balancing; couplings, belts and guards and
anchor bolts; drilling dowel holes and dowelling equipment bases;
vibration isolation. Cut shims from shim-stock, sheet or plate steel or
corrosion resistant metal sized for full bearing surfaces. Remove shims
after grouting if so required by the manufacturer.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-9
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
C. Maintain tolerances in levelling, alignment and vibration and other
specific installation requirements for each class of work in accordance
with manufacturer's published installation instructions, unless otherwise
specified.
D. Furnish and position anchor bolts per approved/certified shop drawings
except as otherwise indicated. Locate per approved/certified shop
drawings, underfloor conduit, drain lines and hub-outlets within or directly
adjacent to equipment base and as closely as possible to equipment
connections.
3.2.3 Thermal Metal Joining and Cutting
A. Each party performing thermal metal joining and cutting shall be
responsible for the quality of work done by his organization and shall
repair/replace, in accordance with specified requirements, any work not
performed in accordance with these Specifications.
Hot Work Permits are required.
3.3 Building and Other Surface Penetrations
3.3.1 General
A. Provide all openings and sleeves required for this work in cooperation
with the work under other sections, as indicated on the drawings.
D. Provide surface penetrations in conformance with applicable code
requirements.
E. Provide all caulking, flashings and counterflashings required to maintain
integrity of sanitation and weather protection at all mechanical systems
penetrations of building boundary surfaces.
3.3.2 Cutting
A. To avoid unnecessary after-the-fact cutting of building surfaces: Provide
all support inserts, sleeves, anchors, footings, foundations, chases,
openings, drainage provisions and the like during construction, in
sufficient time for appropriate trades to accommodate these items in the
normal course of construction.
B. Use concrete/masonry saws for cutting openings in existing
concrete/masonry surfaces.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-10
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.4 Supporting Elements
3.4.1 General
A. Provide all supporting elements, including supplementary structural steel
and ancillary devices necessary to support the work.
B. During construction and testing procedures, maintain the structural
integrity of existing work by providing temporary shoring, bracing and
reinforcing to safely support/restrain the live and dead loads imposed on
the work by material, workmen, testing or inclement weather conditions.
3.5 Maintenance of Surfaces/Housekeeping
A. Recondition or replace concrete which has not been adequately protected during
pipe fabricating operations and which has become oil-soaked. Reconditioning
entails putting concrete into a condition suitable for satisfactory adhesion of any
specified surface finish. If concrete cannot be satisfactorily reconditioned, it shall
be removed and replaced at no increase in Contract sum.
B. During the work maintain clean and safe work surfaces and areas and
housekeeping at minimum in compliance with NFPA Std. No. 241. Upon
completion of work in each respective area, clean and protect all work. Just prior
to final acceptance of the project, clean and finish all work to the satisfaction of
the Owner.
3.6 Painting and Finishing
A. Finish painting, including all necessary prime painting of unpainted 22 00 00
Series Sections work surfaces is specified as part of the work of Section 09 90 00,
unless otherwise specified.
3.7 Field Quality Control
3.7.1 General
A. Prior to acceptance of the work, operate and test each completed system in
conjunction with interfacing work, and in the presence of the Owner's
Representative and authorities having jurisdiction. Test systems per
requirements of applicable governing codes and the requirements specified
herein. Provide all work materials, equipment and manpower as required
to properly execute each test.
B. Coordinate and schedule testing provisions with Owner as to source of
Owner furnished special test fluids, spill prevention/containment thereof
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-11
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
with respect to other related construction/inspection/test activities, and like
concerns.
C. Test Procedures: Where specified in the 22 00 00 Series Sections, develop
the test procedures to demonstrate the satisfactory operation, within design
intent, of each piece of equipment and each system. The test procedures,
at minimum, shall be in compliance with the test procedures and methods
recommended by the equipment suppliers/manufacturers. Submit the
proposed test procedures to the Owner for review thirty (30) days prior to
start of testing.
D. Notify the Owner not less than ten (10) working days prior to scheduled
date of each test and request that a representative of the Owner witness
each test.
3.7.2 Structural Integrity/Leak/Performance Acceptance/Miscellaneous Testing
A. Refer to Articles under the 22 00 00 Series Sections for applicable
requirements.
3.7.3 Systems Start-up
A. Adjust all parts of the various systems to function within the framework of
design intent and operating characteristics specified or published by the
equipment manufacturers. The Contractor will bring into service
condition all components, assemblies and systems prior to operation for
any purpose, as required by the component, assembly or system
manufacturer and the Contract Documents.
B. In the event that temporary use of systems before all parts are complete is
necessary and approved by the Owner, adjust all parts to preclude damage
and provide means to render temporary system use as effective as possible
at no increases in Contract sum.
3.8 Field Tests During Guarantee Period
A. Additional testing beyond that specified to determine/verify compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents shall be performed per the following:
1. Test and testing procedures for items not delineated in Contract
Documents, shall be mutually agreed upon, in writing, prior to start of
testing.
2. Specially requested test activity participant's costs shall be borne by:
a. The Owner if compliance is verified.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 22 00 00-12
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
b. The Contractor if testing indicates failure to comply.
B. Testing shall be performed in the presence of the Owner's Representative.
C. If the testing or retesting of the work provided under this Contract should indicate
failure to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall
be responsible for whatever addition, modification or replacements may be
necessary to provide the Owner with a system which fully conforms to these
requirements. Repair work shall be scheduled at a time convenient to the facility
being served.
3.9 Testing Services by Owner
A. The Owner may employ the services of one or more testing agencies for the
Owner's purposes, such as validating Contractor's data. Any information or
assistance furnished by these agencies shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for his work and the rectification of any work which is not in
compliance with the Contract Documents, without additional cost to the Owner.
B. The Owner reserves the right to retain an independent welding inspection agency
for radiographic, ultrasonic, or dye penetrant inspection of pipe welds.
** END OF SECTION **
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 22 05 00
PIPING - GENERAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 22 05 00-1
1.1 Scope ........................................................................................................ 22 05 00-1
1.2 Related Work ........................................................................................... 22 05 00-1
1.3 Submittals ................................................................................................ 22 05 00-1
2.0 PRODUCTS........................................................................................................ 22 05 00-1
2.1 Contractor-Supplied Pipe Materials ......................................................... 22 05 00-1
2.1.1 Pipe Marking ................................................................................ 22 05 00-2
2.2 Fabricated Spools ..................................................................................... 22 05 00-3
2.3 Wall Sleeves............................................................................................. 22 05 00-3
2.4 Wall Penetration Seals ............................................................................. 22 05 00-3
2.5 Temporary Equipment for System Filling ............................................... 22 05 00-3
3.0 EXECUTION ..................................................................................................... 22 05 00-4
3.1 Shipping and Storage of Materials ........................................................... 22 05 00-4
3.1.1 General ......................................................................................... 22 05 00-4
3.2 Tagging .................................................................................................... 22 05 00-4
3.3 Pipe Installation ....................................................................................... 22 05 00-5
3.4 Field Run Piping ...................................................................................... 22 05 00-7
3.5 Pipe Hangers, Guides, Supports, and Anchors ........................................ 22 05 00-7
3.6 Pipe Connections ..................................................................................... 22 05 00-8
3.6.1 Welded Connections .................................................................... 22 05 00-8
3.6.2 Socket Welding ............................................................................ 22 05 00-8
3.6.3 Butt Welding ................................................................................ 22 05 00-8
3.6.4 Flanged Joints .............................................................................. 22 05 00-9
3.6.5 Threaded Joints .......................................................................... 22 05 00-10
3.7 Welding of Pressure Piping ................................................................... 22 05 00-10
3.7.1 General ....................................................................................... 22 05 00-10
3.7.2 Welding Process ......................................................................... 22 05 00-11
3.7.3 Performance of Welders ............................................................ 22 05 00-12
3.7.4 Repair of Welds ......................................................................... 22 05 00-12
3.7.5 Drawings .................................................................................... 22 05 00-12
3.7.6 Inspection ................................................................................... 22 05 00-13
3.7.7 Non-Destructive Examination (NDE) ........................................ 22 05 00-13
3.7.8 Non-Destructive Examination Procedures ................................. 22 05 00-13
3.8 Internal Cleaning of Piping .................................................................... 22 05 00-14
3.9 Pressure Testing ..................................................................................... 22 05 00-14
3.10 Pressure Test Certificates ....................................................................... 22 05 00-16
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PIPING - GENERAL 22 05 00-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 22 05 00
Ithaca, New York PIPING - GENERAL
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
A. The common requirements for the piping systems include:
1. Identification
2. Fabricated spools
3. Shipping and storage of materials
4. Pipe installation
5. Pipe connections
6. Welding
7. Cleaning
8. Pressure testing
1.2 Related Work
A. Section 22 00 00 - Mechanical - General
B. Section 23 22 13 - Steam and Condensate Piping
1.3 Submittals
A. Welding procedures
B. As-built drawings on completion of the installation
C. Manufacturers of pipe materials, manufacturing specifications and ratings of supplied
pipe and components
D. NDE procedures
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Contractor-Supplied Pipe Materials
A. All piping and piping fittings shall be obtained from reputable and high quality
manufacturers. Pipe and fittings manufactured in China including Taiwan will
NOT be considered acceptable.
B. The country where the pipe and fittings have been manufactured shall be
identified on each length of pipe and on each fitting.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PIPING - GENERAL 22 05 00-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
C. Material Quality Control shall be exercised to ensure that the new materials meet
the manufacturing specification.
D. Control shall be exercised during manipulation and fabrication so that rogue
materials do not enter service.
E. If the Contractor is aware that a specified component is not suitable for the
intended service, the Contractor shall notify the Owner.
F. Internally corroded pipe and fittings shall be rejected.
G. The suitability of any piping or piping associated equipment for the intended
service shall be at the discretion of the Owner.
2.1.1 Pipe Marking
A. All carbon steel pipe shall have stamped or stenciled (1” high or larger) at
one end of every length of pipe, the mill test report reference number,
Manufacturer’s name, ASTM material designation, pipe size, wall
thickness, hydrostatic test pressure, and be circled with white paint.
B. Material not marked as specified will not be accepted at the Contractor’s
cost.
C. Pipe line number for spool pieces shall be stenciled (2” high or larger) in
white paint.
D. On pipes with diameters too small to stencil/stamp, the piping shall be
firmly bundled and a stainless steel tag shall be firmly attached with
stainless steel wire to each pipe bundle. The tag shall contain the same
information as described above.
E. All carbon steel piping shall have a protective lacquer coating on the
outside of the pipe.
F. Fittings shall be stamped or stenciled with the applicable mill test report
reference number, Manufacturer, ASTM material specification and size.
G. Mill Test Reports are to be forwarded for all supplied piping and fittings,
with a cover letter certifying and summarizing all material by size, ASTM
code and Mill Test Report reference number.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PIPING - GENERAL 22 05 00-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
2.2 Fabricated Spools
A. Fabricators shall be responsible to check pipe lengths and fittings, on receipt, for
conformance with the above requirements and to check identity against the test
certification.
B. Piping and fittings are to be color coded by material type after acceptance.
C. The relevant identifications for the supplied materials shall be recorded for all
quality control stages.
D. On completion of the fabrication of the spool pieces and prior to shipment to site,
the fabricated assemblies shall be identified by a painted or stenciled on number,
which is correlated to the quality control records.
E. All spool pieces are to be traceable to test reports.
2.3 Wall Sleeves
A. Standard weight black carbon steel pipe with anchor lugs except where
continuously welded seal rings are indicated.
2.4 Wall Penetration Seals
A. Mechanically expandable elastomer seal devices:
1. Thunderline Corp., Wayne, MI., “Link Seal”
2. Advanced Products & Systems Inc., Lafayette, LA., “Innerlynx”
3. Metraflex Co., Chicago, IL.
4. Other approved.
B. Neoprene boots.
2.5 Temporary Equipment for System Filling
A. Provide the necessary temporary piping, valves, fittings, hoses, etc. required to fill
each of the piping systems.
B. Pipe, valves, and fittings shall have a pressure rating comparable to the permanent
piping system to be filled if any of the equipment will remain connected to the
system during the hydrotest.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PIPING - GENERAL 22 05 00-4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Shipping and Storage of Materials
3.1.1 General
A. Notwithstanding whether materials are supplied by the Owner or by the
Contractor, the Contractor shall be governed by the requirements specified
hereunder in respect to all materials.
B. All valves shall be transported with the valve stem protrusion minimized
in order to decrease the possibility of any accidental damage to the stems,
seats, and discs.
C. All associated piping equipment and all materials, with the exception of
pipe, large pipe fittings, and fabricated pipe spool pieces, shall be stored
indoors such as to protect against weather, fire hazard, and mechanical
damage during shipment and/or storage.
D. Pipe, large pipe fittings, and fabricated pipe spool pieces may be stored
outdoors, but only in such a manner that no water collects inside these
materials. Materials that may be stored outdoors shall be raised
aboveground and suitably covered. Under no circumstances shall any
materials be stored directly on the ground.
E. The loading and unloading of all materials shall be done by the Contractor
by either hoisting or skidding in order to avoid any damage due to shock.
Under no circumstances shall any materials be dropped. Pipe handled on
skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against the other pipe.
F. The Contractor shall make periodic inspections of all stored materials. If
damage is detected, it shall be reported to the Owner, who will prescribe
the necessary action by the Contractor to prevent further damage and to
restore or replace the damaged materials.
G. Preservatives such as oil, grease, etc., shall not be removed from shafts,
spindles, etc., of materials until the commissioning of relevant systems.
3.2 Tagging
A. All equipment and valves supplied by the Contractor shall be provided with a
permanent stainless steel metal tag on which the tag number shall be stamped.
Tags shall be durable and wired on the equipment and valves with stainless steel
wire. Where tags cannot be wired on to hold firmly, the tag number shall be
stamped on the equipment or valve.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PIPING - GENERAL 22 05 00-5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.3 Pipe Installation
A. The piping system shall comply with the requirements of the appropriate section
of the ASME Pressure Piping Code B31, or the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code for welding requirements, testing, and inspection, insofar as they apply to
Federal, State, and Municipal regulations and any other state and local bylaws and
regulations.
B. The Contractor shall not commence erection of a piping system until the
necessary established coordinates and benchmarks have been provided by the
Owner.
C. All piping shall be fabricated and erected in an accurate and workmanlike manner
to the dimensions and elevations given on the piping system general arrangement
drawings.
D. Before erection, the Contractor shall check each pipe piece for accuracy and
exactness of the pipe, angles of bends, and for the straightness of each pipe.
E. The Contractor shall erect all piping covered by this specification to the piping
drawing information. The Contractor shall check, as each pipe piece is erected,
for its position and shall correct any discrepancies by modification to the
adjoining pipe piece before it is erected.
F. The tolerances on linear dimensions (intermediate and overall) shall be as noted
here and shall apply to all types of fabrication on end-to-end, end-to-face, face-to-
face, center-to-end, center-to-face, or center-to-center dimensions. The tolerances
are not cumulative.
NOMINAL
PIPE SIZE
TOLERANCES
IN INCHES
1 inch to 10 inches +/- 1/8
12 inches and larger +/- 3/16
G. The Contractor shall refer all variations, beyond the given tolerances, in the
erected position of pipes to the Owner and shall obtain the Owner's approval
before proceeding with erection.
H. All elbows shall be long radius type, unless otherwise specified on the drawings.
I. The Contractor shall install all valves as shown on the drawings with particular
attention being paid to the direction of flow through check and ball valves. Valve
re-orientation, if required, is by the Contractor.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PIPING - GENERAL 22 05 00-6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
J. The Contractor shall prepare and complete all joints and weld closures at all
terminal points which interface with the work performed by others, including
equipment nozzles. Where blanking plates and flanges or pipe caps are required
to terminate a system or complete a terminal point, the Contractor shall supply
and install the required fittings.
K. The work to be done by the Contractor shall include, where applicable, the cutting
of holes in floors and grating panels to allow installation of piping. The sizes of
such holes shall be as specified on the drawings.
L. For all piping, a vent shall be installed at high points and drains at low points.
M. All piping shall be supported independently of connected equipment, valves and
fittings.
N. Carbon steel piping shall be supported as indicated on the drawings; however, if
supports have not been indicated, the following spacing shall govern for straight
runs of pipe:
Nominal Pipe Size
1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 20 24
Water Service
Max. Span (ft)
7 10 12 14 17 19 23 27 30 32
Steam Service
Max. Span (ft)
9 13 15 17 21 24 30 35 39 42
O. Copper tubing shall be supported as indicated on the drawings; however, if
supports have not been indicated, the following spacing shall govern for straight
runs of pipe:
1. horizontal tubing less than 2 inches in diameter shall be supported every 6
ft. or less
2. horizontal tubing 2 inches in diameter or greater shall be supported every
10 ft. or less
3. vertical tubing shall be supported every 10 ft. or less to take the load off
the base of the riser
P. Where a change in direction occurs, the above distances shall be reduced to 75%
or less of the maximum spans provided in “N” and “O” above.
Q. If valves, heavy fittings, or other components that are heavier than the piping are
installed between supports, the spacing of the supports shall be reduced and
preferably placed as close as possible to the concentrated weight.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PIPING - GENERAL 22 05 00-7
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
R. Supports designed and located by the Contractor shall be subject to the approval
of the Engineer.
S. The Contractor shall prepare and complete all joints and weld closures at all
terminal points that interface with the work performed by others, including
equipment nozzles and provide blanking plates, flanges or pipe caps as required to
terminate a system or complete a terminal point.
T. Upon completion of erection, the Contractor shall prepare “as-built” drawings by
recording all deviations for pipes and forwarding clearly marked-up copies of the
Plan and Profile Drawings to the Owner for his records.
3.4 Field Run Piping
A. Piping not shown on the General Arrangement Drawings but indicated on the
Process and Control Diagrams shall be field run.
B. Pipe hanger and support drawings are not provided for field run piping.
C. Pipe hanger and support locations shall be determined based on the guidelines
provided in Item 3.3. above.
D. Pipe hanger and support design for field run piping shall meet the specified
requirements and, where possible, shall comprise commercially available
components as manufactured by Anvil, Advanced Thermal Systems, or other
manufacturers of comparable components.
E. Field run piping shall not be installed without obtaining prior written approval
from the Owner for the routing, design of hangers and supports and location of
hangers and supports.
F. The Contractor is responsible for the positioning and erecting of all
hanger/support assemblies and for the supply of all supplementary steel.
G. Failure to comply with these requirements shall be sufficient cause for the Owner
to reject any work already performed.
3.5 Pipe Hangers, Guides, Supports, and Anchors
A. Where the design of pipe hangers and supports is not included in the work to be
done by the Contractor, but the supply and installation is included, the pipe
hangers and supports shall be installed at locations given on the General
Arrangement Drawings and shall be in accordance with the requirements
specified in the Hanger and Support Detail Drawings.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PIPING - GENERAL 22 05 00-8
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. All hangers and hanger components shall be as manufactured by Anvil or
approved equal.
C. Any deviations from the drawings or any alternate suppliers shall be approved by
the Owner and any resulting modifications necessary are to be completed by the
Contractor.
3.6 Pipe Connections
3.6.1 Welded Connections
A. Welded joints shall be at least 3 inches away from any other welded joint
and from the terminal point.
B. Weld areas shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all slag, oil, grease, rust,
scale, and moisture prior to commencement of welding.
C. Slag and spatter shall be removed completely from each welding pass
before the next pass is deposited.
3.6.2 Socket Welding
A. All piping 2” and smaller shall be assembled with socket welding fittings,
unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.
B. Pipe shall be saw cut square to the axis of the pipe.
C. The assembly of socket weld joints shall be in accordance with the
applicable section of the ASME Pressure Piping Code B31, unless
indicated otherwise on the drawings.
D. All burrs shall be removed from the pipe before welding.
E. Ensure that approximately 1/16” clearance is provided at the end of the
socket to allow for thermal expansion.
E. A minimum of three passes of weld shall be applied to all socket welded
joints.
3.6.3 Butt Welding
A. All piping 2-1/2” and larger shall be assembled by butt welding, unless
indicated otherwise on the drawings.
B. For piping up to and including 24”, the end preparation shall be in
accordance with ANSI B16.25, Buttwelding Ends.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PIPING - GENERAL 22 05 00-9
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
C. For piping over 24” in diameter, the end preparation shall be in
accordance with API 5L, Specification for Line Pipe, MSS SP-75,
Specification for High Test Wrought Butt Welding Fittings, and MSS SP-
44, Steel Pipeline Flanges.
D. Bevel end profiles shall be made by machining or machine oxygen cutting.
E. Where flame cutting is employed for bevel and profiles, the cut shall be
thoroughly dressed afterwards to eliminate all scale and profile
irregularities and to give a clean, shiny surface.
F. End preparation shall be truly circular and concentric with the axis of the
pipe within the tolerances of the applicable standards.
G. Beveled ends shall be coated with deoxaluminate paint for corrosion
protection if the end will not be welded the same day. The paint shall be
removed down to clean metal before the joint is welded.
H. Weld end preparation shall be in accordance with ASME B16.25 when
joining pipe of different wall thicknesses.
3.6.4 Flanged Joints
A. Flanges and other attachments shall be square with the indicated axis and
shall not deviate from this position measured across any diameter by more
than 3/64-inch per foot of diameter.
B. Maximum allowable dishing of flange facing shall be 1/64-inch.
C. All flanges shall be installed with the boltholes straddling the vertical and
horizontal centerlines, unless indicated otherwise.
D. Bolt holes shall be aligned within a tolerance of 1/16-inch of the
required position.
E. Flanged joints shall be pulled up square on two opposing axes before
completely tightening any one bolt.
F. Bolting and gaskets shall be in accordance with the applicable system
material specifications.
G. Lengths of studs and bolts shall be such that approximately ¼-inch shall
extend beyond the nuts when completely tightened.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PIPING - GENERAL 22 05 00-10
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
H. All bolts and studs shall be coated with Never-Seize or other lubricant of
comparable properties and performance before assembling flanged joints.
3.6.5 Threaded Joints
* Threaded joints are not to be used except in vent and drain piping
downstream of isolating valves.
A. Threaded pipe connections shall have American Standard Taper Pipe
Threads in accordance with ANSI B2.1.
B. Threads shall be cut with clean, sharp dies, accurately set. Dies shall be
run over any threads damaged during handling or storage. All pipe ends
shall be reamed after cutting to remove burrs and the start of each thread
chamfered for ease of assembling.
C. Pipe threads shall be cleaned with solvent and wiped dry to remove any oil
which would prevent adherence of the thread compound.
D. Lepage's Teflon type Ribbon Dope, liquid Teflon, pipe thread compound
shall be used on threaded connections.
E. Thread seal shall be compatible with design temperature of the system.
3.7 Welding of Pressure Piping
3.7.1 General
A. Welding shall be in accordance with the requirements of the applicable
section of the ASME Pressure Piping Code B31 and the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.
B. Qualification of the welding procedures to be used, and the performance
of the welders and welding operators is required, and shall comply with
the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section
IX except as modified by the applicable ASME Pressure Piping Code B31.
C. The Contractor shall have qualified welding procedures for the pipe
materials specified.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for qualifying any Welding Procedure
Specifications that are intended to be used by the Contractor’s personnel.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for qualifying for this project all the
welders and welding operators employed by him. Qualification shall be in
accordance with the applicable ASME Pressure Piping Code B31 and
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PIPING - GENERAL 22 05 00-11
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
ASME Section IX. All qualifications shall be submitted to the Engineer
and the Owner.
F. The Contractor shall maintain a record, certified by him and available to
the Owner or his agent and the inspector of the procedures used and the
welding operators employed by him, showing the date and results of the
procedure and performance qualifications, and the identification symbol
assigned to each performance qualification.
G. The Contractor shall use the identification symbol to identify the welds
performed by a welder or welding operator. This may be accomplished by
the application of the welder’s or welding operator’s symbol on the joint
in a manner specified by the Contractor. Alternatively, the Contractor
shall maintain records which identify the joint with the welder or welding
operator.
3.7.2 Welding Process
A. All welding shall be done using either shielded metal-arc and/or inert gas
tungsten-arc welding process.
B. The Contractor shall submit qualified Welding Procedure Specifications to
cover all materials, sizes, types and positions of pipe welds that may be
encountered as part of the work. Only approved procedures may be used
on the job.
C. A heated enclosure shall be provided when the ambient temperature is less
than 32F.
D. If the base metal temperature is less than 50F, the base metal shall be
preheated to at least 70F and maintained at this temperature during
welding.
E. The use of backing rings and strips shall not be permitted except when
specifically approved by the Owner.
F. If backing rings and strips are approved, they shall be made from materials
of weldable quality compatible with the base metal and shall be removed
after welding unless the owner specifically approves their remaining in the
joint.
G. Peening will not be permitted, except to correct distortion and, in such
cases, shall be approved by the Owner.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PIPING - GENERAL 22 05 00-12
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
H. Each welder certified for the project shall be issued a unique I.D. number
or letter, and shall mark all welds made with this I.D. mark. The
Contractor shall submit a list of welders’ I.D. marks.
I. Provide non-conducting type connections whenever joining dissimilar
metals in open systems.
3.7.3 Performance of Welders
A. The Owner reserves the right to reject welds based on visual and/or
radiographed examination.
B. Where any welding of pressure piping is deemed to be unacceptable
through visual and/or radiographic examination, and the defects removed
total more than 10% of the weld calculated using the bore of the pipe, the
two previous welds executed by the same welder may be radiographed.
C. If any three consecutive welds performed by a welder are deemed to be
unacceptable to the Owner, the welder shall be withdrawn from welding.
3.7.4 Repair of Welds
A. The Contractor shall be responsible, at his own expense, for repairing all
welds judged unacceptable by the Owner and for the subsequent
radiography of repaired welds.
B. The Owner specifically reserves the right to reject welds passed on visual
inspection and radiography.
C. Weld defects shall be removed by grinding until the base metal is reached.
D. Repairs shall be made using the same welding procedures as required for
the original welds.
3.7.5 Drawings
A. Drawings submitted to the Owner that indicate the presence of welds shall
include the following information:
1. Identification number for each weld
2. Type of weld using AWS symbols
3. Procedure employed
4. Inspection applied
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PIPING - GENERAL 22 05 00-13
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. Drawings shall differentiate between shop welds and project site welds.
Project site welds shall include welds made in the Contractor’s shop
located at the project site.
3.7.6 Inspection
A. All shop and project site welding shall be subject to surveillance and
acceptance by the Owner.
B. Inspection by the Owner does not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for providing materials, components, workmanship,
examination and proper record keeping in accordance with the Code
requirements.
C. The Owner has full right of visual examination.
D. The Owner has the right to reject welds not meeting the acceptance criteria
as defined by the applicable codes.
E. Where visual examination by the Owner indicates that a weld is of poor
quality but meets the acceptance criteria, and radiography is not required
by the Code, the Owner shall have the right to perform radiographic
examination.
3.7.7 Non-Destructive Examination (NDE)
A. The Contractor shall include in the construction schedule the time for the
NDE inspection to be performed by others.
B. The Contractor shall provide the necessary access for the inspections to be
performed.
C. NDE and acceptance standards shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the applicable ASME Pressure Piping Code B31.
D. If a defect is discovered, the Owner may order additional NDE at the
Contractor’s expense under this contract until the integrity of the work has
been determined.
E. Visual examinations shall check for the imperfections indicated in the
applicable section of the ASME Pressure Piping Code B31.
F. The root pass of all circumferential butt welds shall be separately, visually
examined by the Contractor as above.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PIPING - GENERAL 22 05 00-14
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
G. The Contractor shall visually examine all welds to ensure good fusion and
to check for defects such as craters, cracks, or undercutting.
3.8 Internal Cleaning of Piping
A. As the piping is fabricated, every effort shall be made to remove debris from the
inside of completed sections of pipe before additional piping is installed on the
completed section.
B. After the completion of construction of the piping systems, the Contractor shall
clean the inside of the pipe to remove all loose scale, foreign material and water.
C. Open ends of all pipes and any other openings shall be covered each night and
after each cleaning operation to ensure that foreign matter and moisture is
excluded.
3.9 Pressure Testing
A. Pressure testing shall be in accordance with the requirements of the applicable
section of the ASME Pressure Piping Code B31. All pressure tests shall be
witnessed by the Owner’s field representative.
B. The piping systems may be tested in sections using approved blank flanges, pipe
caps, or closed isolation valves to protect either connected equipment or
uncompleted sections of the piping system.
C. The installation and subsequent removal of temporary blank flanges, pipe caps,
plugs, etc. required for pressure testing shall be included in the work done by the
Contractor.
D. In preparation for pressure testing of a piping system, the Contractor shall
perform the following (as applicable):
1. Isolate and/or disconnect all equipment which is not to be subjected to
pressure testing.
2. Install all temporary piping flanges, bolts, gaskets and other components
required to perform the tests.
3. Supply and install pressurizing pump, if required.
E. The test pressure shall be at least one-and-one-half times the design pressure. The
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any overpressure above the
specified test pressures.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PIPING - GENERAL 22 05 00-15
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
F. The water used for the hydrotest should be at a temperature close to the ambient
temperature of the piping system to avoid pressure changes due to the changes in
the water temperature.
G. The water used for the hydrotest will remain in the system after completion of the
successful test unless otherwise indicated.
H. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all of the equipment necessary
to fill the system with water.
I. The Contractor shall provide and use test pressure gauges with valid calibration
certificates. Such certificates shall be made available for inspection by the Owner.
The test pressure reading shall be between 25% and 75% of the gauge scale.
J. Before applying the test pressure, the Contractor shall ensure that all air has been
expelled from piping being tested.
K. All tests shall be witnessed by the Owner or his representative, and the Contractor
shall give the Owner 48 hours’ notice of each test.
L. In all cases, the test pressure shall be maintained for at least 120 minutes at 1 ½
times the design pressure without a drop in the system pressure. The piping in the
tunnels may be insulated prior to the test period. The extended holding time
pressurization of the system for 120 minutes is performed to check for possible
leakage through the insulation barrier.
M. After 120 minutes, check joints, valve stem glands, etc. for leaks.
N. All flanged joints which leak shall first be tightened in an attempt to stop leaks. If
tightening fails to stop leaks, the joints shall be dismantled and examined for
cause. The cause shall be eliminated and joints reassembled with new gaskets and
retested. After retesting, the joints shall be leakproof and acceptable to the
Owner.
O. All threaded joints which leak shall be taken apart, checked, cleaned, reassembled
and retested. After retesting, the joints shall be leak-proof and acceptable to the
Owner.
P. After satisfactory completion of pressure tests on a piping system, the Contractor
shall perform the following (as applicable):
1. Remove all temporary blank flanges, pipe caps, piping, etc. and, where
applicable, restore the affected permanent piping.
2. Reconnect and/or return to service all instruments.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall PIPING - GENERAL 22 05 00-16
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3. Remove temporary supports.
3.10 Pressure Test Certificates
A. Upon satisfactory completion of pressure tests on a piping system, the Contractor
shall obtain the signature of the Owner’s Representative and forward relevant
pressure test certificates to the Owner. Only approved forms shall be used for
such certificates. Such certificates shall be the property of the Owner. The
following data shall be included in each certificate:
1. pipe line number(s)
2. piping system title
3. description of portion of piping system tested
4. test pressure
5. duration of test pressure
6. time of test
7. date of test
8. test medium
9. temperature of test medium
** END OF SECTION **
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 22 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 22 07 00-1
1.1 Summary ........................................................................................................ 22 07 00-1
1.1.1 Scope ............................................................................................... 22 07 00-1
1.1.2 Description of Piping Systems to be Insulated ............................... 22 07 00-1
1.2 Related Sections ............................................................................................. 22 07 00-2
1.3 References ...................................................................................................... 22 07 00-2
1.4 Submittals ...................................................................................................... 22 07 00-2
1.5 Owner-Supplied Materials ............................................................................. 22 07 00-3
2.0 PRODUCTS........................................................................................................... 22 07 00-5
2.1 General ........................................................................................................... 22 07 00-5
2.2 Aerogel Insulation .......................................................................................... 22 07 00-5
2.3 Jacketing and Accessories for Steam and Condensate .................................. 22 07 00-5
2.4 Miscellaneous Materials ................................................................................ 22 07 00-5
3.0 EXECUTION ........................................................................................................ 22 07 00-5
3.1 General ........................................................................................................... 22 07 00-5
3.2 Steam and Condensate Piping – In Vaults and Tunnels ................................ 22 07 00-7
3.3 Insulating of Valves, Flanges and Fittings ..................................................... 22 07 00-7
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall THERMAL INSULATION 22 07 00-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 22 07 00
Ithaca, New York THERMAL INSULATION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Summary
1.1.1 Scope
A. Provide the various types of thermal insulation as shown, scheduled or
specified. Include all accessories and components for properly
functioning installations.
B. The work to be done shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Clean and dry surfaces to be insulated.
2. Prepare surfaces, where applicable, prior to application of
insulation.
3. Supply and install supports and fittings required for attaching
insulation to piping and equipment.
4. Supply and install insulation materials.
5. Supply and install supports and fittings required for attaching
jacketing to insulated surfaces.
6. Supply and install jacketing materials for insulated surfaces.
7. Supply consumable materials required for performing and
completing the work.
8. Clean up.
C. Refer to Section 22 00 00 for General Mechanical Requirements.
1.1.2 Description of Piping Systems to be Insulated
A. General
1. Insulate the following piping:
a. Steam and Condensate piping including butterfly valves
conveying fluids at temperatures above 110oF (Hot
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall THERMAL INSULATION 22 07 00-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
Service). NOTE: VALVES TO BE INSULATED AFTER
SUCCESSFUL HYDROTEST.
2. All insulation materials shall be asbestos free.
B. Hot Service Piping Within Structures
1. Insulate pipe within buildings, underground structures, and tunnels
with materials listed in Table A and cover with an embossed
aluminum jacket.
2. Insulation thickness shall be selected from Table A based on the
nominal pipe size.
3. Note: One-inch S.S. condensate line, when in the steam tunnel
only, does not require insulation.
1.2 Related Sections
A. Steam and Condensate Piping - Section 23 22 13
1.3 References
A. ASTM C450
B. ASTM C533
C. ASTM C534
D. ASTM C547, Mineral Fiber Pre-formed Pipe Insulation
1.4 Submittals
A. Manufacturer’s catalog literature related to installation.
B. Contractor’s installation procedures if different from manufacturer’s literature.
C. Shop drawings for adhesives, coatings, mastics, sealants and solvents shall be
accompanied by a Material Safety Data Sheet similar to Form OSHA-174. Where
flammable product application performance requirements are such that a non-
flammable substitute would fail, submit alternative product with complete
information for approval.
D. Test Reports: Provide copies of performance test data.
E. Certificate: Submit certificate that materials’ performance data to be applicable
under project service conditions.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall THERMAL INSULATION 22 07 00-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.5 Valve Removable Insulation Blankets
A. Each valve shall be furnished with its own reusable, removable and weather-
resistant insulation blanket.
B. The insulation blanket shall be of a thickness suitable to reduce the surface
temperature to less than 130F based on an ambient temperature of 90F
(minimum 2-inches thick).
C. The blanket shall be fibrous glass insulation encased in a Teflon or silicone rubber
impregnated Aerogel fabric suitable for temperatures to 600F and an additional
inner layer of stainless steel wire mesh. Minimum weight of fabric shall be 14
ounces per square yard. Fabric shall comply with UL 214 flammability test.
Stainless steel stitching, ties and grommets shall be used. No raw cut jacket edge
will be exposed.
D. The insulation provided on the connecting piping will be 1.875 inches thick for
steam and 3/4-inch thick for condensate lines.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall THERMAL INSULATION 22-07-00 4 Thermal System Upgrade May 15, 2020 TABLE A PIPE INSULATION – HOT SERVICE Piping System Fluid Temp. (oF) Insulation Thickness in Inches for Pipe Sizes Listed Insulation Material to 1" 2" 3" 4" 6" 8" 10" 12" 16" 18" 24" Steam 500 design 600 upset 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 7/8 1 7/8 1 7/8 1 7/8 1 7/8 1 7/8 1 7/8 1 7/8 Aerogel (in pipe tunnels and vaults) Condensate Within vaults and tunnels 250 max. 1 F/G 1 F/G 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 - - - Aerogel on 3” diameter and above. Fiberglas below 3”
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall THERMAL INSULATION 22 07 00-5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 General
A. Provide non-combustible thermal system materials per NFPA 255 and ASTM
E84. Provide insulation with a Flame Spread Classification of 0 (calcium silicate,
mineral wool) or maximum of 25 (Aerogel) and a Smoke Developed
Classification of 0 (calcium silicate, mineral wool) or maximum of 50 (Aerogel).
2.2 Aerogel Insulation
A. Pipe aerogel insulation to ASTM C1728.
2.3 Jacketing and Accessories for Steam and Condensate
A. Jacketing shall be 0.016-inch thick stucco embossed aluminum complete with
integrally bonded polycraft moisture barrier held in place with aluminum screws;
elbow covers to be prefabricated. Acceptable manufacturers are as follows:
1. Childers
2. Ell-Jacs
3. Approved equal
B. Fasteners: Aluminum screws at a minimum 6-inch spacing. .
C. Joint sealant shall be aluminum pigmented butyl polymer. Acceptable products
are as follows:
1. Foster Div., Amchem Product Inc., “Elastolar Sealant, Aluminum 95-44”
2. Childers “Chil-Joint CP-70”
3. Approved equal
2.4 Miscellaneous Materials
A. The Contractor shall supply and install all accessory items such as insulating
cement, finish cement, adhesives, sealants, coatings, etc. required for a complete
and proper installation. These items shall be applied in accordance with the
manufacturers' installation instructions.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 General
A. Obtain permission of Owner's Representative before starting insulation work on
any piping. All testing work specified in Sections 22 00 00 and 23 22 13 shall be
completed to the satisfaction of Owner before insulation work is started.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall THERMAL INSULATION 22 07 00-6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
Exception will be taken for piping located in the steam tunnels only. They can
be insulated in advance of the hydrostatic test.
B. Clean piping of foreign substances and ensure pipe surface is free of moisture
prior to application of insulation, insulation adhesives or mastics. Provide solvent
cleaning required to bring surfaces to such condition.
C. Use insulating materials as specified for each class of service.
D. Apply insulation and jacketing where specified or indicated, per manufacturer's
published instructions and as specified herein.
E. Insulation materials, other than cements intended to be mixed with water, may be
applied only when dry.
F. Make joints tight, with insulation lengths tightly butted against each other. Where
lengths are cut, make cuts smooth and square, without breaking end surfaces.
Where insulation terminates, neatly taper ends and seal or finish as specified.
Direct longitudinal seams of exposed insulation away from normal view where
possible.
G. When supplied in half sections, apply insulation in a staggered arrangement so
that with single layer sectional insulation, the end joints of the halves are
staggered and the longitudinal joints are in line. Where a second layer of
insulation is required, stagger end and side joints with respect to those of the first
layer so that no joints shall intersect except at right angles.
H. For vertical pipe runs, provide a clamped-on insulation support ring under each
vertical insulation rise of 20 feet. The support shall bear on the insulation to
within 2/3 of the insulation thickness.
I. Insulate flanges the same thickness as the piping or by approved proprietary
methods and materials.
J. Shape contours smooth and continuous on exposed work.
K. Insulate metal, such as anchors, in contact with low temperature surfaces and
projecting beyond the finished insulation surfaces to prevent condensation.
Insulate the projecting metal with 1/2 of the specified insulated thickness to a
distance not less than 4 times the specified insulated thickness.
L. Where pipes pass through floors or walls, apply insulation so that no damage will
be incurred upon operation of the system, i.e. due to movement of pipe. Where
applicable, continue insulation through pipe sleeves
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall THERMAL INSULATION 22 07 00-7
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
M. Install weatherproofing as soon as possible. Keep insulation dry until properly
waterproofed. Remove any wetted insulation and replace before cladding is
applied.
N. Smoothly and securely paste down cemented laps and tapes. Apply adhesives on
a full-coverage basis except where otherwise specified. Make vapor barrier
continuous over vapor sealed insulation.
3.2 Steam and Condensate Piping – In Vaults and Tunnels
A. Insulate piping with the materials and to the thickness listed in Table A.
B. Hold each layer of Arogel insulation in place with staples, tape, or wire. Use
minimum of 4 loops of 18-gauge stainless steel wire per 5-foot length for final
layer. Twist and press the ends of the wire into the insulation to prevent
projections.
C. Fittings shall be insulated in accordance with Section 3.4.
D. Aluminum jacketing shall be applied with all laps positioned to shed water.
E. All jacketing joints are to be lapped 2 inches and vertical joints are to be stove
piped.
F. Aluminum jacketing shall be secured using aluminum screws 6” on center.
3.3 Insulating of Valves, Flanges and Fittings
A. Insulate valves, flanges and fittings with suitable size pipe or block insulation to
provide the specified insulation thickness. Extend this insulation over the pipe
insulation a distance equal to the thickness of the pipe insulation and wire/band or
tape in place in the same manner as the pipe insulation. Where required for
support of the insulation over the flanges, the space over the body of the fitting
may be built up to the level of the flanges with pipe or block insulation.
B. Insulate welded fittings with mitered pipe insulation of the type and thickness
specified for the pipe. Wire each section in place with 18-gauge stainless steel
wire. Reinforced tape shall be used in place of wire on cellular glass insulation.
C. Install insulation so that a minimum of 3" clearance is provided around thredolets
and sockolets installed for future piping and instrumentation hookups. After the
instrumentation or piping is connected, complete the insulation around the
thredolets or sockolets.
** END OF SECTION **
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 23 22 13
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Summary ............................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Related Work Specified in Other Sections ........................................................... 1
1.3 Related Work Performed by Others ..................................................................... 2
1.4 Submittals ............................................................................................................. 2
2.0 PRODUCTS ........................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 General ................................................................................................................. 2
2.2 Piping .................................................................................................................... 2
2.2.1 Piping and Associated Equipment Material Specifications - General ........ 2
2.2.2 Steam and Condensate Piping within Vaults/Tunnel .................................. 3
2.2.4 Manhole Vent Piping .................................................................................. 3
2.3 Miscellaneous Materials ....................................................................................... 3
2.3.1 Steam Traps ................................................................................................ 3
2.3.2 Wall Sleeves................................................................................................ 3
2.3.3 Butterfly Valves for Condensate Service .................................................... 3
2.3.4 Butterfly Valves for Steam Service ............................................................ 4
2.3.5 Expansion Joints ......................................................................................... 4
2.3.6 Flexible Metal Hose .................................................................................... 4
2.3.7 Condensate Return Unit .............................................................................. 4
3.0 EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 5
3.1 Shipping and Storage of Materials ....................................................................... 5
3.1.1 General ........................................................................................................ 5
3.2 Tagging ................................................................................................................. 5
3.3 Piping Demolition, Modification and Tie-in to Existing Systems ....................... 5
3.3.1 General ........................................................................................................ 5
3.3.2 Execution .................................................................................................... 5
3.4 General Installation Requirements ....................................................................... 5
3.3.3 Piping .......................................................................................................... 5
3.4.2 Pipe Hangers, Guides, Supports, and Anchors ........................................... 6
3.4.3 Pipe Connections ........................................................................................ 6
3.4.4 Flanged Joints ............................................................................................. 7
3.4.5 Threaded Joints* ......................................................................................... 7
3.4.6 Field Run Piping ......................................................................................... 7
3.4.7 Piping Associated Equipment ..................................................................... 8
3.5 Welding of Pressure Piping .................................................................................. 8
SECTION 23 22 13
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
3.5.1 General ........................................................................................................ 8
3.5.2 Welding Process .......................................................................................... 8
3.5.3 Performance of Welders ............................................................................. 9
3.5.4 Repair of Welds .......................................................................................... 9
3.5.5 Drawings ..................................................................................................... 9
3.5.6 Welding Procedures .................................................................................... 9
3.6 Internal Cleaning of Piping .................................................................................. 9
3.7 Pressure Testing .................................................................................................. 10
3.7.1 Pressure Testing ........................................................................................ 10
3.7.2 Pressure Test Certificates .......................................................................... 11
3.7.3 Inspection .................................................................................................. 11
3.7.4 Non-Destructive Examination (NDE) ....................................................... 12
3.7.5 Non-Destructive Examination Procedures ................................................ 12
3.7.6 Acceptance Standards for NDE Results ................................................... 12
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 23 22 13-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 23 22 13
Ithaca, New York STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Summary
A. Perform all work required to construct the steam and condensate piping systems
as identified in this specification, and shown on the drawings. The work shall
include, without being limited to, the following:
1. pressure testing
2. internal cleaning and flushing
3. setting of hangers (as applicable)
4. supply and installation of all piping, steel and FRP, and associated equipment
listed or shown on the drawings, all hangers and supports and additional steel
support members required for installation of all hangers and supports
5. design, supply, and installation of all field run piping, including hangers and
supports and additional steel support members (required for installation of
hangers and supports)
6. supply and installation of gaskets, studs, bolts, washers, nuts, screws, and
other fasteners
7. supply of consumable materials including those required for welding
8. supply and installation and subsequent removal of temporary piping including
that required for pressure testing.
9. supply and installation of blanking plates and flanges, pipe caps and plugs at
all terminal points as required for pressure testing.
1.2 Related Work Specified in Other Sections
A. Section 31 41 00 – Excavation Protection
B. Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork
C. Section 22 00 00 – General Mechanical Requirements
D. Section 22 05 00 – Piping – General
E. Section 22 07 00 – Thermal Insulation
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 23 22 13-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.3 Related Work Performed by Others
A. Radiographic Inspections
B. Asbestos Removal
1.4 Submittals
A. Welding procedures specific to the piping systems.
B. Manufacturers of pipe materials, manufacturing specifications and ratings of
supplied pipe and components.
C. Contractor supplied valves including proposed manufacturer, make, and model
number.
D. As-built drawings on completion of the installation.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 General
A. Piping systems materials: Piping systems materials, which are not manufactured
in the U.S.A. shall be identified as such. No pipe or fittings from China will be
permitted.
B. Internally corroded pipe will be rejected.
C. Refer to Section 22 00 00 and 22 05 00 for additional product requirements.
2.2 Piping
2.2.1 Piping and Associated Equipment Material Specifications - General
A. All piping and piping associated equipment shall be obtained only from
reputable and high-quality manufacturers. The Contractor shall submit
full details of the proposed manufacturer, make and model number to the
Owner for review and approval. The suitability of any piping or piping
associated equipment for the intended service shall be at the discretion of
the Owner.
B. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, the Contractor shall ensure
that for each pipe line the requirements of the applicable standard
(including any modifications) and of any other relevant standards are met.
The aforementioned requirements involve pipe, fittings, caps and plugs,
unions, couplings, nipples, flanges, gaskets, bolting, valves, etc.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 23 22 13-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
2.2.2 Steam and Condensate Piping within Vaults/Tunnel
A. Piping materials shall be in accordance with Pipe Material Specification
AACU located at the end of this section.
B. Valves shall be in accordance with Valve Specification – LP Steam,
Condensate (150 lb)
2.2.4 Manhole Vent Piping
A. Pipe: Polyvinyl Chloride - DWV, Extruded from clean, virgin PVC.
Class 200 per AWWA C900 with rubber joint rings per ASTM D 1869.
B. Fittings: Gasketed bell and spigot joint: Per pipe class, wall thickness to
match pipe wall or better.
1. Manville "Blue Brute" Class 150.
2. Clow Corp. "Bell Tite" PVC.
2.3 Miscellaneous Materials
2.3.1 Steam Traps
A. Watson McDaniel Thermo-Dynamic steam trap – ½” WD-450 complete
with integral strainer, blow-off valve, and insulcap. End connections shall
be socket weld.
2.3.2 Wall Sleeves
A. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for wall sleeve requirements.
2.3.3 Butterfly Valves for Condensate Service
A. All condensate butterfly valves shall be furnished by the Contractor. See
end of this section and below for specification.
B. Operators: Lubricated enclosed screw or gear handwheel/chainwheel
operator for valves 4 inches and larger. Chainwheel operator shaft shall
be sized to preclude bending. Chains when specified on the drawings
shall be galvanized. Lug and flanged valves shall be guaranteed for
bubble-tight closure at rated pressure and temperature with one pipe flange
removed. For valves requiring insulation, provide extended neck suitable
for insulated service.
C. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Jamesbury 815L
2. Xomox Tufline
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 23 22 13-4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3. Tri Seal Contromatics
4. Watts QT
2.3.4 Butterfly Valves for Steam Service
A. All steam butterfly valves shall be in accordance with the specification in
the Appendices
2.3.5 Expansion Joints
A. All steam and condensate piping expansion joints (Ball or Slip) shall be in
accordance with the specification in the Appendices
2.3.6 Flexible Metal Hose
A. Flexible metal hose shall be corrugated stainless steel with a single
stainless steel braid.
B. The hoses shall have a minimum live length and an overall length as
indicated on the drawings.
C. The hose shall have ANSI Class 150 raised face flanged connections.
D. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Senior Operations (Flexonics) Limited or approved equal.
2.3.7 Condensate Return Unit
A. Condensate Return Unit: Close coupled centrifugal, single type unit with
20 GPM pump vertically mounted beside receiver. Pump designed to
operate at 209 degrees F without vapor binding and without cavitation
under all system operating conditions.
B. Flow Control Valve: Provide Non-slam check valve at discharge of pump.
C. Receiver: Of cast iron construction, 120-gallon capacity, complete with
control panel of stainless steel NEMA 4X, float switch, seamless copper
float, gauge glass and strainer on the return unit. Factory test to 25 psi.
D. Motor (110 VAC)
Shippensburg Pump Co., Model #92.5PC3 (modified for 120-gallon
receiver), or approved equal. Proposed substitutes must meet space
limitations.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 23 22 13-5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Shipping and Storage of Materials
3.1.1 General
A. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for shipping and storage of
materials requirements.
3.2 Tagging
A. Refer Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for tagging requirements.
3.3 Piping Demolition, Modification and Tie-in to Existing Systems
3.3.1 General
A. Details and scope of piping demolition are shown on the drawings.
B. For piping demolition, modification and tie-in work, the Contractor shall
field check and verify all locations, dimensions, and clearances prior to
commencing the work. The Contractor shall notify the Owner of any
discrepancies and request their rectification. All changes must be
confirmed in writing and approved by the Owner.
3.3.2 Execution
A. The Owner will provide a list of demolished items to be salvaged. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of all demolished material
except for the salvaged items.
E. Pressure testing shall be applied to the tie-ins in accordance with Section
3.7.1. In tie-in locations where pressure testing is not possible, all the
welds shall be 100% radiographed in accordance with Section 3.7.4.
3.4 General Installation Requirements
3.3.3 Piping
A. All steam and condensate piping and supports shall comply with the
Power Piping Code ANSI B31.1 or the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code insofar as they apply to Federal, State, and Municipal regulations
and any other state and local bylaws and regulations.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 23 22 13-6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, all steam and condensate
piping shall be sloped 1/16" per foot for drainage in the direction of flow
or sloped 1/8" per foot against the flow.
C. Open ends of installed pipe shall be covered at the end of each workday to
prevent foreign materials, animals, and people from entering the pipe.
D. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for additional pipe installation
requirements.
3.4.2 Pipe Hangers, Guides, Supports, and Anchors
A. The work to be done by the Contractor shall include, where applicable, the
cutting of holes in existing walls and tunnel sections to allow installation
of piping. The sizes of such holes shall be as specified on the drawings.
B. Support saddles shall be welded to the pipe at all points of contact and
filled with insulation.
C. Where the design and supply of pipe hangers and supports is included in
the work to be done by the Contractor, pipe hangers and supports shall be
in accordance with the requirements of the Power Piping Code,
ANSI B31.1, paragraphs 120 to 121.5 inclusive, the requirements of the
Manufacturers' Standardization Society (MSS), Standard SP-58 and
SP-69. The Contractor shall submit hanger and support details, details of
anchors in existing concrete, additional steel member details and pipe
support reactions on building steel and concrete to the Owner for approval
prior to installation.
D. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for additional pipe hanger,
guides, support and anchor requirements.
3.4.3 Pipe Connections
3.4.3.1 Welded Connections
A. Refer to Section 22 05 00 for welded connection requirements.
3.4.3.2 Socket Welding
A. The assembly of socket welded joints shall meet the requirements
of the Power Piping code, ANSI B31.1. Section 127.3 Preparation
for Welding.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 23 22 13-7
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for additional socket
welding requirements.
3.4.3.3 Butt Welding
A. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for butt welding
requirements.
3.4.4 Flanged Joints
A. Bolting and gasket type, thickness, and material shall be in accordance
with Tables 2.2.1 and 2.2.3.
B. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for flanged joint requirements.
3.4.5 Threaded Joints*
*Threaded joints are not to be used except in vent and drain piping downstream
of isolating valves.
A. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for threaded joint
requirements.
3.4.6 Field Run Piping
A. The general routing for the following piping will be shown on the
specification drawings for reference only unless otherwise stipulated.
Sizes Operating Temperature
2" and below All temperature
B. The supports for the above piping will not be shown on the specification
drawings unless otherwise stipulated.
C. This piping is to be field run by the Contractor (taking thermal expansion
into account). The Contractor shall locate pipe supports where applicable,
shall perform pipe hanger and support design for the aforementioned
piping and shall meet all applicable requirements for pipe hangers and
supports given in this section.
D. Hangers and supports shall be in accordance with ASME B31.1,
paragraphs 120 to 121.5, inclusive.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 23 22 13-8
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
E. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for additional field piping
requirements.
3.4.7 Piping Associated Equipment
A. The Contractor is responsible for supplying and installing all piping
associated equipment as shown on the Specification Drawings, including
any miscellaneous equipment required to provide a complete system as
detailed on the drawings.
B. Equipment that is “Owner Furnished” is limited to that which is defined
within this specification.
3.5 Welding of Pressure Piping
3.5.1 General
A. All pressure welding on steam and condensate lines shall conform to
ANSI B31.1, and the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.
B. Qualification of the welding procedures to be used, and the performance
of the welders and welding operators is required, and shall comply with
the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section
IX except as modified by ANSI B31.1.
C. All welders shall be tested and certified on site in the presence of the
Owner's Representative.
D. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for additional general
requirements.
3.5.2 Welding Process
A. The following limitations shall be observed in these procedures:
1. Preheating/heat treatment shall be in accordance with
Paragraph 131 or Paragraph 132 of ANSI B31.1, Appendix R of
ASME Section VIII, or Clause PW-38 of ASME Section I, as
applicable.
2. Where covered electrodes are used, the first root pass can be made
with E6010. The balance can be made with E7018 hydrogen-type
which shall be properly conditioned prior to their use. Storage and
handling practices shall be in accordance with the electrode
manufacturer's specifications. Details of storage and handling
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 23 22 13-9
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
practices shall be submitted by the company when submitting
welding procedures.
B. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for additional welding joint
requirements.
3.5.3 Performance of Welders
A. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for performance of welder
requirements.
3.5.4 Repair of Welds
A. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for repair of weld
requirements.
3.5.5 Drawings
A. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for drawing requirements.
3.5.6 Welding Procedures
A. Steam and Condensate Piping:
1. First (root) pass shall be made using E6010 electrodes.
2. Remaining fill and cover passes shall be made using E7018
electrodes. Uphill progression shall be used for fill and cover
passes.
B. Socket Welds and Slip-on Flanges:
1. Socket welds and slip-on flanges shall be welded with a minimum
of one pass of E6010 and two cover passes of E7018.
2. All slip-on flanges shall be backwelded to the full pipe wall
thickness.
3.6 Internal Cleaning of Piping
A. After the completion of erection of piping systems, the Contractor shall flush the
system with clean water to clean the inside of piping and remove all loose scale
and foreign material.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 23 22 13-10
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. Large piping, especially steam piping shall be flushed by opening the pipe line’s
drain valves wide open when the hydrostatic testing has been completed.
C. Open ends of all pipes and any other openings shall be covered after each
cleaning operation to ensure that foreign matter and moisture is excluded.
D. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for additional internal cleaning
requirements.
3.7 Pressure Testing
3.7.1 Pressure Testing
A. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for additional pressure test
requirements.
B. After the steam pipe has been approved by the Owner as being acceptable
the Contractor shall perform pressure testing of the erected piping
systems. Blind flanges shall be installed, or the ends of the pipe are to be
capped for the test. Once the test is complete, the blinds or caps are to be
removed, the pipe flushed and the final two (2) welds (each end)
completed. All welds which cannot be hydrotested shall be radiographed.
C. The condensate pipe shall be capped as required to carry out the pressure
test. Once complete, the pipe is to be given an in-service test.
D. Pressure testing shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Power
Piping Code ANSI B31.1 for steam and condensate piping. All pressure
tests shall be witnessed by the Owner’s Field Representative.
E. In addition to the requirements contained in the above, the Contractor shall
be governed by the following requirements:
1. Equipment, other than piping and instrument tubing included in
this specification, shall not be subjected to pressure testing and the
Contractor shall isolate such equipment in an approved manner.
2. Hydro test cannot be carried out against hot valves.
3. All welds which cannot be hydrotested shall be fully radiographed.
F. In preparation for pressure testing of a piping system, the Contractor shall
perform the following (as applicable):
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 23 22 13-11
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1. Disconnect all instruments except those gauges required for
performing the pressure tests.
2. Install additional temporary supports, as directed by the Owner, for
those piping systems, which are designed for handling vapor or
gas.
3. Isolate and/or disconnect all equipment, which is not to be
subjected to pressure testing.
4. Install all temporary piping required to perform the tests.
5. Supply and install pressurizing pump, if required.
G. The test pressure shall be at least one-and-one-half times the design
pressure and the test pressure for each line shall be as specified in the
relevant pipe section.
H. Where pipe connections are either built into walls and partitions and/or are
to be buried, they can be covered in or permanently concealed before the
completion of pressure tests. The Contractor shall be responsible to
uncover, repair, and reconceal any areas where leakage is discovered.
I. After satisfactory completion of pressure tests on a piping system, the
Contractor shall perform the following (as applicable):
1. immediately drain completely the test fluid from the piping system
2. remove all temporary blank flanges, pipe caps, piping, etc., and,
where applicable, restore the affected permanent piping
3. reconnect and/or return to service all instruments
4. remove additional temporary supports
5. reconnect and/or return to service all equipment which was
isolated
3.7.2 Pressure Test Certificates
A. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for pressure test certificate
requirements.
3.7.3 Inspection
A. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for inspection requirements.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 23 22 13-12
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.7.4 Non-Destructive Examination (NDE)
A. Examination shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Power
Piping Code ANSI B31.1 for the piping except as modified herein.
B. All radiographic examination of welding will be done by an independent
testing firm contracted by the Owner.
C. Welds on steam and condensate lines will be subjected to random
radiography. The Owner will specify the location and quantity of
radiographic examination.
D. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner’s inspector for any
examinations to be performed.
3.7.5 Non-Destructive Examination Procedures
A. Refer to Section 22 05 00 Piping – General for non-destructive
examination procedures.
3.7.6 Acceptance Standards for NDE Results
A. The acceptance standards for NDE results shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the Power Piping Code, ANSI B31.1. In the event of a
defect being found, the Owner may order additional NDE under this
contract until he is satisfied as to the integrity of the work.
** END OF SECTION **
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 23 22 13-13
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
PIPE MATERIAL SPECIFICATION - CLASS AACU
CHA Consulting REV.: 1
DATE: Jan-15
PRIMARY RATING: 150 LB SHEET: 1 OF 1
MATERIALS: CARBON STEEL SERVICE: LP STEAM (150 psig / 550 F)
CORR.ALLOWANCE: 0.0625" CONDENSATE (100 psig / 250 F)
MAX. PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE RATINGS PER ASME B16.5 FOR CLASS 150 CARBON STEEL
TEMPERATURE (F) -20 to 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 750
PRESSURE (PSIG) 285 260 230 200 170 140 110 95
SIZE
ITEM FROM TO RATING ENDS DESCRIPTION MAT'L -ASTM CODE
Steam Pipe 1/2" 2" Sch. 80 Plain ERW C.S. A106-B or A53-B
2-1/2" 24" Std. wt. BW ERW C.S. A106-B or A53-B
Condensate Pipe 1/2" 6" Sch. 80 Plain ERW C.S. A106-B or A53-B
Fittings 1/2" 2" 3000 lb SW Forged, ASME B16.11 C.S. A105
2-1/2" 24" Match pipe BW Seamless, ASME B16.9 C.S. A234 - WPB
Unions 1/2" 2" 3000 lb SW Forged, ground joint, integral seats C.S. A105
ASME B16.11
Flanges 1/2" 2" 150 lb SW Forged, R.F.S.W., bore to sch.80 (flat face C.S. A105
to cast iron equip.),ASME B16.5, 125 to 500
micro-inch serrated surface finish
2-1/2" 24" 150 lb BW Forged, W.N.R.F., bore to match pipe, (flat C.S. A105
face to cast iron equip.),ASME B16.5, 125 to
500 micro-inch serrated surface finish
Run Branch
Branch Connections 1/2" - 2" 1/2" - 2" 3000 lb SW Forged, sockolet or straight tee with C.S. A105
reducing insert, ASME B16.11
2-1/2"-24" Equal size Match pipe BW Full size tee (straight tee), ASME B16.9 C.S. A234 - WPB
2-1/2"-24" One size Match pipe BW or SW Reducing tee, ASME B16.9 C.S. A234 - WPB
less
2-1/2"-24" Greater Match pipe BW or SW Weldolet, ASME B16.9 or sockolet, ASME C.S. A234 - WPB or
reduction B16.11 (unless noted otherwise) A105
Flexible Hose 1/2" 2" 150 lb Annular stainless steel, corrugated, single T316 or T321 SS hose
braided, 9" minimum live length, unless w/T304 SS braid
otherwise noted on the drawings
NOTES:
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 23 22 13-14
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
PIPE MATERIAL SPECIFICATION - CLASS AACU
CHA Consulting Inc REV.:1
DATE:Jan 2015
PRIMARY RATING: 150 LB SHEET:2 OF 2
MATERIALS: CARBON STEEL SERVICE:LP STEAM, CONDENSATE
CORR.ALLOWANCE: 0.0625"
MAX. PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE RATINGS PER ASME B16.5 FOR CLASS 150 CARBON STEEL
TEMPERATURE (F) -20 to 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 750
PRESSURE (PSIG) 285 260 230 200 170 140 110 95
GASKETS
FLUID
LP Steam Spiral wound with 304 stainless steel winding material and flexible graphite filler material, 1/8" carbon steel outer centering
Condensate ring. Manufactured to ASME B16.20. Flexitallic Style CG
Feedwater
Chilled Water Flat ring, non-asbestos, compressed sheet gasket material, 1/16" thick. Garlock 5500, Durabla Durlon 5500 Green, or other
gaskets with comparable pressure and temperature ratings, and fluid compatibility.
For flat face flanges use full face gaskets.
ITEM
FROM TO
Bolts 1/2" 1" Stud bolts or heavy hex head bolts to ANSI B18.2.1. Threads to Alloy steel, ASTM A193 Gr. B7
ANSI B1.1 Class 2A, coarse thread series.
1-1/8" Larger Stud bolts or heavy hex head bolts to ANSI B18.2.1. Threads to Alloy steel, ASTM A193 Gr. B7
ANSI B1.1 Class 2A, 8-pitch thread series.
Nuts 1/2" 1" Heavy hexagonal to ANSI B18.2.2. Threads to ANSI B1.1 Class Carbon steel, ASTM A194 Gr 2H
2B coarse thread series
1-1/8" Larger Heavy hexagonal to ANSI B18.2.2. Threads to ANSI B1.1 Class Carbon steel, ASTM A194 Gr 2H
2B 8-pitch thread series
Material DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
FASTENERS
SIZE
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 23 22 13-15
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
VALVE SPECIFICATION - LP STEAM, CONDENSATE (150 lb)
CHA CONSULTING INC. REV.:1
. DATE:Jan 2015
PRIMARY RATING: 150 LB SHEET:1 OF 1
MATERIALS: CARBON STEEL SERVICE:LP STEAM, CONDENSATE
CORR.ALLOWANCE: 0.0625"
MAX. PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE RATINGS PER ASME B16.5 FOR CLASS 150 CARBON STEEL
TEMPERATURE (F) -20 to 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 750
PRESSURE (PSIG) 285 260 230 200 170 140 110 95
VALVES
Valve SIZE
Specification TYPE FROM TO RATING ENDS MATERIAL SEAT BONNET DISC
N/A Ball 1/2" 2" 1500 WOG SW Forged steel A105 or High temp., filled PTFE, Body Type: Three piece, 4-bolt
cast steel A216-WCB firesafe clamp design, 316 SS ball and
trim. Jamesbury 4C 2236MT or
equal.
N/A High Perf. 2-1/2" 24" 150 lb Double Cast steel A216-WCB High performance 316 SS
Butterfly Flanged valve, stainless steel
(Steam) (firesafe), bi-
directionally
deadendable
N/A High Perf. 2-1/2" 24" 150 lb Lugged Cast steel A216-WCB High performance Adjustable 316 SS single piece
Butterfly valve, RTFE seat packing stem
(Cond.) gland
Teflon/SS
packing
seals
N/A Globe 1/2" 2" 600 lb SW Forged steel A105 Integral, stellite faced Bolted Plug, 410 SS, stellite
OS&Y faced or solid stellite,
N/A Globe 2-1/2" 24" 150 lb Flanged Cast steel A216-WCB Renewable, stellite Bolted Swivel type, stellite
faced OS&Y faced
N/A Check 1/2" 2" 600 lb SW Forged steel A105 11-1/2 to 13%Bolted cap Piston, 410 SS,
chrome Stellite faced or solid
stellite
N/A Check 2-1/2" 24" 150 lb Flanged Cast steel A216-WCB 11-1/2 to 13%Bolted cap Swing type, stellite
chrome faced
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 23 25 00
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL..................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Summary ............................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Water Treatment Criteria ..................................................................................... 1
1.3 Approval Process ................................................................................................. 2
2.0 PROCEDURES ............................................................................................................. 2
2.1 Cleaning .............................................................................................................. 2
2.2 Treatment Chemicals ........................................................................................... 3
2.3 Identification ....................................................................................................... 3
2.4 Treatment Equipment .......................................................................................... 4
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 25 00-1
Thermal System Upgrade October 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 23 25 00
Ithaca, New York HVAC WATER TREATMENT
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Summary
A.This Standard applies to the cleaning and treatment of hydronic heating and cooling
systems.
B.Cornell University’s continual approach of protecting its community and the environment
must be adhered to in the application of chemicals pertinent to process water loops. In
addition, University policy dictates that "under no circumstances should chemicals be
disposed of by pouring into sinks or other drains leading to sanitary or storm sewers."
C.The use of automatic glycol make-up systems with direct connection to domestic water is
not allowed. Provide means for manual fill, along with a 55-gallon drum to receive relief
valve discharge.
D.Design specifications shall clearly identify proper execution of water treatment
procedures and testing. No water treatment shall be purchased, delivered or applied
without approval by Cornell Environmental Health and Safety, Facilities Engineering and
the Facilities Management Water Treatment Lab.
1.2 Water Treatment Criteria
A.All chemicals and formulations prescribed for the cleaning and treatment of process water
systems at the University must meet the following specified criteria:
1.They must be ecologically compatible so that any discharge will not create an
environmental impact. All chemicals and formulations must comply with NY State
SPDES (State Pollution Discharge Elimination System) regulations and be free of
compounds listed by the EPA on the Priority Pollutant List as defined by 40 CFR
Part 423 Appendix A.
2.They must be industrial and toxicologically safe to minimize personnel and
equipment exposure to hazardous conditions.
3.Every effort must be made to maintain a sense of uniformity in chemical
formulation to ensure a line of continuity. Deviation from existing formulations
that are applied across the University are not allowed. This relieves the University
of any burden that arises from trying to maintain adequate protection using
numerous treatments.
4.Ethylene Glycol (CAS 107-21-1): This material is considered a hazardous
substance per the 6 NYCRR Part 598. Any release (defined as unauthorized
pumping, pouring, emitting, emptying, overfilling, spilling, leaking, leaching or
disposing, directly or indirectly into the environment) in the amount of 1 pound of
ethylene glycol into the air, land or water must be reported to the New York State
Department of Environmental Conservation. For this reason, Cornell prohibits the
use of ethylene glycol.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 25 00-2
Thermal System Upgrade October 2020
1.3 Approval Process
A.All materials proposed for application must have the prior approval of Environmental
Health and Safety, Facilities Engineering and the Facilities Management Water Treatment
Lab. In order to thoroughly evaluate the products performance, it is recommended that the
following be submitted at the time of proposal:
1.Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for all products that are to be applied, which shall contain
the complete formulation. Further documentation of qualitative composition must
be included if SDS’s do not supply all product(s) components.
2.Product Data Sheets specifying overall product description and application
guidelines.
3.Methods of analysis for determining product residuals. Proposals should specify
specific qualitative and quantitative procedures of evaluating actual product levels.
They should also include recommended parameters for all products, expressed in
either terms of parts per million or milligrams per liter.
4.Expected performance levels of products: this should include expected corrosion
rates, expressed in mils per year. If the product is of a biostatic nature, what levels
of biological growth should be acceptable if the product is applied at recommended
dosages.
5.Provisions should be submitted for the removal for any unused chemicals. In
addition, provisions must be provided for the disposal of all empty containers.
B.The above mentioned criteria will serve as a guide as to the minimum information required
for approval of any chemical treatment applied at Cornell University. No water treatment
shall be purchased, delivered or applied without consideration of the previously
mentioned guidelines.
2.0 PROCEDURES
2.1 Cleaning
A.Cleaning procedures for newly installed systems shall be as follows:
1.Step 1: Adjust all control valves and balancing valves to full open position during
the cleaning and treatment process.
2.Step 2: Fill system and add a general dispersant for iron, mud, silt, and
microbiological matter at a concentration recommended by the chemical
manufacturer. Pay particular attention to the type of material being cleaned. (steel,
copper, aluminum, etc.) Test for concentration. Circulate solution for 4-8 hours or
as specified by the cleaner manufacturer’s recommendations. Flush system until
system water pH and iron levels are consistent with the feed domestic water levels.
Clean strainers and dead end piping legs. Provide test results to the Facilities
Management Water Treatment Lab.
3.Step 3: Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management
Water Treatment Lab before proceeding to chemical treatment.
B.For extensions to existing building systems, the above cleaning procedures shall be
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 25 00-3
Thermal System Upgrade October 2020
followed. Provide temporary piping, valving, and pumping system isolated from the
existing building system as needed to perform cleaning procedures prior to final
connection to the existing building system.
2.2 Treatment Chemicals
A.Chemicals shall not be used to treat chilled water systems connected to the campus chilled
water loop.
B.Chilled water systems connected to the campus chilled water loop shall be cleaned,
inspected, and filled with potable water. Notify The Central Energy Plant (CEP) for
permission to begin circulating water into the campus chilled water loop.
C.Existing Systems – Field verify existing treatment chemical quantities to ensure the
correct quantities are added back to the system following construction.
D.Treatment chemicals for hydronic heating and chilled water cooling systems, not
connected to the campus chilled water loop, shall be as follows:
1.Non-Glycol Systems (non-potable): After cleaning and inspection, immediately
add a molybdate based corrosion inhibitor. Acceptable corrosion inhibitors shall
include a combination of sodium molybdate, sodium hydroxide, tolytriazole and
organic polymers. Test for residual concentrations as follows:
a.Molybdate (M06): 150 ppm (hot water systems)
b.pH: 8.3-9
c.Tolytriazole (TTA): 10-20 ppm
2.Non-Glycol System (potable): Refer to Section 33 10 00 – Water Utilities.
3.Glycol Heating Systems: After cleaning and inspection, drain system then refill
with glycol as specified below.
4.Glycol Cooling Systems: After cleaning and inspection, drain system then refill
with glycol solution at a concentration recommended by the manufacturer, with
nitrate and tolytriazole corrosion inhibitors.
5.The water to be added to glycol solutions shall meet manufacturer’s standards for
quality.
E.Glycol for heating systems shall be specifically formulated to the following specifications:
1.Propylene glycol: 400,000 ppm (40%)
2.Nitrate: 1500 ppm
3.Tolytriazole: 20 ppm
4.Water: Balance
5.Color: Olive Green
6.Preferred Manf/Material: Metro PG#36
F.Arrange for inspection by a representative from the Facilities Management Water
Treatment Lab prior to final acceptance.
2.3 Identification
A.Provide a three-ring binder for each hydronic system treated with chemicals that include
the following information:
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall HVAC WATER TREATMENT 23 25 00-4
Thermal System Upgrade October 2020
1.SDS, product data sheets, chemical type, test points, control limits and system
volume.
2.Direction to drain system to sanitary drain.
B.System volume shall be stenciled on the system expansion tank in a visible location.
2.4 Treatment Equipment
A.Bag filters shall be provided for system volumes exceeding 500 gallons.
B.Bag filters or chemical pot feeders shall be utilized for system volumes below 500 gallons.
END OF SECTION
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WIRE & CABLE (600V OR LESS) 26 05 19-i
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 26 05 19
WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLT OR LESS)
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Scope of Work ........................................................................................................ 1
1.2 Standards ................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................... 1
2.0 PRODUCTS....................................................................................................................... 1
2.1 Low Voltage Power Cables (600 volts or less) ....................................................... 1
2.2 Control Cabling ....................................................................................................... 2
2.3 Instrumentation and Signal Cable ........................................................................... 2
2.4 Thermocouple Cable ............................................................................................... 2
2.5 Direct Burial Cables ................................................................................................ 3
2.6 Wire Connection Devices for Splicing ................................................................... 3
2.7 Terminating Lugs .................................................................................................... 3
2.8 Wire and Cable Labels ............................................................................................ 3
2.9 Fiber Optic Cable Systems ...................................................................................... 4
2.10 Ethernet Cabling ..................................................................................................... 4
3.0 EXECUTION .................................................................................................................... 5
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WIRE & CABLE (600V OR LESS) 26 05 19-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 05 19
Ithaca, New York WIRE & CABLE (600V OR LESS)
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
A. Provide a cable system complete with all materials, including cables, wire,
connectors, lugs and fittings as indicated in the specification or as indicated on the
drawings. All cable and wirings shall be complete with identification tags per
Cornell requirements.
1.2 Standards
A. Furnish cable, wire and wiring accessories listed by Underwritters’ Laboratories
(UL) as meeting National Electrical Code requirements and bearing the UL label
where available for the equipment specified. In addition, the cable type shall have
been submitted to standard tests established or approved by ASTM, ANSI, ICEA
and NEMA.
1.3 Submittals
A. Submit Vendor data for all types and sizes of cables and wires being supplied by the
Contractor. Identify material, construction data, color coding, insulation and jacket
thickness and typical test data.
B. Submit Vendor data for the cable and wire identification tags to be supplied.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Low Voltage Power Cables (600 volts or less)
A. Multi-conductor low voltage power cables when installed in cable tray shall be type
“MC”, Class B stranded copper conductor, 600 Volt rated, XHHW or THHN
conductor insulation, 90˚C conductor temperature, with bare copper ground wire,
binder tape and overall black, flame retardant PVC jacket.
B. Low voltage power cables installed in conduit shall as listed below. A suitable
insulated ground conductor shall be installed adjacent to the phase conductors and
must not be less than 45% of the phase conductor cross sectional area.
THHN/THWN-2 (90°C damp or dry) insulation shall be used in interior
damp or interior dry locations for all sizes.
XHHW-2 (75°C wet or 90°C dry) insulation shall be used for outdoor
feeder and branch circuits, underground street lighting, low voltage
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WIRE & CABLE (600V OR LESS) 26 05 19-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
distribution, and underground building service entrances. XHHW-2 shall
be used in indoor dry or wet locations where needed for additional
insulation abrasion resistance and/or long vertical cable runs as
determined by the Engineer.
C. Conductors shall be annealed copper, 98% conductivity.
D. Minimum size conductor for general wiring shall be #12 AWG stranded copper
conductor. Solid wire is allowed only for wire sizes of 12 AWG and smaller for
special applications.
E. Aluminum conductors are not approved for new installations.
F. Applications involving multiple parallel runs of MC cable per circuit will require
custom oversized MC cable ground conductors to meet NEC requirements and must
be approved by the Facilities Engineering.
2.2 Control Cabling
A. Multi-conductor control cable shall be 600 Volt rated, type “MC” when installed in
cable tray, Class B stranded copper conductor, PVC/nylon insulated, UL type
THHN 90°C, with an overall flame retardant PVC jacket rated at 90˚C and overall
aluminum mylar shield when indicated on the drawings. Conductors shall be color
coded per ICEA S-66-524 Method 1, Table K-2 and shall be number printed.
B. Single conductor control wiring for insulation in conduit shall be of insulation type
THHN for damp and dry locations and XHHW when installed in wet locations.
C. Minimum size conductor for control wiring shall be #14 AWG.
2.3 Instrumentation and Signal Cable
A. Instrumentation and signal cables, shall be 300 Volt rated type “MC” when installed
in cable tray, Class B stranded copper conductor, flame retardant, 105˚C PVC
conductor insulation, color coded, twisted pairs, triplets or quads, with aluminum
mylar shield, stranded tinned copper drain wire and overall PVC jacket rated at
90˚C.
B. Minimum size of instrumentation and signal wiring shall be #18 AWG.
2.4 Thermocouple Cable
A. Thermocouple cables shall be of the type specified on the drawings. Conductors
shall be solid with high temperature insulation complete with aluminum foil/mylar
shield with a minimum #18 AWG stranded tinned copper drain wire and overall
PVC jacket. Conductors shall be ANSI color coded.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WIRE & CABLE (600V OR LESS) 26 05 19-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
2.5 Direct Burial Cables
A. Not used.
2.6 Wire Connection Devices for Splicing
A. Connectors for straight splicing wires #8 AWG and smaller shall be color coded
pre-insulated solderless connectors within a plastic insulating cover having a
temperature rating or 105˚C, 600 VAC.
B. Connectors for wires #6 AWG through #4/0 AWG shall be color coded compression
connectors.
C. Connectors for wires larger than #4/0 AWG shall be color coded compression with
a minimum of two pressure points per conductor.
2.7 Terminating Lugs
A. Lugs for terminating power conductors up to and including #8 AWG shall be color
coded, solderless compression or bolted type, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Lugs for terminating power conductors #6 AWG and larger shall be color coded,
solderless compression type, one-hole for #6 AWG through #4 AWG inclusive, and
two-hole for larger sizes.
C. Lugs for terminating control and switchboard wiring shall be color coded, solderless
compression type with tinned copper ring tongue. Spade type lugs are not permitted
in any control, protection or alarm circuits.
2.8 Wire and Cable Labels
A. Labels shall be non-aging, labels which encircle the cable or wire as applicable.
B. Refer to section 26 05 01 for cable and wire identification requirements.
C. Color coding for branch circuits and feeders shall be as follows:
1. 120/208 Volt, 3 phase, 4 wire system
a. Phase A - Black
b. Phase B - Red
c. Phase C - Blue
d. Neutral - White
e. Grounding Conductor - Green
2. 277/480 Volt, 3 phase, 4 wire system
a. Phase A - Brown
b. Phase B - Orange
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WIRE & CABLE (600V OR LESS) 26 05 19-4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
c. Phase C - Yellow
d. Neutral - Gray
e. Grounding Conductor - Green
3. 120/240 Volt, 1 phase, 3 wire system
a. Phase A - Black
b. Phase B - Red
c. Neutral - White
d. Grounding Conductor - Green
2.9 Fiber Optic Cable Systems
A. Communication cables connecting the switchgear mounted protection relays to the
communication processors in the Protection Panels shall be armoured gel-free fiber
optic with fire retardant PCV jackets. An armoured fiber optic cable shall be run for
each protection relay.
B. The fiber optic cables at the protection panel end shall use a spider breakout kit to
fan-out the individual fibers. Each fiber shall be terminated with an ST connector that
will connect to the SEL-2812FT transceivers at the SEL-2032 communication
processor. Each fiber shall be individually color coded for clear identification. The
armour jacket shall be solidly grounded to the ground bus.
C. Fiber cables at the switchgear end shall terminate to a connector housing via ST
connectors. The connector housing shall be suitably located in a switchgear control
compartment. Ruggedized patch cords shall be run from the connector housing via
the internal panduit trays to each relay transceiver (SEL-2812FR). Velcro strips shall
be used to secure fiber optic patch cords within the panduit trays. Nylon cable ties
shall not be used for securing fiber optic cables inside switchgear or control panels.
D. Contractor personnel shall be certified by Corning or an equivalent supplier for the
installation and testing of fiber optic cabling systems. All terminations shall be
thoroughly tested in accordance with Vendor guidelines.
2.10 Ethernet Cabling
Power meter, relay and other electrical equipment that use Ethernet to communicate shall
be connected using a dedicated CAT5E shielded copper cable. Each CAT5E cable will be
run from the switchgear via rigid conduit to an Ethernet router distribution box located
adjacent to the switchgear. The Ethernet distribution box will be dedicated to an
individual bus group.
The distributed Ethernet routers shall utilize specialized shielded ports to eliminate signal
distortion due to EMI/SW/ESD/RFI transients.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WIRE & CABLE (600V OR LESS) 26 05 19-5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.0 EXECUTION
A. Remove abandoned wire and cable. Patch surfaces as required where removed
cables pass through building finishes. Install pull string in conduits that are intended
to remain for future use when removing abandoned cables.
B. Remove abandoned junction boxes when wire, cable, and conduit is removed.
Install black covers on abandoned boxes not removed.
C. No cables or wires shall be installed in conduits or ducts until the entire installation
is completed and cleaned inside and out. When installing cables, the Contractor
shall exercise due care to prevent damage to cables and raceways; avoid undue
tension, bending and kinks.
D. Only approved cable lubricants, expressly manufactured for this purpose shall be
used.
E. The Contractor shall install conductors in such a manner that the bending radius of
any wire or cable is not less than the minimum recommended by ICEA and/or the
manufacturer. Do not exceed the manufacturer’s recommended values for maximum
pulling tension applied to any cable or wire.
F. All power conductors and cables shall be run full length without splices and shall be
continuous from origin to termination. Where splices are necessary and approved,
they shall be made in approved splice boxes with suitable connectors. All splices
shall be insulated with heat-shrinkable heavy-wall flame-retardant cable sleeves.
G. Cables and conduits shall be directly supported to the building structure and
independent of other piping, mechanical equipment, or ceiling supports. Nylon tie
wraps are not acceptable for cable supports. Nylon tie wraps are acceptable for cable
training and bundling.
H. Thoroughly clean wire ends before connectors or lugs are applied.
I. Jumpers shall be installed inside the various panels as indicated in the cable
termination sheets/drawings.
J. All power conductors in multi-color cables shall be color coded consistently,
distinctly and continuously throughout the work. Color coding tape shall be utilized
and applied at all terminations, junctions, pull boxes and condulet fittings.
K. Each conductor shall be identified with its source panel name and circuit number. If
circuit cables are bundled and tie-wrapped together, the cables may be identified as
a group by panel name and circuit number.
L. Single conductor cables having black insulation for power feeders and sub-feeders
shall be identified by colored tape as to phase connections.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WIRE & CABLE (600V OR LESS) 26 05 19-6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
M. Conductor terminators for all power cables sizes shall result in a connection both
mechanically and electrically secure and approved for the application regarding
dissimilar metals.
N. Control and instrument cables shall be terminated at panels, junction boxes and
individual device enclosures using approved fittings. Conductors shall be
terminated on terminal blocks or left coiled as spares. The shields of instrument
pairs, triads and cables must be connected across all junctions through insulated
terminal blocks as indicated on the wire termination sheets.
O. The Contractor shall install phase and neutral conductors of each branch or feeder
circuit in a single conduit except where paralleling circuits are indicated. Install
paralleling circuits of identical makeup and length as the paralleled circuit, and
terminate conductors at the same location, mechanically and electrically, at both
ends, to ensure equal division of the total current between conductors. Sharing of
neutral conductors for multiple circuits is prohibited.
P. The Contractor shall connect all power wiring to equipment such that phasing shall
be A-B-C-N left to right, top to bottom and front to back, unless otherwise indicated
on the drawings, and permanently identify phasing on the structure of housing
adjacent to bus. Phase identification A-B-C is equivalent to transformer phase
identification X1-X2-X3 and H1-H2-H3.
Q. The Contractor shall connect phase wiring to all 3-phase receptacles to ensure the
same phase rotation in all receptacles with interchangeable plugs.
R. Single conductor power cables shall be installed using non-magnetic connectors,
glands, conduit and clamps.
**END OF SECTION**
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GROUNDING & BONDING SYSTEMS 26 05 26-i
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING & BONDING SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Scope of Work ............................................................................................. 1
1.2 Standards ..................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Submittals ................................................................................................... 1
2.0 PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................... 1
2.1 Grounding and Bonding Conductors, Connectors and Devices .......................... 1
3.0 EXECUTION ........................................................................................................ 1
3.1 Equipment Bonding ...................................................................................... 1
3.2 Electrical System Service Grounding .............................................................. 2
3.3 Grounding Electrodes ................................................................................... 3
3.4 Isolated Ground System ................................................................................ 4
3.5 Installation ................................................................................................... 4
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GROUNDING & BONDING SYSTEMS 26 05 26-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 05 26
Ithaca, New York GROUNDING & BONDING SYSTEMS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
A. Provide grounding and bonding system as specified or indicated on the drawings.
1.2 Standards
A. Ground the electrical system neutrals and bond the non-current carrying parts of
electrical equipment as indicated in the specification or drawings and as a minimum
the grounding and bonding must meet the requirements of the National Electrical
Code.
1.3 Submittals
A. Submit product data for conductors, connectors and devices supplied for use with
the grounding system.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Grounding and Bonding Conductors, Connectors and Devices
A. Provide the grounding and bonding conductors, connectors and devices of the type
specified on the drawings.
B. Ensure that all products conform to the requirements contained in UL 467,
Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Equipment Bonding
A. Static grounding (bonding) of equipment shall be by means of bonding the
equipment to the existing embedded ground grid via loops or ground plates, ground
bus or to the selected steel columns as indicated on the drawings.
B. Bolted connections shall be used on all equipment bonding. A washer shall be used
between the bolt head and terminal lug. Surfaces shall be free from paint, rust, dirt,
grease and corrosion.
C. Holding down bolts or flange bolts shall not be used for bonding connections.
Holes, if not provided, shall be drilled and tapped to suit the grounding bolt.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GROUNDING & BONDING SYSTEMS 26 05 26-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
D. Building structural steel, steel structures, metal water piping systems, gas piping
systems, vessels, tanks and other similar process equipment, which is not in direct
contact with the building steel structures, shall be bonded as noted on the drawing.
E. Do not bond neutral conductors to grounding conductors at locations other than
those specifically allowed by the NEC.
F. Bonding jumpers are required to be used to bond across metal conduit expansion
fittings, and are sized in accordance with NEC.
G. Ground terminals of a lighting protection system shall be bonded to the building or
structure grounding electrode system.
H. For secondary power systems, all metal ducts, trolley or bus enclosures, steel
supports for starters, panels, switches, etc., which are not rigidly secured to, and in
contact with the grounded structural metal frame of a building, or conduit system, or
which are subject to excessive vibration and possible loosened ground contacts,
shall be securely bonded to building steel or to the conduit system by means of a
minimum size of #6 AWG stranded copper jumper in accordance with NEC
requirements.
3.2 Electrical System Service Grounding
A. Service grounding of equipment (grounding) shall be by means of grounding the
equipment to a continuous ground conductor, including all connections from source
of power to the equipment. All grounding shall meet the requirements of the
National Electrical Code.
B. In no case is the equipment grounding conductor required to be larger than the
ungrounded phase conductor.
C. Where UL type "MC" cable is specified, the bare internal copper ground wire shall
be used for service grounding.
D. Service grounding shall be provided for all motors, housing of electrical equipment,
transformers, 480-208/120V transformer neutrals, grounding resistors, distribution
equipment, lighting panel board and other similar equipment as required by the
National Electrical Code and as indicated on the drawings.
E. Main distribution equipment consisting of medium and low voltage transformer,
switchgear and motor control centers, located in electrical rooms, shall be service
grounded by two separate connections from their ground busses as indicated on the
drawings.
F. The neutral conductor of any electrical distribution system shall not be used as an
equipment grounding conductor. System neutrals shall be grounded in accordance
with the National Electrical Code.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GROUNDING & BONDING SYSTEMS 26 05 26-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
G. For service grounding of individual motors, a green color coded insulated grounding
conductor shall be pulled in the motor feeder conduit together with the motor feeder
cables from the power source to the motor, or a ground wire shall be included with a
multi-conductor motor feeder.
H. Where multiple circuits are installed in a single raceway, cable or cable tray, a
single equipment grounding conductor is permitted. The grounding conductor shall
be sized based on the largest circuit overcurrent device per NEC 250.122.
I. For a feeder or branch circuit comprised of paralleled groups of conductors installed
in separate raceways, the equipment grounding conductors in each raceway are
required to be sized based on the rating of the overcurrent protective device
protecting the resulting single circuit in accordance with NEC 250.122.
J. An equipment grounding conductor terminal bus must be installed in panelboard
enclosures where there are wire type equipment grounding conductors in the circuits
entering the enclosures.
3.3 Grounding Electrodes
A. All grounding electrodes at a building or structure must be bonded together and used
as the grounding electrode system.
B. Provide concrete encased electrodes and grounding rings for all new buildings.
C. Do not bury wire, ground ring, pipes or plates in soils with cinders or other corrosive
material.
D. Water pipe, single rod, pipe or plate electrodes shall be supplemented by at least one
additional electrode.
E. Metal building frames can serve as grounding electrodes. The metal building frame
must be in direct contact with the earth for 10 or more feet, with or without concrete
encasement.
F. Concrete footings or concrete foundations of buildings, that are comprised of ½”
minimum steel reinforcing rod of #4 AWG copper wire within the concrete
encasement, with lot less than 20 continuous uninterrupted feet in direct contact with
earth, and where the reinforcing rod or wire is accessible without disturbing the
concrete, can serve as a grounding electrode.
G. Ground ring electrodes must circle the entire building or structure, be a minimum of 2
AWG copper, and be buried a minimum of 30 inches below grade.
H. Rod type electrodes must be at least 8’ in length, a minimum of 5/8” in diameter, and
comprised of copperweld.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GROUNDING & BONDING SYSTEMS 26 05 26-4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
I. Plate electrodes must be buried a minimum of 30 inches deep. Where metal water
pipe electrodes are used, the continuity of the grounding path or bonding connection
to the piping must not depend on water meters, filters or similar equipment.
J. Test the resistance o ground of all grounding electrodes under any of all the following
conditions and submit the results to the Owner:
1. Where new low voltage building services are installed.
2. Where existing low voltage building services are upgraded.
3. Where new or replacement grounding electrodes are installed or newly
connected.
K. The electrode system for the electrical supply to the building has to be bonded to the
ground network of a lighting protection system.
3.4 Isolated Ground System
A. Where indicated on the drawings, a separate isolated grounding system shall be
installed for sensitive electronic equipment such as computers and low level signal
instrumentation and controls.
B. The grounding system shall consist of a separate isolated ground bus, connected by
an insulated conductor to the plant ground grid. No other equipment shall be
connected to this ground.
C. The insulated grounding conductors shall be stranded annealed copper insulated
with heat and moisture resistant polyvinyl chloride compound, type TW 75, 600
Volt rated, color coded green.
3.5 Installation
A. Immediately after installation, the equipment shall be grounded and bonded as
indicated on the grounding layout and detail drawings.
B. Exposed grounding or bonding conductors shall not be routed across sections where
they may be subject to damage or interfere with the movement of equipment or
personnel. In such cases and as required, the conductor may be embedded in the
floor, protected by conduit or copper strap of equivalent size shall be used.
C. Ground and bonding conductors shall be installed in a neat manner and rigidly
supported by clips or straps at intervals not greater than 5 feet.
D. Install conductors of size required by the National Electrical Code unless otherwise
indicated or specified on the drawings.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall GROUNDING & BONDING SYSTEMS 26 05 26-5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
E. Power, control and instrumentation cable shields and/or sheaths shall be grounded in
accordance with instructions contained in the cable schedules or wire termination
sheets.
F. When it is indicated on the drawings that the conduit system serves as the
equipment service grounding, the means and continuity of ground shall be
permanent, effective and maintained throughout. Threaded couplings or double
locknuts and bushings shall be used at all boxes and equipment enclosures,
including lighting fixtures. All flexible conduits shall be properly grounded through
a grounding jumper and the necessary fittings. A separate ground conductor shall
be installed in epoxy coated or PVC coated conduit, or other non-metallic duct runs
and so connected to maintain the ground continuity of the conduit or duct system.
G. Conduit expansion joints, not thoroughly bonded otherwise, shall be provided with
approved bonding jumpers of not less than No. 6 AWG green insulated stranded
copper.
H. A minimum No. 6 AWG green insulated stranded copper ground conductor shall be
run in all cable tray and bonded to each tray section at intervals not exceeding 50 ft.
** END OF SECTION 26 05 26 **
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CONDUIT SYSTEMS 26 05 34-i
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 26 05 34
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Scope of Work ........................................................................................................ 1
1.2 Standards ................................................................................................................. 1
2.0 PRODUCTS....................................................................................................................... 1
2.1 Rigid Steel Conduit (RS) ........................................................................................ 1
2.2 Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC) ..................................................................... 1
2.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) .......................................................................... 2
2.4 Non-Metallic Conduit (PVC) .................................................................................. 2
2.5 Flexible Metal Conduit (Liquid Tight) ................................................................... 2
2.6 Conduit Fittings and Pull Boxes ............................................................................. 2
3.0 EXECUTION .................................................................................................................... 2
3.1 Conduits and Fittings .............................................................................................. 2
3.2 Pull Boxes ............................................................................................................... 4
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CONDUIT SYSTEMS 26 05 34-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 26 05 34
Ithaca, New York CONDUIT SYSTEMS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
A. Provide a complete conduit raceway system as indicated in the specification or as
indicated on the drawings, including required fittings, pull boxes and support
system.
B. Conduit sizes shown on the drawings are the minimum sizes. If necessary,
Contractor shall install larger conduit to meet the conduit fill requirements of Clause
3.1B of this section or the NEC, whichever results in a larger size of the conduit.
1.2 Standards
A. Furnish conduit, boxes and fittings approved by Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) as
meeting National Electrical Code requirements and bearing the UL label where
available for the equipment specified and the area classification.
B. The complete conduit raceway system shall meet the NEC/NFPA requirements for
the area classification
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Rigid Steel Conduit (RS)
A. Conduits located in wet, damp, unheated or areas subject to mechanical damage
shall be rigid steel with threaded fittings. Minimum size shall be 3/4-inch trade size,
except switch legs or control conduits to single instruments or control devices may
be 1/2-inch. Areas up to 6 feet above the finished floor shall be considered subject
to mechanical damage.
B. Conduit installed in corrosive areas shall have a PVC coating unless indicated
otherwise on the drawings.
C. Steel conduit shall be used for low voltage analog and circuits sensitive to EMF.
2.2 Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC)
A. Conduits located in dry, non-corrosive finished or unfinished areas which are not
subject to mechanical damage shall be intermediate metallic conduit. For exterior
use IMC must be encased in concrete.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CONDUIT SYSTEMS 26 05 34-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. Threadless connectors and couplings shall not be used.
2.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
A. EMT shall be used for dry accessible, finished, office areas for building low power
branch circuits, communications and alarm circuits.
B. EMT shall not be used in hazardous locations as defined by ANSI/NFPA 70.
2.4 Non-Metallic Conduit (PVC)
A. PVC conduit shall be used for buried services when indicated on the drawings.
Refer to Section 16403, for details on PVC conduit applications.
2.5 Flexible Metal Conduit (Liquid Tight)
A. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for final connection to equipment which is
subject to vibration, such as motor feeders, lighting transformers and light fixture
pigtails. Flexible conduit shall be PVC coated, moisture and oil proof. A grounding
conductor must be provided in all flexible conduit per Section 26 05 27.
B. Connectors shall be UL listed for use with flexible metal conduit.
C. Limit of 3 feet on length of “Sealtite”.
2.6 Conduit Fittings and Pull Boxes
A. Pull boxes installed in dry finished or unfinished areas shall be general purpose
NEMA 1, with screw on cover. The boxes shall be manufactured of 16 gauge steel,
surface or flush mounted, as required and be complete with a ground screw.
B. When located outdoors or in wet, unfinished areas pull boxes shall be NEMA 3R,
with a gasketed screw on cover.
C. Conduit fittings shall be galvanized malleable iron or PVC, as required to match the
connected conduit system. EMT fittings shall be forged steel.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Conduits and Fittings
A. Conduits shall be field run or installed as shown on the drawings. Minor deviations
in routing to avoid interference will be permitted subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
B. Conduit fill shall be as follows:
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CONDUIT SYSTEMS 26 05 34-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1. 15% cross-sectional area of conduit for branch circuit, control wiring, alarm
systems and other electrical systems.
2. 30% of cross-sectional area of conduit for feeder conduit and motor circuits.
C. Conduits shall be run parallel to and at right angles to the building lines, and as
close as practical to walls, ceiling, columns and beams, to permit maximum uses of
space.
D. In finished areas, conduits shall be concealed in walls and above ceilings. In
unfinished areas, conduits shall be exposed and accessible. Spare conduits shall be
installed where shown.
E. Conduit runs shall be located away from steam or hot process pipe lines or ducts, 5
inches clear (from outside of insulation) where parallel with lines and 3 inches at
crossovers.
F. Conduits shall be securely fastened to permanent structures with suitable fasteners.
Where groups of conduits are run together, they shall be supported on channels or
unistruts or other similar means.
G. The drilling or burning of holes through structural steel for passage of conduits is
strictly prohibited.
H. The use of perforated iron straps or nails will not be permitted.
I. Conduits shall not be fastened to pipe or equipment structural supports.
J. Conduits shall be securely fastened in place within 1 foot of each outlet box, cabinet
or fitting. Spacing of conduit supports shall not exceed the dimensions specified in
the applicable code.
K. Conduits shall be terminated at outlets, boxes or equipment by screwing into a
threaded hub or by double locknuts and bushings.
L. Conduit joints shall be made with approved couplings, with conduit ends butting at
center of coupling. Changes in direction shall be made with an approved hand or
power bender or by use of standard factory made elbows, offsets and conduit
fittings. Minimum radius shall be as permitted by the National Electrical Code for
factory formed elbows.
M. Conduits crossing building expansion joints shall be provided with expansion
couplings complete with bonding straps. Runs longer than 30 feet shall be provided
with expansion joints unless relieved by offsets.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CONDUIT SYSTEMS 26 05 34-4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
N. Welding of conduit, elbows, couplings, fittings or any component of the raceway
system shall not be permitted.
O. For a continuous conduit run, the maximum length and maximum number of
equivalent 90 degree bends shall be as required by the National Electrical Code.
P. Long vertical runs of conduits shall have anchor boxes at intervals required for
proper support of cables.
Q. Drain fittings shall be installed at the low point of vertical runs to prevent collection
of trapped condensation.
R. Floor or wall openings required for conduits shall be opened and sealed, as per
Section 26 05 01 of this Specification, after installation of the conduit by the
Contractor. In general, sleeves are provided where conduits pass through walls,
floors and foundations. The Contractor shall core drill holes where sleeves are
required and have not been provided.
S. Cutouts or holes in equipment for conduit fittings shall be sized to provide an O-ring
seal connection between the fitting and equipment to prevent the passage of dust,
dirt or liquid into the equipment. Caulking is not permitted
T. Conduit stubs in concrete shall be protected from damage during construction and
the openings sealed to prevent the entrance of foreign materials.
U. Connections between conduit and equipment subject to vibration shall be made by
means of explosion-proof flexible braided coupling in Class I Division 1 locations,
or by means of flexible, PVC coated, moisture and oil proof conduit in other
locations. Maximum unsupported length shall be limited to 18 inches.
V. Conduit fittings shall not be used as splice boxes.
W. Insulated bushings shall be used at all ends of conduit except where ground
bushings are required.
X. Conduit bushings, with double locknuts, shall be used for conduits terminating into
metal enclosures.
3.2 Pull Boxes
A. Pull boxes shall be installed, where required, rigidly secured in position by approved
methods independent of conduits entering or leaving.
B. Pull boxes shall be of sufficient dimensions to enable pulling of cables within the
minimum bending radii of cables as allowed by the National Electrical Code
C. Pull boxes shall not be used in lieu of standard conduit fittings and splicing of
cables or wires shall not be allowed in such boxes.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall CONDUIT SYSTEMS 26 05 34-5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
D. Pull boxes shall be used wherever possible to marshal smaller conduits into larger
ones. Wherever possible, use one conduit for marshalling two or more
instrumentation or control cables with branch-off fittings to equipment or devices.
E. Where it is not practical to terminate cables inside the equipment housings, such as
instruments, a cast device box suitably sized shall be used as terminal points.
**END OF SECTION 26 05 34**
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 31 00 00
EARTHWORK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Summary ............................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Quality Assurance .............................................................................................. 2
1.3 Submittals ........................................................................................................... 2
1.4 Project Conditions .............................................................................................. 2
2.0 PRODUCTS....................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Materials ............................................................................................................. 3
3.0 EXECUTION .................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 Clearing and Grubbing ....................................................................................... 4
3.2 Stripping Topsoil ................................................................................................ 5
3.3 Excavating .......................................................................................................... 5
3.4 Rock Excavation ................................................................................................. 6
3.5 Disposing of Waste Material .............................................................................. 6
3.6 Stockpiling Project-Usable Material .................................................................. 7
3.7 Dewatering ......................................................................................................... 7
3.8 Excavation Protection ......................................................................................... 7
3.9 Proofrolling ......................................................................................................... 7
3.10 General ............................................................................................................... 7
3.11 Grading ............................................................................................................... 8
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall EARTHWORK 31 00 00-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 31 00 00
Ithaca, New York EARTHWORK
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Summary
1.1.1 Scope
A. Perform all Earthwork, as shown or specified, including but not limited to
the following:
1. Clearing and grubbing
2. Stripping topsoil
3. Removing fences and similar aboveground elements; removing or
breaking-up walks, pavements and other surfaces not part of
building demolition.
4. Excavating
5. Disposing of waste material
6. Stockpiling reusable material
7. Dewatering
8. Excavation protection
9. Filling and backfilling
10. Grading
11. Stabilizing subgrade
1.1.2 Related Work Specified Under Other Sections
A. Section 02 32 00 - Soil Exploration Data
B. Section 31 41 00 - Excavation Protection
C. Section 31 05 00 - Soils and Aggregates
D. Section 33 00 00 - Drainage
E. Section 33 10 00 - Piped Utilities
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall EARTHWORK 31 00 00-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.2 Quality Assurance
1.2.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
A. For work done on public property, comply with the requirements of
governmental authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3 Submittals
See Section 31 05 00.
1.4 Project Conditions
1.4.1 Existing Conditions
A. The Drawings indicate the physical dimensions, existing levels and
general topography of the site, with subsurface obstructions, existing
underground utilities and similar items being indicated where known.
B. Locations of existing underground utilities and subsurface obstructions are
shown using best information available but with no representation that the
indicated locations are accurate or that lines other than shown may not be
present. Refer to heading "Protection" for details of requirements of
identification and locations of these utilities.
C. All information relative to existing conditions is offered to assist the
Contractor in evaluation of the Work, but with no specific representation,
either expressed or implied, as to completeness or accuracy. The
Contractor shall be responsible for any deductions or conclusions made on
the basis of this information and that of any additional site inspections, if
made.
1.4.2 Protection
A. Maintain in service and protect from damage the existing utilities that are
to remain.
B. Before commencing any site operations, contact all municipal service
departments, service companies and other utilities affected, and arrange to
have the lines that are within the Work Area accurately located and
identified with the appropriate surface markers. Locate and identify lines
adjacent to or extending across the Work Area and mark on record
document drawings.
C. The use of explosives is prohibited.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall EARTHWORK 31 00 00-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
D. Conduct operations to insure safety of persons and to prevent damage to
existing structures, pavements and utilities, trees and other vegetation to
be left in place, construction in progress, and other property. Conduct
operations and move materials to stockpile or disposal areas in a manner
to insure minimum interferences with operations of others, private and
public. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, and other facilities
occupied and used by the Owner outside the contract limit line, or the
public, without prior written permission.
1.4.3 Sequencing, Scheduling
A. Take appropriate measures to prevent incorporation of excessive water
into the soil. Take appropriate measures, such as wetting down, to control
dust and dirt, both windblown and from machine moving operations. Do
not place fill over subgrade that is frozen or that is covered with ice, snow
or water.
B. If any unidentified water conditions are encountered, or if conditions
caused by rain affect these operations or the schedule of the Work, notify
the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will give
directions on the procedure.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
A. Earth: Refer to Section 31 00 00.
1. Local pockets of material that are substantially different in character from
the surrounding soil may be unsatisfactory for use as earth fill under
certain climatic conditions or geological formations. Do not use such
materials without approval of the Engineer.
B. Aggregates: Refer to Section 31 05 00.
C. Topsoil: Refer to Section 31 05 00.
D. Unsuitable Material: Refer to Section 31 05 00.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall EARTHWORK 31 00 00-4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Clearing and Grubbing
3.1.1 General
A. Clear the Site, within the Work Area as indicated or as required for
construction operations. Remove trees, shrubs and other vegetation as
indicated on the drawings.
B. Cut off standing trees and other vegetation at ground surface. Remove
downed timber, logs and other vegetation resting on or partially embedded
in ground surface, brush, weeds, undergrowth, rubbish and other debris.
C. Remove stumps. Remove roots of ¼-inch diameter or larger, organic or
metallic debris embedded in the ground, to a depth of not less than eight
inches below existing ground or finished grade if a grade change is
indicated. Do not use grubbing equipment within the drip line of trees
indicated to remain.
D. Fill depressions resulting from these operations, unless further excavation
or earthwork is indicated. Use earth fill and place in horizontal layers not
to exceed eight inches in loose depth. Compact each layer to density equal
to the adjacent natural soil. Grade the surface to meet adjacent contours
and to provide surface water drainage.
E. For trees left standing, trim all dead branches and trim live branches to
indicated heights and in such manner as to retain natural proportions. Cut
trimmed branches close to the tree trunk or main branch. Seal cut surfaces
with an emulsified asphalt coating specially formulated for horticultural
use.
F. Protect trees left standing against damage, including unnecessary cutting,
breaking or skinning of roots, skinning and bruising of bark, smothering
by stockpiling of materials or parking of vehicles within drip line.
G. Coat all cut or abraded surfaces of branches, trunk or roots with an
emulsified asphalt coating specially formulated for horticultural use.
Temporarily cover all exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent drying out
of roots and provide earth cover as soon as possible.
H. Repair or replace trees left standing that are damaged by Contract
operations, at no additional cost to Owner. Only an established and
approved arborist shall perform tree damage repair.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall EARTHWORK 31 00 00-5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.2 Stripping Topsoil
3.2.1 General
A. Confirm Topography: Prior to stripping operations, confirm the
topography shown on the Contract Documents and state in writing
acceptance of the topography as the basis of conditions prior to this
Contract.
B. Strip surface vegetation such as grass and weeds, including approximately
1 inch of soil. Dispose of as waste material.
C. Strip topsoil, as defined "For Removal" in Section 31 05 00, in areas of
earthwork operations. Strip to depths encountered and, in such manner, to
prevent intermixing with, or removal of, underlying soil or objectionable
materials.
D. Follow the MKW Landscape specifications when stripping topsoil within
the drip edge of trees.
3.3 Excavating
A. The construction methods specified are not intended to be completely detailed.
Perform the Work and provide properly functioning systems per applicable codes,
manufacturer's instructions and best accepted safe work practices.
B. Remove, haul, and dispose of materials and obstructions encountered. Remove
obstructions within the lines of construction, or that would interfere with
construction. Obstructions include metallic, concrete, wooden or masonry debris,
boulders up to 1/2 cubic yard, tree roots and similar items.
C. Excavate to levels required for bottoms of footings, walls, subgrade, underfloor
fills, slabs laid on ground, utilities, storage tanks, and similar items. In all classes
of excavation work, excavate to the extent necessary to provide excavation
protection as specified under heading "Excavation Protection". Provide space to
permit form placing, inspection of work, support system, waterproofing, and other
underground work adjacent to construction. Where so permitted, excavate to the
footing lines; otherwise, allow for form placement and removal.
D. At load-bearing elevations or subgrade, remove unsuitable materials disclosed
below such elevations as defined in Section 31 05 00. Under slabs and paving,
fill the resulting void as specified in Section 31 05 00. Footings and foundations
shall bear on firm soil capable of supporting the loadings. If satisfactory bearing
capacity is not found at the bearing elevations shown, deepen, or enlarge the
excavations as directed by the Engineer. Such excavation, and fill, beyond the
limits shown, when authorized, will be considered as Changes in the Work and
will be paid for by the Owner. However, if excavations are carried beyond the
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall EARTHWORK 31 00 00-6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
limits shown, without authorization, or unsatisfactory conditions occur due to
Contractor's operations, the Contractor shall fill the voids with materials specified
above, at his own expense.
E. Protect active utilities within work areas. Immediately notify the Owner's
Representative of any utilities encountered that are not shown.
F. Store within the contract limit lines if possible, excavated material suitable and
approved for backfill, fill, and rough grading. Remove unsuitable material and
excess suitable material from the Project Site. Provide additional fill material, if
required and if no Owner-furnished borrow area is indicated.
G. Trim, level and clean excavations just prior to placement of subsequent work. If
bottom of continuous footings are at different elevations, step the excavation
where the soil permits, or slope if necessary. Subsequent work shall not be
performed until soil conditions have been approved by the Owners
Representative.
H. Excavate for underground piping systems and utility lines, including civil/site,
mechanical, and electrical systems. Trim trench bottoms to final line and
elevations, excavate for bells and bottom bedding.
3.4 Rock Excavation
A. "Rock" means a natural solid mineral occurring in masses of one-half cubic yard
or more, which cannot be excavated or removed by using standard earth-moving
equipment, such as a 225 horsepower excavator with rock tooth.
B. Rock excavation means removal of rock to the lines and grades shown, including
the removal of overburden when the depth of overburden is less than one foot.
Removal of overburden on rock with a depth of one foot or greater will not be
classified as rock excavation. A tolerance of plus 0.1 feet and minus 0.5 feet will
be allowed for new rock grades.
C. If rock excavations are carried below the elevations shown, or to a depth greater
than directed by the Owner's Representative, maintain the excavation and backfill
to grade with aggregate subbase material at no expense to the Owner.
D. Dispose of excavated rock off-site.
E. Blasting will not be permitted.
3.5 Disposing of Waste Material
A. Remove excess excavated material and all waste material from Owner's property.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall EARTHWORK 31 00 00-7
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.6 Stockpiling Project-Usable Material
A. Haul and stockpile excess excavated material defined as Earth and Project-usable
topsoil, to stockpile areas within the Contract Limit lines if possible.. Segregate
stockpiles of earth and Project-usable topsoil to prevent intermixing and
contamination.
3.7 Dewatering
A. Keep the entire Project Site, within the Work area, free draining at all times.
Arrange site excavation and fill work to avoid obstructing the natural flow of
water away from areas of work. If necessary, provide temporary drainage ditches
filled in when no longer required, temporary curbing removed when no longer
required, or temporary pumping.
B. Provide temporary drainage to keep excavations free from water until the
permanent construction is in place, backfilling is completed, and building drains
are operating and capable of maintaining drainage. Submit proposed method of
dewatering to the Owner's Representative prior to implementation. Provide
pumps, well point systems or other systems as required by the conditions.
Operate pumps and other water moving systems to accomplish the above on a
24-hour basis.
3.8 Excavation Protection
Per Section 31 41 00.
3.9 Proofrolling
A. Proofroll areas to be paved or surfaced. Within these areas, proofroll subgrades
before placing fills, proofroll subgrades of completed cut areas, and proofroll tops
of completed fills.
B. Remove soft or unstable areas disclosed by the proofrolling and fill as specified in
Section 31 05 00. Material removed may be reused if it meets the requirements of
Section 31 05 00 and other applicable requirements.
C. Proofroll with at least one pass of the equipment, with perpendicular passes for
thorough coverage. Use a fully loaded single-axle dump truck. Arrange
observation of the proofrolling by the Testing Agency.
3.10 General
A. Schedule filling and backfilling operations to expedite construction progress and
to maintain positive site drainage. Backfill adjacent to walls only after walls have
attained a minimum strength of 80 percent of design strength and in no case less
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall EARTHWORK 31 00 00-8
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
than seven days after placing of concrete. Backfill after work has been inspected
and approved by the Owner's Representative. Backfill both sides of retaining and
grade walls at the same time. Backfill in a manner to prevent excessive pressure
against or damage, including hydraulic, to adjacent work. Any resultant damage
shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense.
1. In areas designed to have utilities, including sewers, where fill is also
required, place and compact the fill prior to placement of such utilities or
sewers.
B. Spread fill and backfill in uniform horizontal layers, filling holes and low areas
first. Thickness of layers shall be specified in Section 31 05 00.
C. Compact each layer before succeeding layers are placed. Provide compaction
equipment of type best suited to achieve the compaction specified for the type of
soil used. Use particular care to prevent "bulking" of fine granular fill. Terminate
all fills in true planes at correct elevations.
3.10.1 Materials and Compaction
A. The materials to be used and the required compaction for each type of
construction shall be as defined and specified in Section 31 05 00.
3.11 Grading
A. Grade areas to receive fills and backfills to levels indicated, as specified in
Section 31 05 00.
B. Remove unsuitable material, vegetation, rubbish and debris from areas to be
filled.
C. Rough grade landscaped areas, place topsoil as specified in Section 31 05 00 and
smooth-finish grade to required elevations. Finish-grade other areas to the finish
grades, lines and elevations indicated. Finish-grade areas used for temporary
construction facilities when use is terminated.
D. Slope earth away from building walls. Finish grades not otherwise indicated shall
be uniform levels or slopes between given points or between given points and
existing grades. Provide roundings at top and bottom of banks and at other breaks
in grades. Rough grade to within 0.1 foot; finish grade to within 0.05 foot, of
required slopes, grades and elevations.
** END OF SECTION **
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 31 05 00
SOILS AND AGGREGATES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Work Included .................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere .................................................................... 1
1.3 Quality Assurance .............................................................................................. 1
1.4 Submittals ........................................................................................................... 2
2.0 MATERIALS .................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 Material Definitions ........................................................................................... 2
3.0 MATERIAL USE AND COMPACTION ....................................................................... 5
3.1 Definitions .......................................................................................................... 5
3.2 Moisture Content and Tolerance ........................................................................ 5
3.3 Schedule of Material & Compaction Applications ............................................ 5
3.4 Special Material Placement and Compaction Requirements for Buried Pipes .. 7
3.5 Field Quality Control ......................................................................................... 7
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND AGGREGATES 31 05 00-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 31 05 00
Ithaca, New York SOILS AND AGGREGATES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Work Included
A. The intent of this section is to:
1. Define types of soils and aggregates.
2. Specify their uses, including required compaction, for each type of
construction.
3. Establish the quality control procedures to verify compliance with the intent
of the Contract Documents.
B. The provisions of this section apply to all work involving the use of the soils and
aggregates defined, and shall govern except where specifically modified in a section
specifying particular work.
1.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1.2.1 Other Sections of Specifications
A. Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork
B. Section 33 00 00 - Drainage
C. Section 32 00 00 - Bituminous Concrete Paving
D. Section 33 10 00 - Water Utilities
E. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
F. Section 23 22 13 - Steam and Condensate Piping
1.2.2 Reference Specifications
A. NYSDOT, Standard Specifications - Construction and Materials.
1.3 Quality Assurance
A. Sampling and testing of soil and aggregate materials, and of compaction, shall be
done by independent, well established and qualified commercial testing agencies.
The personnel shall be qualified and shall have had experience on projects equal to
the complexity of this project.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND AGGREGATES 31 05 00-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. The Owner will retain a Testing Agency to perform material testing and to prepare
test reports and other submittals. The Owner reserves the right to request change in
personnel or firm at any time.
1.4 Submittals
A. Submit gradation analysis and samples of all fill materials.
B. Submit proposed Contractor-furnished material, including off-site borrow material,
to the Owner-retained Testing Agency for its analysis and report, in sufficient time so
as not to delay the progress of the Work.
C. Each Testing Agency shall submit in duplicate, tests, investigations, findings and
recommendations to the Contractor and to the Architect-Engineer, as soon as each
report has been completed.
D. All tests except those specified under Item A above will be paid by the Owner.
2.0 MATERIALS
2.1 Material Definitions
A. Where the definition refers to NYSDOT sections, the document referenced is the
2019 edition of "Standard Specifications - Construction and Materials" of the New
York State Department of Transportation, Design & Construction Division.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND AGGREGATES 31 05 00-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
TYPE DEFINITION
Sand Pipe Bedding Material Natural granular material (concrete sand, asphalt course base
sand) having the following size characteristics:
Screen Size
3/8-inch
No. 4
No. 8
No. 16
No. 30
No. 50
No. 200
Percent Passing by Weight
100
95-100
80-100
50-85
25-60
10-30
2-10
Grits Pipe Bedding Granular material per NYSDOT Sec. 703, Size 1A, as follows:
Screen Size
½-inch (12.5 mm)
¼-inch (6.3 mm)
1/8-inch (3.2 mm)
No. 200 (75 µm)
Percent Passing by Weight
100
90-100
0-15
0-1
Drainage Stone Granular material per NYSDOT Sec. 703, Size 2, as follows:
Screen Size
1-1/2-inch (37.5 mm)
1-inch (25 mm)
½-inch (12.5 mm)
No. 200 (75 µm)
Percent Passing by Weight
100
90-100
0-15
0-1
Granular Fill (Bank Run
Gravel)
NYSDOT Standard Specification, Sec. 304, Type 1, with the
following gradation:
Screen Size
3-inch (75 mm)
2-inch (50 mm)
¼-inch (6.3 mm)
No. 40 (425 µm)
No. 200 (75 µm)
Percent Passing by Weight
100
90-100
30-65
5-40
0-10
Aggregate Sub-base and
Structural Fill
Granular material per NYSDOT Sec. 304, Type 4, with the
following gradation:
Screen Size
2-inch (50 mm)
¼-inch (6.3 mm)
No. 40 (425 µm)
No. 200 (75 µm)
Percent Passing by Weight
100
30-65
5-40
0-10
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND AGGREGATES 31 05 00-4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
TYPE DEFINITION
Crusher Run Ledgerock
(Aggregate Base)
Screen Size
2-inch
¾-inch
¼-inch
No. 10
No. 40
No. 200
Percent Passing by Weight
100
90-100
45-90
15-45
7-15
0-10
General Fill Natural on-site material free of organic material, loam, trash,
snow, ice and other frozen and deleterious material that is suitable
for compaction and contains not more than 20 percent by weight
passing a No. 200 sieve.
Common Fill Common fill shall consist of natural inorganic soil approved by
the Soils Engineer and meeting the following requirements:
It shall be free of organic or other weak or compressible
materials, or frozen materials, and of stones larger than 6-inch
maximum dimension.
It shall be of such nature and character that it can be
compacted to the specified density in a reasonable length of
time.
It shall be free of highly plastic clays (plasticity index not
higher than 10%) of all materials subject to decay,
decomposition or dissolution, and of cinders or other materials
which will corrode piping or other metal.
Topsoil A surface soil layer containing organic matter such as roots or
humus, and having a weight loss of 5% or more on ignition at 600
deg. C for three hours when compared with the oven dry weight as
determined by ASTM D2216.
Unsuitable Soil Any soil not meeting the requirements of the material definitions
of this section.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND AGGREGATES 31 05 00-5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.0 MATERIAL USE AND COMPACTION
3.1 Definitions
A. Maximum Density: The dry density at optimum moisture content per
ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor).
B In-place Density: The dry density, dry unit weight, or dry unit mass as applicable
per ASTM D1556, D2167, D2922 and D3017, or D2937 as appropriate.
C. Required Compaction: The ratio of in-place density to maximum density,
expressed as a percentage.
D. Compacted: Material at the required compaction or higher.
E. Subgrade: The in-place compacted soil, aggregate, fill or backfill which receives
subsequent construction such as structures overlying courses.
F. Exterior: Any area outside of building wall lines.
G. Interior: Any area within the building wall lines.
3.2 Moisture Content and Tolerance
A. Material to be compacted shall contain the amount of moisture to obtain the required
compaction uniformly throughout its depth. Add moisture to or dry out soils and
aggregates being used so that the soils or aggregates are within two percent, plus or
minus, of the optimum moisture content during compaction.
3.3 Schedule of Material & Compaction Applications
A. When using hand-guided equipment or hand tamping tools, the maximum loose
measure lift shall be four inches in lieu of maximum lifts specified below when using
machine compaction.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND AGGREGATES 31 05 00-6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
Application
Material
Type
Max. Lift Thickness, in
Inches
- Loose Measure for
Machine Compaction
Required
Compaction
(Percent)
Fill
Under roadways, paved
parking areas and steps
Granular Fill
8
95
Under asphalt or brick
walkways
Granular Fill 8 92.5
Behind retaining structures Granular Fill 90
Under landscaped areas Common Fill 8 85
Subgrade
Existing
* Compaction same as
noted for fill or
backfill for same
type of area
Aggregate Sub-base
Bituminous pavement
Crusher Run
Ledgerock
6
95
Concrete Pavement Crusher Run
Ledgerock
6 95
Walks Crusher Run
Ledgerock
6 95
Pipe Embedment
(Haunching & Initial
Backfill)
Pipes, Sanitary and
Storm
Pipe Bedding 6 90
Direct-burial cable and
direct-burial conduit
Sand Pipe
Bedding
6 90
Underdrains Drainage Stone 6 90
Topsoil
Topsoil (Project-
usable)
8
Same as adjacent
natural soil
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND AGGREGATES 31 05 00-7
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.4 Special Material Placement and Compaction Requirements for Buried Pipes
A. Chilled Water Pipes have an external corrosion protection coating. Special care must
be exercised in compacting around the chilled water pipes so that the corrosion
protection coating is not damaged.
B. When placing and densifying material in the pipe’s haunching zone, care must be
taken to ensure that no voids are created. The material’s density level in this zone
dictates the pipe’s load-bearing capacity.
C. When unstable subgrade condition is encountered which will provide inadequate pipe
support, additional trench shall be excavated and refilled with compacted Granular
Fill on roadway stabilization fabric (Section 32 00 00).
D. When compacting over the crown of the steam tunnels, chilled water pipes, utility
pipes and culverts, a minimum of 6 inches of cover must be maintained. Only small
mechanical compactors may be used to compact material in this section of the pipe’s
embedment.
E. When compacting over steam tunnels, chilled water pipes, utility pipes and culverts
with large mechanical compactors, a minimum clearance of 12 inches above the
pipe’s crown must be maintained for pipes 12 inches or less in diameter, and a
minimum clearance of 18 inches above the pipe’s crown for pipes larger than 12-inch
diameter.
3.5 Field Quality Control
A. Refer to "Definitions" Article for the standards for test methods to be used for the
field quality control.
B. The Testing Agency for field quality control of operations shall determine the
compaction of all material placed and shall conduct the following minimum number
of in-place density tests after monitoring the placing and compacting of each lift.
1. One test per lift of fill for each 2,500 square yards.
2. One test per final lift (subgrade) of fill or backfill under paving for each 600
square yards, both after compaction and before base or slab construction.
C. If compaction tests indicate that a layer has not been brought to the required
compaction, re-compact the area, prior to placement of additional material, until the
required compaction is obtained. If the layer has been covered by a subsequent
operation, remove such material before re-compacting the defective layer.
** END OF SECTION **
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 31 41 00
EXCAVATION PROTECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page No.
1.0 GENERAL ..........................................................................................................................1
1.1 Scope ........................................................................................................................1
1.2 Submittals ................................................................................................................1
1.3 Quality Assurance ....................................................................................................2
1.4 Job Conditions .........................................................................................................2
1.5 Existing Utilities ......................................................................................................2
2.0 PRODUCTS........................................................................................................................2
2.1 Materials ..................................................................................................................2
3.0 EXECUTION .....................................................................................................................3
3.1 Shoring .....................................................................................................................3
3.2 Bracing .....................................................................................................................3
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall EXCAVATION PROTECTION 31 41 00-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 31 41 00
Ithaca, New York EXCAVATION PROTECTION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
A. Provide excavation protection as required to support earth banks of all types of
excavation including trenches and to protect existing structures, services and
utilities.
B. Excavation protection shall consist of use of angle of repose of the soil or
providing of a support system.
C. Support system may include, but not be limited to:
1. Bracing
2. Cribbing
3. Sheet piling
4. Shoring
5. Stringers
6. Tie rods or tie backs
7. Tight sheeting
8. Trench jack
9. Trench shield
10. Underpinning
11. Uprights
12. Soldier pile and lagging
1.2 Submittals
A. Layout Drawings: Provide layout drawings for shoring and bracing system and
other data prepared and sealed by a registered Professional Engineer licensed in
the State of New York. System design and calculations must be acceptable to
local authorities having jurisdiction and take into account the following:
1. Depth of cut and type of soil.
2. Water table and variations in its extent while the excavation is open.
3. Anticipated changes in the material due to exposure to air, sun, water and
freezing.
4. Load imposed by structures, equipment, overlying or stored material and
adjacent traffic.
5. Vibration from traffic, equipment, demolition or construction operations.
6. Space allowed for excavations.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall EXCAVATION PROTECTION 31 41 00-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.3 Quality Assurance
A. Regulations: Comply with OSHA and local codes and ordinances of governing
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 Job Conditions
A. Before starting work, check and verify governing dimensions and elevations.
Survey condition of adjoining properties. Take photographs to record any prior
settlement or cracking of structures, pavements, and other improvements. Prepare
a list of such damages, verified by dated photographs, and signed by the
Contractor and others conducting the investigation.
B. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, establishing exact elevations at
fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record
existing elevations. Locate datum level used to establish benchmark elevations
sufficiently distant so as not to be affected by movement resulting from
excavation operations.
C. During excavation, resurvey benchmarks weekly, employing a licensed Land
Surveyor or registered Professional Engineer who is licensed in the State of the
project. Maintain an accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with
original elevations. Promptly notify Engineer if changes in elevation occur, or if
cracks, sags, or other damage is evident.
1.5 Existing Utilities
A. Protect existing active sewer, water, gas, electricity, and other utility services and
structures.
B. Notify municipal agencies and service utility companies having jurisdiction.
Comply with requirements of governing authorities and agencies for protection,
relocation, removal and discontinuing of services, as affected by this work.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
A. General: Provide suitable shoring and bracing materials which will support loads
imposed. Materials need not be new, but should be in serviceable condition.
1. If wood is part of shoring system near existing structures, remove before
placement of backfill.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall EXCAVATION PROTECTION 31 41 00-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Shoring
A. Design and provide support systems of such strength, rigidity and spacing as
required to suit site conditions, and in such quantity as required to maintain the
project schedule.
B. Whenever shoring is required, locate the system to clear permanent construction
and to permit forming and finishing of concrete surfaces. Provide shoring system
adequately anchored and braced to resist earth and hydrostatic pressures.
C. Shoring systems retaining earth on which the support or stability of existing
structures is dependent must be left in place at completion of work.
3.2 Bracing
A. Locate bracing near columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent
work. If necessary to move a brace, install new bracing prior to removal of
original brace.
B. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete
work, except as otherwise acceptable to Engineer.
C. Maintain support system in place until immediately prior to filling or backfilling
operation.
D. Remove sheeting, shoring, and bracing in stages to avoid disturbance to
underlying soils and damage to structures, pavements, facilities and utilities.
E. Repair or replace, as acceptable to Engineer, adjacent work damaged or displaced
through the installation or removal of shoring and bracing work.
** END OF SECTION **
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 32 00 00
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Summary .................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Reference ................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 Submittals ................................................................................................................ 2
2.0 PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 HMA Mixtures ........................................................................................................ 2
2.2 Tack Coat ................................................................................................................. 3
2.3 Asphalt Joint Adhesive ............................................................................................ 3
3.0 EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................... 3
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING 32 00 00-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 00 00
Ithaca, New York BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Summary
A. Asphalt pavements on the main campus are to be surfaced with Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA)
concrete. Paved surfaces in low use areas off-campus may be of oil and stone penetration
for light or medium duty service upon approval by Cornell University’s Department of
Facilities Engineering.
B. Pavement Sections:
1. In general, Heavy Duty HMA Pavements shall be designed for areas where
heavy traffic volumes occur or trucks/mass transit vehicles operate. See
Cornell Standard Detail 1.4.2.
2. Medium Duty HMA Pavements shall be designed where traffic is moderate
and is limited to passenger vehicles. See Cornell Standard Detail 1.4.1.
3. Light Duty HMA Pavement shall be designed in limited circumstances where
no vehicle traffic is expected or in temporary situations when approved by the
University.
4. Pavement can be designed such that a combination of pavement sections are
used in parking facilities where heavy duty is used on travel lanes, and
medium duty is used in parking stalls.
5. All pavements shall be designed with a suitable subbase course.
a. Subbase specified in roadways shall consist of a crushed ledge rock
meeting the requirements of NYSDOT Type 2 Subbase.
b. Pavements in low use areas, or under sidewalks may use subbase
consisting of crushed gravel meeting the requirements of NYSDOT Type
4 Subbase.
c. If the use of millings is specified, the material shall be of consistent
quality and gradation and be less than 2” in size in any dimension. The
use of millings, if permitted, shall be limited to materials from Cornell
projects, and its placement shall be limited to the bottom 3” of the subbase
course it is designed to replace.
1.2 Reference
A. Cornell University has adopted New York State Department of Transportation (NYSDOT)
Standard Specifications Section 402 – Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Pavements. The materials
in the section are also referred to as Superpave Mixes.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING 32 00 00-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1. That NYSDOT Standard Specification current at the time of letting shall be
considered as the applicable version in force for the project.
2. Reference to the “Department” shall refer to Cornell University
1.3 Submittals
A. Contractors shall provide a copy of Job Mix Formula (JMF) from a NYSDOT approved
plant, signed by the Regional Materials Engineer with the date of signature no more than
two years old. Substitutions or cross outs on the signed JMF will not be accepted.
B. Contractors shall provide a Plant Certification for each day’s placement, certifying that all
materials are in accordance with NYSDOT Standards and a total of each mix type delivered
to the jobsite under that contract.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 HMA Mixtures
A. Shall be in accordance with NYSDOT Standard Specification 402-2 Materials with the
following exceptions and notations.
B. Mix Types – The following General Mix Types shall be used on Cornell projects:
1. Asphalt Base Course: 25mm Binder HMA NYSDOT ITEM# 402.257903*
2. Asphalt Binder: 19mm Binder HMA NYSDOT ITEM# 402.197903*
3. Asphalt Top Course: 9.5mm Top HMA NYSDOT ITEM# 402.097203*
*Last digit in Item # refers to NYSDOT Revision #. Provide most current Revision.
4. All mixes shall meet the requirements of NYSDOT Section 402.
C. Performance Graded (PG) Binder
1. Use a PG 64S-22 meeting the requirements of AASHTO M320, Standard
Specification for Performance Graded Asphalt Binder for the production of
Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt mixtures for this project.
2. Use of polyphosphoric acid (PPA) to modify the PG binder properties is
prohibited. This prohibition also applies to the use of PPA as a cross-linking
agent for polymer modification.
3. The mixture designs must be developed in accordance with the criteria
specified in the SUPERPAVE Hot Mix Asphalt items that are appropriate for
an estimated traffic level of <30 Million 80 kN ESALs.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING 32 00 00-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
2.2 Tack Coat
A. Shall be used in accordance with NYSDOT Section 402 and meet the requirements of
Section 407. Refer to Appendix 1 – Basis of Design.
2.3 Asphalt Joint Adhesive
A. Shall be used in accordance with NYSDOT Section 402 and meet the requirements of
NYSDOT Standard Specification Section 418. Refer to Appendix 1 – Basis of Design.
3.0 EXECUTION
Asphalt Mixtures shall be in accordance with NYSDOT Standard Specification 402-3 with the
following exceptions and notations.
A. Cornell will provide Third Party acceptance testing for the pavement density testing by
nuclear density gauge. Contractors are encouraged to have their own trained and certified
technicians to assure quality and to verify Third Party results.
B. Pavement Density will be verified and accepted by the 70 Series Compaction Methods with
all acceptance testing by the Cornell University Third Party Technician. Cornell reserves the
right to take pavement cores to test for density in accordance with this section. Contractors
shall work with the University to assure that the requirements of the section are carried out
with full cooperation of the paving contractor and or subcontractor.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING 32 00 00-4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
APPENDIX 1 – BASIS OF DESIGN
CORNELL UNIVERSITY - HOT MIX ASPHALT & TACK COAT
Notes:
1. Asphalt Items shall meet the current version of the NYSDOT Standard Specifications (NYSDOT
SS), Section 402, based on Letting Date.
2. 25 mm Binder Shall be Standard Base Course.
3. 19 mm Binder Shall be Standard for Binder
4. 9.5 mm Top Shall be Standard Roads and Parking Lots (12.5 mm available as an option)
5. Testing Method shall be by use of Nuclear Gauge with all testing by Owner (Other Methods May be
Specified including 5-Cores, 6-Nuke Gauge/Cores, 7-Nuclear Gauge, 8-Rolling Pattern)
6. QA Method refers to any pay adjustment factor (not applicable = 0)
* Revision # Refers to Latest Version of the NYSDOT Standard Specifications, Currently Revision
03 (Projects Let after Jan 2018)
Asphalt Joint Adhesives
Asphalt Pavement Joint Adhesive shall be used on all transverse and longitudinal joints for Top
Course in accordance with NYSDOT SS Item # 418.7603
Tack Coat
Tack Coat shall be used as outlined below and be in accordance with NYSDOT SS (Latest Editions)
Section 407.
Tack Coat shall be placed between lifts of newly hot mix asphalt, on milled surfaces.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING 32 00 00-5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
APPENDIX 1 – BASIS OF DESIGN
CORNELL UNIVERSITY - HOT MIX ASPHALT & TACK COAT
SPECIAL NOTE PG BINDER AND MIX DESIGN LEVEL
PG Binder
Use a PG 64S-22 meeting the requirements of AASHTO M320, Standard Specification for
Performance Graded Asphalt Binder for the production of Superpave Hot Mix Asphalt mixtures for
this project.
Use of polyphosphoric acid (PPA) to modify the PG binder properties is prohibited. This prohibition
also applies to the use of PPA as a cross-linking agent for polymer modification.
The mixture designs must be developed in accordance with the criteria specified in the SUPERPAVE
Hot Mix Asphalt items that are appropriate for an estimated traffic level of <30 Million 80 kN
ESALs.
***END OF SECTION***
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 32 91 00
SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Scope and Purpose ................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Related Sections ...................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Summary .................................................................................................................. 1
1.4 Related Documents and References ........................................................................ 1
1.5 Definitions ............................................................................................................... 2
1.6 Submittals ................................................................................................................ 3
1.7 Observation of the Work ......................................................................................... 5
1.8 Pre-Construction Conference .................................................................................. 5
1.9 Quality Assurance.................................................................................................... 6
1.10 Site Conditions ........................................................................................................ 7
2.0 PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................................... 7
2.1 Imported Topsoil ..................................................................................................... 7
2.2 Compost ................................................................................................................... 8
2.3 Dry Screened Sand .................................................................................................. 9
2.4 Fertilizer, Lime, and other Amendments ................................................................. 9
2.5 Existing Soil (Acceptable for planting with minimum modifications) ................. 10
2.6 Modified Existing Soil (Soil Suitable for Planting with Indicated Modification) 10
2.7 Planting Soil Mixes ............................................................................................... 14
2.8 CU Structural Soil Mix .......................................................................................... 14
2.9 Horticultural Fill .................................................................................................... 18
3.0 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................... 19
3.1 Site Examination.................................................................................................... 19
3.2 Coordination with Project Work............................................................................ 19
3.3 Delivery, Storage, and Handling ........................................................................... 19
3.4 Grade and Elevation Control ................................................................................. 20
3.5 Site Preparation...................................................................................................... 20
3.6 Planting Soil and Planting Soil Mix Installation ................................................... 21
3.7 Over-compaction Reduction .................................................................................. 22
3.8 Fine Grading .......................................................................................................... 22
3.9 Clean-up................................................................................................................. 22
3.10 Planting Soil and Modify Existing Soil Protection ............................................... 23
3.11 Protection During Construction ............................................................................. 23
3.12 Final Acceptance/Soil Settlement .......................................................................... 24
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 91 00
Ithaca, New York SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope and Purpose
A. “Landscaping” includes soil preparation for plantings, plantings of all materials from
grasses and groundcover to large trees, and associated activities.
1.2 Related Sections
A. General Conditions and Requirements include standards for existing plant and root
protection, erosion and sediment control, and restoration of disturbed sites.
1.3 Summary
A. The scope of work in this section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Locate, purchase, deliver and install Imported Planting Soil and soil
amendments.
2. Harvest and stockpile existing site soils suitable for Planting Soil.
3. Modify existing stockpiled site soil.
4. Modify existing site soil in place for use as Planting Soil.
5. Install existing or modified existing soil for use as Planting Soil.
6. De-compact soils.
7. Inspect and test subgrade for percolation.
8. Fine grade Planting Soil.
9. Install Compost into Planting Soil, if needed, as specified.
10. Utilize Cornell Structural Soil.
11. Utilize Horticultural Fill.
12. Test soils using Cornell Soil Health Lab or approved equivalent.
1.4 Related Documents and References
A. Related Cornell Standard Documents:
1. Section 329200 – Turf and Grasses
2. Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork
B. Referenced Standards to be incorporated into the project specification.
1. U.S. Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation Service,
2003. National Soil Survey Handbook, title 430-VI. Available online.
2. US Composting Council www.compostingcouncil.org
3. Methods of Soil Analysis, as published by the Soil Science Society of
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
America (http://www.soils.org/).
1.5 Definitions
These items are defined here and also further in this standard.
A. Acceptable drainage: to be determined by Owner’s Representative. Drainage rate
will be based on soil type, subgrade, and plants to be grown.
B. Airspade: A supersonic air tool utilized to decompact and/or invigorate soils.
C. Amendment: material added to Topsoil to produce Planting Soil Mix. Amendments
are classified as general soil amendments, fertilizers, and compost.
D. Compacted soil: soil where the density of the soil is greater that the threshold for
root growth.
E. Compost: well decomposed stable organic material as defined by the US
Composting Council.
F. Drainage: The rate at which soil water moves through the soil transitioning the soil
from saturated condition to field capacity. Most often expressed as saturated
hydraulic conductivity (Ksat; units are inches per hour).
G. Existing Soil: Mineral soil existing at the locations of proposed planting after the
majority of the construction within and around the planting site is completed and just
prior to the start of work to prepare the planting area for soil modification and/or
planting.
H. Fertilizer: amendment used for the purpose of adjusting soil nutrient composition
and balance.
I. Fine grading: The final grading of the soil to achieve exact contours and positive
drainage, often accomplished by hand rakes, drag rakes or other suitable devices.
J. Finished grade: surface or elevation of Planting Soil after final grading and 12
months of settlement of the soil.
K. Graded soil: Soil where the A horizon has been stripped and relocated or re-spread;
cuts and fills deeper than 12 inches.
L. Installed soil: Planting soil and existing site soil that is spread and or graded to form
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
a planting soil.
M. Minor disturbance: Minor grading as part of agricultural work that only adjusts the
A horizon soil, minor surface compaction in the top 6 inches of the soil, applications
of fertilizers, installation of utility pipes smaller than 18 inches in diameter thru the
soil zone.
N. Planting Soil: Topsoil, or Planting Soil Mixes which are imported or existing at the
site, or made from components that exist at the site, or are imported to the site.
O. Scarify: Loosening and roughening the surface of soil and sub soil prior to adding
additional soil on top.
P. Scoop and Dump: Deep loosening of the soil with the addition a specified amount
of compost to the depths specified by using a backhoe.
Q. Soil Ripping: Loosening the soil by dragging a ripping shank or chisel through the
soil to the depths and spacing specified.
R. Soil Tilling: Loosening the surface of the soil to the depths specified with a rotary
tine tilling machine, roto tiller, or spade tiller.
S. Soil trenching: Cutting narrow trenches thru the soil at the depths and spacing
specified to loosen the soil profile.
T. Subgrade: surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or
top surface of a fill or backfill, before placing Planting Soil.
U. Topsoil: naturally produced and harvested soil from the A horizon or upper layers or
the soil.
V. Undisturbed soil: Soils with the original A horizon intact that have not been graded
or compacted. Soils that have been farmed, subjected to fire, or logged but not graded
and natural forested land will be considered as undisturbed.
1.6 Submittals
A. Product data and certificates: For each type of manufactured product, submit data
and certificates that the product meets the specification requirements, signed by the
product manufacturer, and complying with the following:
1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s or supplier’s product data and
literature or certified analysis for standard products and bulk materials,
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
complying with testing requirements and referenced standards.
2. Products: Products include Imported Topsoil; Compost; Coarse Sand;
Fertilizer, Biological, and Other Amendments; Existing Soil; and Modified
Existing Soil.
B. Samples: Submit samples of each product and material to the Owner’s
Representative for approval. Label samples to indicate product, characteristics, and
locations where product will be used on the site. Samples will be reviewed for
appearance only.
1. Submit samples a minimum of 8 weeks prior to the anticipated date of the
start of soil installation.
2. Samples of all Topsoil, Sand, Compost and Planting Soil shall be submitted
at the same time as the particle size and physical analysis of that material.
C. For planting areas greater than 2500 square feet, provide soil testing for Imported
Topsoil, Existing Topsoil, and existing site soil to be modified for Planting Soil and
Planting Soil Mixes.
1. Topsoil, existing site soil and Planting Soil Mix testing: Submit soil test
analysis report for each sample of Topsoil, existing site soil and Planting
Soil from an approved soil-testing laboratory to show physical, biological
and chemical soil conditions( Cornell Soil Health Test or equivalent) and
where indicated in Part 2 of the specification as follows:
a. Submit Topsoil, Planting Soil, Compost, and Coarse Sand
for testing at least 8 weeks before scheduled installation of
Planting Soil Mixes. Submit Planting Soil Mix test no more
than 2 weeks after the approval of the Topsoil, Compost
and Sand. Do not submit Planting Soil Mixes to the testing
laboratory for testing until all Topsoil, Compost and Sand
have been approved.
b. If tests fail to meet the specifications, obtain other sources
of material, retest and resubmit until accepted by the
Owner’s Representative.
c. All soil testing will be at the expense of the Contractor.
2. Provide a particle size analysis (percentage dry weight) and USDA soil
texture analysis. Soil testing of Planting Soil Mixes shall also include
USDA gradation (percentage) of gravel, sand, silt and clay. Conduct an
aggregate stability test.
3. Provide the following other soil properties:
a. pH and buffer pH.
b. Percent organic content by oven dried weight.
c. Nutrient levels by parts per million including:
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
phosphorus, potassium, magnesium, manganese, iron,
zinc and calcium. Nutrient test shall include the testing
laboratory recommendations for supplemental additions
to the soil for optimum growth of the plantings specified.
d. Soluble salt by electrical conductivity of a 1:2 soil water
sample measured in Milliohm per cm.
e. Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC).
1.7 Observation of the Work
A. The Owner’s Representative may observe the work at any time and may remove
samples of materials for conformity to specifications. Rejected materials shall be
immediately removed from the site and replaced at the Contractor's expense. The
Contractor shall pay the cost of testing materials not meeting specifications.
1. The Owner’s Representative may utilize the Contractor’s penetrometer and
moisture meter at any time to check soil compaction and moisture.
B. The Owner’s Representative will be informed of the progress of the work so the
work may be observed at the following key times in the construction process.
Provide seven days’ notice of the key activity dates listed. Failure of the Owner’s
Representative to make field observations shall not relieve the Contractor from
meeting all the requirements of this specification.
1. Existing Soil Condition: Prior to the start of any soil modification that will
utilize or modify the existing soil.
2. Excavation: Observe each area of excavation prior to the installation of any
Planting Soil.
3. Drain Line Installation: Upon completion of the installation of drain lines
and prior to the installation of any Planting Soil.
4. Completion of Soil Modifications: Upon completion of all soil
modification and installation of planting soil.
5. Completion of Fine Grading and Surface Soil Modification: Upon
completion of all surface soil modifications and fine grading but prior to
the installation of shrubs, ground covers, or lawns.
1.8 Pre-Construction Conference
A. Schedule a pre-construction meeting specifically for the work of this Section with
the Owner’s Representative at least seven (7) days before beginning work to review
any questions the Contractor may have regarding the work, administrative
procedures during construction and integration scope into project work schedule.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.9 Quality Assurance
A. Installer Qualifications: The installer shall be a firm having at least 5 years of
experience of a scope similar to that required for the work, including the preparation,
mixing and installation of soil mixes to support planting.
1. The installer’s crew shall be experienced in the installation of Planting
Soil, plantings, and irrigation (where applicable) and interpretation of
planting plans, soil installation plans, and irrigation plans (where
applicable).
B. Soil testing laboratory qualifications: Cornell Soil Health Testing Laboratory or an
approved equal independent laboratory, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in USDA agricultural soil testing,
Planting Soil Mixes, and the types of tests to be performed. Geotechnical engineering
testing labs without planting soil expertise shall not be used.
C. Soil compaction testing: following installation or modification of soil, test soil
compaction with a penetrometer.
1. The following are threshold levels of compaction as determined by each
method.
a. Acceptable Compaction: Good rooting anticipated, but
increasing settlement expected as compaction is reduced
and/or in soil with a high organic matter content.
1.) Penetration Resistance Method – about 75-200 psi, below 75
psi soil becomes increasingly unstable and will settle
excessively.
b. Root limiting Compaction: Root growth is limited with
fewer, shorter and slower growing roots.
1.) Penetration Resistance Method – about 200-300 psi.
c. Excessive Compaction: Roots not likely to grow but can
penetrate soil when soil is above field capacity.
1.) Penetration Resistance Method – Approximately above 300 psi
2. Maintain at the site at all times a soil cone penetrometer with pressure dial
and a soil moisture meter to check soil compaction and soil moisture.
3. Prior to testing the soil with the penetrometer check the soil moisture and
penetrometer readings in the mockup soils. Penetrometer readings are
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-7
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
impacted by soil moisture and excessively wet or dry soils will read
significantly lower or higher than soils at optimum moisture.
1.10 Site Conditions
A. Review and inspect all surface and subsurface conditions; notify the Owner’s
Representative, in writing, of any circumstances that would negatively impact the
health of plantings. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Imported Topsoil
A. Imported Topsoil definition: Fertile, friable soil containing less than 5% total volume
of the combination of subsoil, refuse, roots larger than 1 inch diameter, heavy, sticky
or stiff clay, stones larger than 2 inches in diameter, noxious weed seeds, sticks,
brush, litter, or any substances deleterious to plant growth. The percent (percentage)
of the above objects shall be controlled by source selection not by screening the soil.
Topsoil shall be suitable for the germination of seeds and the support of vegetative
growth. Imported Topsoil shall not contain weed seeds in quantities that cause
noticeable weed infestations in the final planting beds. Imported Topsoil shall meet
the following physical and chemical criteria:
1. Soil texture: USDA loam, sandy clay loam or sandy loam with clay content
between 15 and 25% and a combined clay/silt content of no more than
55%.
2. pH value shall be between 5.5 and 8.0.
3. Percent organic matter (OM): 3.0-5.0%, by dry weight.
4. Soluble salt level: Less than 1.5 mmho/cm.
5. Soil chemistry suitable for growing the plants specified.
B. Imported Topsoil shall be a harvested soil from fields or development sites. The
organic content and particle size distribution should be the result of natural soil
formation. The Owner’s Representative will review any process required to add
organic materials to meet the specification.
C. Imported Topsoil for Planting Soil shall NOT have been screened and shall retain
soil peds or clods larger than 2 inches in diameter throughout the stockpile after
harvesting.
D. Stockpiled Existing Topsoil at the site meeting the above criteria may be acceptable.
E. Provide a two-gallon sample from each Imported Topsoil source with required soil
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-8
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
testing results. The sample shall be a mixture of the random samples taken around
the source stockpile or field. The soil sample shall be delivered with soil peds intact
that represent the size and quantity of expected peds in the final delivered soil.
2.2 Compost
A. Compost for amending planting media shall be a stable, humus-like material
produced from the aerobic decomposition and curing of organic biosolids residues.
The compost shall be a dark brown to black color and be capable of supporting plant
growth with appropriate management practices in conjunction with addition of
fertilizer and other amendments as applicable, with no visible free water or dust, with
no unpleasant odor, and meeting the following criteria as reported by laboratory
tests.
1. The ratio of carbon to nitrogen shall be in the range of 10:1 to 25:1.
2. Stability shall be assessed by either a CO2 evolution test, a re-heating test,
or the Solvita procedure. Protocols for each are specified by the coalition
of Northeastern Governors Source Reduction Task Force (CONEG) in
their 1966 report, "Model Procurement Specifications for Source Separated
Compost." and the Solvita manual (version 3.5). For the CO2 test, the
compost respiration shall be no more than 6 mg C02- C/gBVS day. For re-
heating using the Dewar self-heating test, the maximum heat rise shall be
no greater than 9 degree C above room temperature (20 to 25 degrees C).
For the Solvita test, the compost must achieve a maturity index of 6 or
more. Woods End Research Laboratory, Mt. Vernon, Maine, or approved
equal shall conduct stability tests.
3. Pathogens/Metals/Vector Attraction reduction shall meet 40 CFR Part 503
rule, Table 3, page 9392, Vol. 58 No. 32.
4. Organic Content shall be at least 40 percent (dry weight). One hundred
percent of the material shall pass a 1.0-inch screen. Debris such as metal,
glass, plastic, wood (other than residual chips), asphalt or masonry shall
not be visible and shall not exceed one percent dry weight. Organic content
shall be determined by weight loss on ignition for particles passing a
number 10 sieve as follows. A 50-cc sub-sample of the screened and mixed
compost is ground to pass the number 60 sieve. Two to three grams
(0.001g) of ground sample, dried to a constant weight at 105 degrees C is
placed into a muffle furnace. The temperature is slowly raised (SC/minute)
to 450C and maintained for three hours. The sample is removed to an oven
to equilibrate at 105C and the weight is taken. Organic matter is calculated
as loss on ignition.
5. pH: The pH shall be between 5.5 to 8.0 as determined from a 1:1 soil-
distilled water suspension using a glass electrode pH meter American
Society of Agronomy Methods of Soil Analysis, Part 2, 1986.
6. Salinity: Electrical conductivity of a one to two soil to waterratio extract
shall not exceed 4.0 mmhos/cm (dS/m) for use in blending.
7. The compost shall be screened to 1.0 inch maximum particle size and shall
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-9
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
contain not more that 3 percent material finer than 0.002mm as determined
by hydrometer test on ashed material.
8. Nutrient content shall be determined by the Cornell University Soil Testing
Laboratory or equivalent laboratory and utilized to evaluate soil required
amendments for the mixed soils. Chemical analysis shall be undertaken for
Nitrate Nitrogen, Ammonium Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium, Calcium,
Aluminum, Magnesium, Iron, Manganese, Lead, Soluble Salts, Cation
Exchange Capacity, soil reaction (pH), and buffer p
2.3 Dry Screened Sand
A. Dry Screened Sand: Sand for amending loam shall be uniformly graded coarse sand
consisting of clean, inert, rounded grains of quartz or other durable rock free from
loam or clay, surface coatings, mica, and other deleterious materials with the
following gradation for material passing a Number 10 Sieve for washed sieving.
% Passing % Passing
U.S. Sieve Size No. Minimum Maximum
10 1001885 90
35 40 60
60 12 18
140 0 5
270 0 3
0.002 mm 0 1
B. pH shall be lower than 7.0.
2.4 Fertilizer, Lime, and other Amendments
A. As recommended by Cornell Soil Health Test.
B. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent
calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows:
1. Class: Class T, with a minimum 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-
mm) sieve and a minimum 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm)
sieve.
C. Provide manufacturer’s literature and material certification that the product meets
the requirements.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-10
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
2.5 Existing Soil (Acceptable for planting with minimum modifications)
A. General definition of existing soil: Surface soil in the areas designated on the soils
plan as existing soil, that is not altered, compacted to root limiting density, graded
or contaminated before or during the construction process and considered acceptable
for planting and long term health of the plants specified either as it exists or with
only minor modification.
1. Soil in the designated areas shall be suitable at the beginning of planting
bed preparation work in that area. In the event that the work of this project
construction has damaged the existing soil in areas designated for use as
Planting Soil to the point where the soil is no longer suitable to support the
plants specified, the Owner’s Representative may require modification of
the damaged soil up to and including removal and replacement with soil of
equal quality to the soil that existed prior to construction. Examples of
damage include further compaction, contamination, grading, creation of
hardpan or drainage problems, and loss of the O, and or A horizon.
2. Soil testing results and soil observation notes that describe the pre-
construction soil conditions in the existing soil areas are included as an
appendix to this specification:
B. Protect existing soil from compaction, contamination, and degradation during the
construction process.
C. Unless otherwise instructed, remove all existing plants, root thatch, and non-soil
debris from the surface of the soil using equipment that does not increase compaction
of soil to root limiting levels.
D. Modifications:
1. Remove existing turf thatch, ground cover plants and weeds.
2. Provide pre-emergent weed control if indicated.
3. Make chemical adjustment as recommended by the soil test.
4. When results of soil tests recommend chemical adjustments, till surface
soil to six inches or greater after chemical adjustments have been are
applied.
2.6 Modified Existing Soil (Soil Suitable for Planting with Indicated Modification)
A. General definition: Surface soil in the areas designated on the soils plan as Modified
Existing Soil has been altered and or graded before or during the construction process
but is still considered acceptable for planting and long term health of the plants
specified with the proposed modifications. Modifications respond to the soil
problems expected or encountered.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-11
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1. Soil in the designated areas shall be suitable for the specified modification
at the beginning of planting bed preparation work in that area. In the event
that the work of this project construction has damaged the existing soil in
areas designated for modification to the point where the soil is no longer
suitable to support the plants specified with the specified modification, the
Owner’s Representative may require further modification of the damaged
soil up to and including removal and replacement with soil of equal quality
to the soil that would have resulted from the modification. Damage may
include further compaction, contamination, grading, creation of hardpan or
drainage problem, and loss of the O, and or A horizon.
2. General requirements for all soil modifications:
a. Take soil samples, test for chemical properties, and make
appropriate adjustments.
b. Unless otherwise instructed, remove all existing plants, root
thatch, and non- soil debris from the surface of the soil using
equipment that does not add to the compaction in the soil.
c. Complete all soil grading, tilling, and loosening at times when
the soil moisture is below field capacity. Allow soil to drain for
at least two days after any rain event more than 1 inch in 24 hours
or long enough so that the soil does not make the hand muddy
when squeezed.
d. Provide pre-emergent weed control after the soil work is
complete and plants planted but prior to adding mulch to the
surface, if indicated by weed type and degree of threat.
B. Modified Existing Soil – soil removed, stockpiled, and spread
1. Description of condition to be modified: Existing soil that is suitable for
reuse as Planting Soil but is in the wrong place or elevation, or cannot be
adequately protected during construction. Soil is to be harvested,
stockpiled and re-spread with or without further modifications as indicated.
2. Modifications:
a. Excavate existing soil from the areas and to depths
designated on the drawings. Stockpile in zones noted on the
drawings or in areas approved by the Cornell Project
Manager.
b. Excavate soil using equipment and methods to preserve the
clumps and peds in the soil. Generally, this means using the
largest piece of equipment that is practical for the project size
and scope.
c. Protect stockpiles from erosion by lightly compacting or
tracking the soil surface, covering with breathable fabric or
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-12
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
planting with annual grasses as appropriate for the season,
location, and length of expected time of storage.
d. Re-spread soil as required in Part 3 of this standard.
C. Modified Existing Soil – Compacted Surface Soil (Tilling Option)
1. Description of condition to be modified: Surface soil compaction to a
maximum of 6 inches deep from traffic or light grading. Original A
horizon may be previously removed or graded but lower profile intact with
acceptable compaction levels and limited grading. The soil organic matter,
pH and chemistry in the A horizon may not be suitable for the proposed
plants and may need to be modified as required.
2. Modifications:
a. Decompact a minimum 6 inches of the soil surface, with a
roto tiller, spade tiller, ripper, agricultural plow, or method
approved by Owner’s Representative. Spread 2 - 3 inches of
Compost on the surface of the tilled soil and make any
chemical adjustment as recommended by the soil test.
b. Till or disk the Compost into the loosened soil. Smooth out
grades with a drag rake or drag slip.
D. Modified Existing Soil – Compacted Subsoil
1. Description of condition to be modified: Deep soil compaction the result of
previous grading, filling and dynamic or static compaction forces. Original
A horizon likely removed or buried. The soil organic matter, pH and
chemistry in the A horizon is likely not suitable for the proposed plants and
should be modified as required.
2. Soil Ripping (for lawn areas):
a. After critical root zone protection has occurred, grade and
remove all plants and debris from the surface. Using a
tracked dozer or similar large grading equipment, loosen the
soil by dragging a ripping shank or chisel through the soil to
depths of 24 inches with ripping shanks spaced 18 inches or
less apart in two directions. The number of shanks per pull is
dependent on the degree of soil compaction and the size of
the dozer.
3. Scoop and Dump (for planting beds):
a. After critical root zone protection has occurred, grade and
remove all plants and debris from the surface. Spread 4 – 6
inches of Compost over the surface of the soil. Loosen the
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-13
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
soil to depth of 18 - 24 inches, using a backhoe to dig into
the soil through the Compost. Lift and then drop the loosened
soil immediately back into the hole. The bucket then moves to
the adjacent soil and repeats the process until the entire area
indicated has been loosened.
4. Following soil ripping or fracturing the average penetration resistance
should be less than 200 psi to the depth of the ripping or fracturing.
E. Modified existing soil for lawn areas – Low Organic Matter
1. Description of condition to be modified: Low soil organic matter and/or
missing A horizon but soil is not compacted except for some minor surface
compaction. The soil organic matter, pH and/or chemistry are likely not
suitable for the proposed plants and should be modified as required.
2. Modifications:
a. Spread 3 - 4 inches of Compost over the surface of the soil
and make chemical adjustment as recommended by the soil
test.
b. Till compost into the top 6 inches of the soil.
F. Modified existing soil – soil within the root zone of existing established trees
1. Description of condition to be modified: Surface compaction near or above
root limiting levels greater than 200 psi.
2. Modifications:
a. Remove sod with a walk behind sod cutter.
b. Use a pneumatic excavation tool such as an air spade or air
knife to loosen the top 9 – 12 inches of the soil. Surface roots
may move and separate from soil during this process but the
bark on roots should not be broken.
c. Make adjustment as recommended by the soil test and add 2
- 3 inches of Compost over the soil.
d. Using the pneumatic air knife, mix the Compost into the top 6
– 8 inches of the loosened soil.
e. Work in sections such that the entire process (including
irrigation) can be completed in one day. Apply
approximately one inch of water over the loosened soil at the
completion of each day’s work. Apply mulch or turf as
indicated on the drawings on the same day.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-14
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
2.7 Planting Soil Mixes
A. Cornell standard planting soil mix is approximately a1:1:1 ratio by volume of loam
soil, sand and organic matter.
B. Uniformly mix ingredients by windrowing/tilling on an approved hard surface area.
Organic matter shall be maintained moist, not wet, during mixing. Amendments shall
not be added unless approved to extent and quantity by the Owners Representative
and additional tests have been conducted to verify type and quantity of amendment
is acceptable. Percentages of components, unless otherwise noted, will be
established upon completion of individual test results for components of the various
mixes.
C. After the Soil Scientist determines component percentages, each planting soil mix
shall be tested for physical and chemical analysis.
D. Topsoil shall be created from combinations of Subsoil mixed with varying amounts
of organic amendment. All organic matter contents shall be determined on a dry
weight basis.
1. Sand: 70 -75% by weight.
2. Organic Matter: 5-8% by weight.
3. Silt and Clay: 20 - 40% by weight. Silt content must be less than 3 times
the clay content
2.8 CU Structural Soil Mix
A. General
1. CU-Soil™ is a proprietary material patented by Cornell University (US
Patent #5,849,069) and marketed under the registered trademark, CU-
Structural Soil®. Only licensed companies are authorized to produce this
material, meeting the specifications described in this text. For a list of
licensed CU-Soil™ producers, call AMEREQ, INC. at 800-832-8788.
B. Delivery, Storage and Handling
1. Delivered CU-Structural Soil® shall be at or near optimum compaction
moisture content as determined by AASHTO T 99 (ASTM D 698) and
should not be placed in frozen, wet or muddy sites.
C. Examination of Conditions
1. All areas to receive CU-Structural Soil® shall be inspected by the
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-15
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
installing contractor before starting work and all defects such as incorrect
grading, compaction, and inadequate drainage shall be reported to the
engineer prior to beginning this work.
D. Quality Assurance
1. Qualifications of installing contractor: The work of this section should be
performed by a contracting firm with a minimum of three years’
experience.
E. Installation Guidelines
1. Underground Utilities and Subsurface Conditions
a. The installing contractor shall notify the Owner’s
Representative of any subsurface conditions which will affect
the contractor’s ability to install the CU-Soil™.
b. The installing contractor shall locate and confirm the location
of all underground utility lines and structures prior to the
start of any excavation.
c. The installing contractor shall repair any underground
utilities or foundations damaged during the progress of this
work.
2. Site Preparation
a. Do not proceed with the installation of the CU-Structural
Soil® material until all walls, curb footings and utility work
in the area have been installed. For site elements dependent on
CU-Structural Soil® for foundation support, postpone
installation of such elements until immediately after the
installation of CU-Structural Soil®.
b. Install subsurface drain lines as shown on the plan drawings
prior to installation of CU-Structural Soil® material.
c. Excavate and compact the proposed subgrade to depths,
slopes and widths as shown on the drawings. Maintain all
required angles of repose of the adjacent materials as shown
on the drawings. Do not over excavate compacted subgrades
of adjacent pavement or structures.
d. Confirm that the subgrade is at the proper elevation and
compacted as required. Subgrade elevations shall slope
parallel to the finished grade and/or toward the subsurface
drain lines as shown on the drawings.
e. Clear the excavation of all construction debris, trash, rubble
and any foreign material. In the event that fuels, oils, concrete
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-16
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
washout silts or other material harmful to plants have been
spilled into the subgrade material, excavate the soil
sufficiently to remove the harmful material. Fill any over
excavation with approved fill and compact to the required
subgrade compaction.
f. Do not proceed with the installation of CU-Structural Soil®
until all utility work in the area has been installed. All
subsurface drainage systems shall be operational prior to
installation of CU-Structural Soil®.
g. Protect adjacent walls, walks and utilities from damage. Use
½” plywood and/or plastic sheeting as directed to cover
existing concrete, metal and masonry work and other items
as directed during the progress of the work.
1) Clean up all trash and any soil or dirt spilled on any paved
surface at the end of each working day.
2) Any damage to the paving or architectural work caused by the
installing contractor shall be repaired, as directed by the
engineer.
3) Maintain all silt and sediment control devices required by
applicable regulations. Provide adequate methods to assure that
trucks and other equipment do not track soil from the site onto
adjacent property and the public right of way.
F. Installation of CU-Structural Soil® Material
1. Install CU-Structural Soil® in 6 inch lifts and compact each lift.
2. Compact all materials to at least 95% Proctor Density from a standard
compaction curve AASHTO T 99 (ASTM D 698). No compaction shall
occur when moisture content exceeds maximum as listed herein. Delay
compaction if moisture content exceeds maximum allowable and protect
CU-Structural Soil® during delays in compaction with plastic or plywood
as directed by the engineer.
3. Bring CU-Structural Soil® to finished grades as shown on the drawings.
Immediately protect the CU-Structural Soil® from contamination by toxic
materials, trash, debris, water containing cement, clay, silt or materials that
will alter the particle size distribution of the mix with plastic or plywood as
directed by the engineer.
4. Document that the delivered structural soil was produced by the approved
CU- Soil™ licensee by providing weight tickets showing source of
material.
5. Protect CU-Structural Soil® from exposure to excess water and from
erosion at all times. Do not store CU-Soil™ unprotected. Do not allow
excess water to enter site prior to compaction. If water is introduced into
the CU-Soil™ after grading, allow water to drain to optimum compaction
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-17
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
moisture content.
G. Fine Grading
1. After the initial placement and rough grading of the CU-Structural Soil®
but prior to the start of fine grading, the installing contractor shall request
review of the rough grading by the Owner’s Representative. The installing
contractor shall set sufficient grade stakes for checking the finished grades.
2. Adjust the finish grades to meet field conditions as directed. Provide
smooth transitions between slopes of different gradients and direction. Fill
all dips with CU-Soil™ and remove any bumps in the overall plane of the
slope.
a. All fine grading shall be inspected and approved by the
engineer prior to the installation of other items to be placed
on the CU-Structural Soil®.
3. The Owner’s Representative will inspect the work upon the request of the
installing contractor. Request for inspection shall be received by the
Owner’s Representative at least 5 days before the anticipated date of
inspection.
H. Acceptance Standards
1. Provide notice to the Owner’s Representative for inspection of the work at
least 5 days before the anticipated date when the site will be ready for
inspection.
I. Clean-up
1. Upon completion of the CU-Structural Soil® installation operations, clean
areas within the contract limits. Remove all excess fills, soils and mix
stockpiles and legally dispose of all waste materials, trash and debris.
Remove all tools and equipment and provide a clean, clear site. Sweep, do
not wash, all paving and other exposed surfaces of dirt and mud until the
paving has been installed over the CU-Structural Soil® material. Do no
washing until finished materials covering CU-Structural Soil® material are
in place.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-18
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
2.9 Horticultural Fill
A. Horticultural Fill will be used as subgrade material in areas to be planted to lawns,
gardens, planting beds, trees, or other areas of horticultural importance. Horticultural
Fill may be on-site or imported soils to bring new landscape areas to a specified
depth below final grade, to then be topped off with a specified planting soil.
Horticulture fill is to be used under soils and modified soils, and not under high sand
planting mixes.
The soil shall be a natural or manufactured soil free of large stones, sticks, stumps,
roots, or other objectionable, extraneous matter or debris. The fill shall not be from a
known industrial site that may include contaminants harmful to plants. The fill shall
meet the following size specifications:
Sieve size % passing
3" 100%
2" 95 - 100%
1" 90 - 100%
2 mm (No. 10) 80 - 100%
The particle size on the material passing the No. 10 screen should conform
to the following as determined by ASTM D422 or F1632:
Sand (0.05 to 2.0 mm) 40 – 80% with no more than 30% of the
total sand in the fine and very fine sand fractions (0.05 – 0.25
mm)
Silt (0.002 to 0.05 mm) 10 - 20%
Clay (< 0.002) 5 - 25%
The soil shall have an organic matter content not exceeding 5% by weight.
The pH shall be between 5.0 and 8.5. The EC on the soil shall not exceed 1.5
dS/m.
B. Execution: Apply the soil across the area to the specified depths below finished
grades. Required fills greater than 12 inches in depth shall be placed in lifts not
exceeding 12 inches. Each lift shall be compacted to 87 to 92% maximum standard
proctor density. Densities shall be verified in the field. Survey instruments shall
verify final sub F soil/fill grades prior to the placement of the planting soil.
Move fill from the stockpile in such a manner that contaminated materials are not
tracked onto the area from the tracks or tires. Any contamination or over compacted
conditions will require immediate action by the Contractor. Under no circumstance
are trucks loaded with soil or fill to drive over fill or topsoil already placed on the
construction site.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-19
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Site Examination
A. Prior to installation of Planting Soil, examine site to confirm that existing conditions
are satisfactory for the work of this section to proceed.
1. Confirm that the subgrade is at the proper elevation and compacted as
required. Subgrade elevations shall slope toward the under drain lines as
shown on the drawings.
2. Confirm that all surface areas to be filled with Planting Soil are free of
construction debris, refuse, compressible or biodegradable materials,
stones greater than 2 inches diameter, soil crusting films of silt or clay that
reduces or stops drainage from the Planting Soil into the subsoil; and/or
standing water. Remove unsuitable material from the site.
3. Confirm that no adverse drainage conditions are present.
4. Confirm that no conditions are present which are detrimental to plant
growth.
5. Confirm that utility work, if any, has been completed per the drawings.
6. Confirm that irrigation work, if any, which is shown to be installed below
prepared soil levels, has been completed.
B. If unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, notify the Owner’s Representative
immediately to determine corrective action before proceeding.
3.2 Coordination with Project Work
A. Coordinate with all other work that may impact the completion of the work.
B. Prior to the start of work, prepare a detailed schedule of the work for coordination
with other trades.
C. Coordinate the relocation of any irrigation lines, heads or the conduits of other utility
lines that are in conflict with tree locations. Root balls shall not be altered to fit
around lines. Notify the Owner’s Representative of any conflicts encountered.
3.3 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Weather: Do not mix, deliver, place or grade soils when frozen or with moisture
above field capacity.
B. Protect soil and soil stockpiles, including the stockpiles at the soil blender’s yard,
from wind, rain and washing that can erode soil or separate fines and coarse material,
and contamination by chemicals, dust and debris that may be detrimental to plants
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-20
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
or soil drainage. Cover stockpiles with plastic sheeting or fabric at the end of each
workday.
C. All manufactured packaged products and material shall be delivered to the site in
unopened containers and stored in a dry enclosed space suitable for the material and
meeting all environmental regulations.
D. Deliver all chemical amendments in original, unopened containers with original
labels intact and legible, which state the guaranteed chemical analysis. Store all
chemicals in a weather protected enclosure.
E. Bulk material: Coordinate delivery and storage with Owner’s Representative and
confine materials to neat piles in areas acceptable to Owner’s Representative.
3.4 Grade and Elevation Control
A. Provide grade and elevation control during installation of Planting Soil. Utilize grade
stakes, surveying equipment, and other means and methods to assure that grades and
contours conform to the grades indicated on the plans.
3.5 Site Preparation
A. Excavate to the proposed subgrade. Maintain all required angles of repose of the
adjacent materials as shown on the drawings or as required by this standard. Do not
over excavate compacted subgrades of adjacent pavement or structures. Maintain a
supporting 1:1 side slope of compacted subgrade material along the edges of all
paving and structures where the bottom of the paving or structure is above the bottom
elevation of the excavated planting area.
B. Remove all construction debris and material including any construction materials
from the subgrade.
C. Confirm that the subgrade is at the proper elevation and compacted as required.
Subgrade elevations shall slope approximately parallel to the finished grade and/or
toward the subsurface drain lines as shown on the drawings.
D. In areas where Planting Soil is to be spread, confirm the subgrade has been scarified.
E. Protect adjacent walls, walks and utilities from damage or staining by the soil. Use
1/2 inch plywood and or plastic sheeting as directed to cover existing concrete, metal
and masonry work and other items as directed during the progress of the work.
1. At the end of each working day, clean up any soil spilled on any paved
surface.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-21
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
2. Any damage to the paving or site features or work shall be repaired at the
Contractor’s expense.
3.6 Planting Soil and Planting Soil Mix Installation
A. Prior to installing any Planting Soil from stockpiles or Planting Soil Mixes blended
off site, the Owner’s Representative will approve the condition of the subgrade.
B. All equipment utilized to install or grade Planting Soils shall be wide track or balloon
tire machines rated with a ground pressure of 4 psi or less. All grading and soil
delivery equipment shall have buckets equipped with 6 inch long teeth to scarify any
soil that becomes compacted.
C. In areas of soil installation above existing subsoil, scarify the subgrade material prior
to installing Planting Soil. Install a minimum 6” of planting soil for turf and 18” for
planting beds.
1. Scarify the subsoil of the subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches with
the teeth of the backhoe or loader bucket, tiller or other suitable device.
2. Immediately install the Planting Soil. Protect the loosened area from
traffic. DO NOT allow the loosened subgrade to become compacted.
3. In the event that the loosened area becomes overly compacted, loosen the
area again prior to installing the Planting Soil.
D. Install the Planting Soil in a maximum of 12 inch lifts to the required depths. Apply
compacting forces to each lift as required to attain the required compaction.
E. Installed Planting Soil Mix and the re-spread existing soil shall have a soil density
through the required depth of the installed layers of soil, such that the penetrometer
reads approximately 75 to 150 psi for the same moisture content, assuming the soil
is moist and not overly saturated.
F. Phase work such that equipment to deliver or grade soil does not have to operate
over previously installed Planting Soil. Work in rows of lifts the width of the
extension of the bucket on the loader. Install all lifts in one row before proceeding
to the next. Work from the furthest part of each bed from the soil delivery point to
the edge of the each bed area.
G. Existing soil that is modified by tilling, ripping or fracturing shall have a density to
the depth of the modification, after completion of loosening, such that the
penetrometer reads approximately 75 to 150 psi at soil moisture approximately the
mid-point between wilting point and field capacity. Test with penetrometer every 6’
across the installation area.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-22
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.7 Over-compaction Reduction
A. Any soil that becomes compacted to a density greater than the specified density shall
be dug up and reinstalled. This requirement includes compaction caused by other
sub- contractors after the Planting Soil is installed and approved.
B. Surface rototilling shall not be considered adequate to reduce over compaction at
levels 6 inches or greater below finished grade.
3.8 Fine Grading
A. The Owner’s Representative will approve all rough grading prior to the installation
of Compost, fine grading, planting, and mulching.
B. Grade the finish surface of all planted areas to meet the grades shown on the
drawings, allowing for settling.
C. Utilize hand equipment, small garden tractors with rakes, or small garden tractors
with buckets with teeth for fine grading to keep surface rough without further
compaction. Do not use the flat bottom of a loader bucket to fine grade, as it will
cause the finished grade to become overly smooth and or slightly compressed.
D. Provide for positive drainage from all areas toward the existing inlets, drainage
structures and or the edges of planting beds. Adjust grades as directed to reflect
actual constructed field conditions of paving, wall and inlet elevations. Notify the
Owner’s Representative in the event that conditions make it impossible to achieve
positive drainage.
E. Provide smooth, rounded transitions between slopes of different gradients and
direction. Modify the grade so that the finish grade -- before adding mulch and after
the soil has settled -- is one or two inches below all paving surfaces or as directed by
the drawings.
3.9 Clean-up
A. During installation, keep the site free of trash, pavements reasonably clean and work
area in an orderly condition at the end of each day. Remove trash and debris in
containers from the site no less than once a week. No debris is to be buried on-site.
1. Immediately clean up any spilled or tracked soil, fuel, oil, trash or debris
deposited by the Contractor from all surfaces within the project or on
public right of ways and neighboring property.
2. Equipment and vehicles shall not be washed on-site.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-23
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. Once installation is complete, wash all soil from pavements and other structures.
Ensure that mulch is confined to planting beds and that all tags and flagging tape are
removed from the site. The Owner’s Representative seals are to remain on the trees
and removed at the end of the warranty period.
1. Make all repairs to grades, ruts, and damage to the work or other work at
the site. Other work to include compaction relief.
2. Remove and dispose of all excess Planting Soil, subsoil, mulch, plants,
packaging, and other material brought to the site by the Contractor.
3.10 Planting Soil and Modify Existing Soil Protection
A. Protect installed and/or modified Planting Soil from damage including
contamination and over compaction due to other soil installation, planting
operations, and operations by other Contractors or trespassers. Maintain protection
during installation until acceptance. Utilize fencing and matting as required or
directed to protect the finished soil work. Treat, repair or replace damaged Planting
Soil immediately.
B. Loosen compacted Planting Soil and replace Planting Soil that has become
contaminated as determined by the Owner’s Representative. Planting Soil shall be
loosened or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
1. Till and restore grades to all soil that has been driven over or compacted
during the installation of plants.
2. Where modified existing soil has become contaminated and needs
replacement, provide imported soil that is of similar composition, depth
and density as the removed soil.
3.11 Protection During Construction
A. Protect planting and related work and other site work from damage due to planting
operations, operations by other Contractors or trespassers.
B. Conform to all Contract provisions for Plant and Root Protection
1. Maintain protection during installation until the date of plant acceptance
(see Cornell Design Standard 329300 – Planting). Treat, repair or replace
damaged work immediately.
2. Provide temporary erosion control as needed to stop soil erosion until the
site is stabilized with mulch, plantings or turf.
C. Damage done by the Contractor or any of their sub-contractors to existing or installed
plants, or any other parts of the work or existing features to remain including those
on adjacent property, shall be cleaned, repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall SOILS AND PLANTING PREPARATION 32 91 00-24
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
expense to the Owner. The Owner’s Representative will determine when such
cleaning, replacement or repair is satisfactory. A certified arborist shall assess
damage to existing trees.
3.12 Final Acceptance/Soil Settlement
A. At the end of the plant warranty and maintenance period, the Owner’s Representative
will observe the soil installation work and establish that all provisions of the contract
are complete, and the work is satisfactory.
1. Restore any soil settlement and or eroded areas to the grades shown on the
drawings. When restoring soil grades, remove plants and mulch and add
soil before restoring the planting. Do not add soil over the root balls of
plants or on top of mulch.
B. If the work fails to pass final acceptance, repeat process above.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 32 92 00
TURF AND GRASSES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Scope and Purpose ................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Related Sections ...................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Definitions ............................................................................................................... 1
1.4 Submittals ................................................................................................................ 1
1.5 Quality Assurance.................................................................................................... 2
1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling .............................................................................. 3
1.7 Job Conditions ......................................................................................................... 3
1.8 Special Project Warranty ......................................................................................... 4
1.9 Maintenance Service ................................................................................................ 4
2.0 PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Grass Materials ........................................................................................................ 5
2.2 Turfgrass Sod ........................................................................................................... 7
2.3 Topsoil ..................................................................................................................... 7
2.4 Miscellaneous Landscape Materials ........................................................................ 7
3.0 EXECUTION ..................................................................................................................... 7
3.1 Turf Area Preparation .............................................................................................. 7
3.2 Seeding New Lawns ................................................................................................ 8
3.3 Reconditioning Existing Lawns............................................................................... 9
3.4 Sodding New Lawns .............................................................................................. 10
3.5 Turf Maintenance .................................................................................................. 10
3.6 Satisfactory Turf .................................................................................................... 11
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 32 92 00
Ithaca, New York TURF AND GRASSES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope and Purpose
A. This Section includes seeding and sodding standards
1.2 Related Sections
A. General Conditions includes standards for existing plant and root protection,
erosion and sediment control, and restoration of disturbed sites.
1.3 Definitions
A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed
leaves, twigs, and detritus.
B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
C. Soils: as outlined in CU standard/specifications 32 91 00 Soils and Planting
Preparation.
D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or
mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides,
rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for
use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.
E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage
to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails
and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi,
bacteria, and viruses.
F. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or
top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
G. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile and typified by the lack
of organic matter and soil organisms.
1.4 Submittals
A. Product Data and certificates: For each type of product indicated.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. Certification: Submit certificates of inspection as required by governmental
authorities. Submit manufacturers or vendors certified analysis for soil amendments
and fertilizer materials. Submit other data substantiating that materials comply with
specified requirements.
1. Submit seed vendor’s certified statement for each grass seed mixture
required, stating botanical and common name, percentage by weight, and
percentages of purity, germination, and weed seed for each grass seed
species.
C. Planting Schedule: Submit proposed planting schedule, indicating dates for each type
of landscape work during normal seasons for such work in area of site. Correlate
with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial
completion. See General Conditions for overall schedule submittals and
coordination.
D. Maintenance Instructions: Submit written instructions recommending procedures to
be established by Owner for future maintenance after acceptance and warranty
expiration. Submit prior to expiration of required maintenance period(s).
E. Provide and pay for materials testing. Testing agency shall be acceptable to the
Architect. Provide the following data:
1. Test representative material samples proposed for use.
2. Topsoil per Cornell University Standard 32 91 00 Soils and Planting
Preparation
1.5 Quality Assurance
A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time
supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.
1. Pesticide Applicator: NY State licensed, commercial.
2. NYSNLA Certified Nursery Professional or industry related degree
B. Source Quality Control
1. General: Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required
by governing authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape
materials.
2. Do not make substitutions: If specified, landscape material is not
obtainable, submit proof of non-availability to Architect, together with
proposal for use of equivalent material.
3. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer’s
certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized
laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
Association of Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable.
4. Topsoil: Acquire all topsoil and topsoil amendments. Before delivery of
topsoil, furnish the Owner’s Representative with written statement giving
location of properties from which topsoil is to be obtained, names and
addresses of owners, depth to be stripped, and crops grown during past two
years. Retain paragraph below for existing topsoil or surface soil to be
reused, or for imported or manufactured topsoil.
C. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis per 32 91 00 Soils
and Planting Preparation.
1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original,
unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of
manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as
applicable.
B. Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications
for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting
and Installation" in Turfgrass Producers International’s "Guideline Specifications to
Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting.
Protect sod from breakage and drying. If sod to be stored on site overnight, unstack
pallets by 50% to reduce heat build up.
1.7 Job Conditions
A. Proceed with and complete landscape work as portions of site become available,
working within seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work required.
B. Utilities: See General Conditions and Requirements for locating and avoiding
damage to utilities. Maintain locating flags and grade stakes until removal is
mutually agreed upon by parties concerned.
C. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered such as
rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Architect or Owner’s
Rep. No planting under such conditions will occur until approved by Architect.
D. Coordination with Plantings: Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established
and prior to planting of lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to the Owner’s
Representative. If planting of trees and shrubs occurs after lawn work, protect lawn
areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from planting operations.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.8 Special Project Warranty
A. Warranty lawns through specified lawn maintenance period and until final
acceptance.
1.9 Maintenance Service
A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of
landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3.
B. Maintain seeded and sodded areas until final acceptance.
1. Maintenance period shall begin immediately after seeding is completed for
each designated area on Plan and shall continue until all lawn areas have
been fully accepted, not less than 60 days after substantial completion.
2. If seeded in Fall continue maintenance the following Spring until lawn is
established and accepted in writing by Owner’s Representative.
3. Maintenance of seeded lawn areas shall include watering, spot weeding,
fertilizing, disease and insect pest control, mowing, reseeding, application
of herbicides, fungicides, and insecticides until a full uniform stand of
grass, free of weeds, undesirable grass species, disease and insects is
achieved and accepted by the Owner’s Representative.
4. Contractor is to provide water daily, or as conditions dictate, to maintain
adequate surface soil moisture for proper seed germination. Watering shall
be done in the late afternoon or early evening hours and shall continue for
a period not less than 30 days. Thereafter, apply 1/2" (one-half inch) of
water twice weekly until acceptance. Water shall be from Owner’s source.
Contractor shall provide and maintain at his expense, adequate
connections, hoses, sprinklers, etc., with minimum leakage. Where use of
hoses is not practical, Contractor shall water with a tank truck filled at
Owner’s source. When Owner’s water source is not available, Contractor
shall include cost of water from off-site source in base bid.
5. Grass shall not be allowed to grow more than 4" (four inches) in height
during the maintenance period. Mowing height to be set at 3”- 3 1/2" (three
inches to three- and one-half inches) unless otherwise directed with clean
mower including freshly sharpened blades. Repeat mowing to maintain
height appropriate for species without cutting more than 1/3 of grass
height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or
subsequent mowing’s.
6. Pick-up of grass clippings shall be required during or immediately after
each mowing, if clippings are an average of 1" (one inch) or longer in
length.
7. Repair, rework, and reseed all areas that have washed out, are eroded or do
not establish. Restore bare areas by top dressing with topsoil as specified.
Apply seed at specified rate. Roll with a light roller and cover with a 1/2"
(one-half inch) mulch of pre-moistened peat moss.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
8. Provide such barricades, temporary fencing signs or policing as may be
necessary to eliminate or minimize damage to lawn. Contractor is
responsible for repair of all damage within reasonable Contractor control.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Grass Materials
A. Schedule of Grass Seed Requirements:
1. All grass seed will be fresh, clean, new crop seed delivered in original
unopened packages, bearing guaranteed analysis.
2. Seed germination test results for each seed type and cultivar must be
performed within 10 months prior to landscape installation of seed and
must have no less than ninety percent (85%) germination rate.
3. All grass seed cultivar purity must be no less than ninety percent (95%) by
weight.
4. All Grass Seed and Grass Seed Mixes used will consist of one of the
following four (4) types:
a. Type 1- Cornell Turfgrass Seed Blend:
This grass seed will be used without exception for all non-athletic
turf campus lawn seedings unless specified otherwise in writing
by the Architect.
This seed mix will consist of the following by weight:
46% of a minimum 2 varieties of endophyte enhanced perennial rye
49% of a minimum 2 varieties of improved turf type tall fescue
5% of either a Midnight-type or Mid–Atlantic –type Kentucky
Bluegrass.
All seeds shall have performed in the top statistical grouping
from the most recent NTEP trials conducted for the species.
*This blend is on file at Banfield-Baker, Lakeside Sod, Winfield
and Crosman Seeds, or you may have your blend reviewed by
Owner’s Representative and mixed by a seed dealer of your
choice.
b. TYPE 2: Low-Grow Mix:
This grass seed will be used for moderate to steep slopes or other
areas where minimal maintenance is desired only when specified
in writing by the Architect.
This seed mix will consist of the following by weight:
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
50% Firefly Hard Fescue
30% Minotaur Blue Hard Fescue
20% Intrigue Chewings Fescue
or that have performed in the top statistical grouping from the
most recent NTEP trials conducted for the species.
c. TYPE 3: Fine Fescue Seed (Festuca rubra):
This shade tolerant turfgrass will be used only for lawn
establishment in heavily shaded areas receiving less than 4 hours
of direct sunlight daily and upon written approval of the
Architect.
Equal parts by weight of at least two of the following grass seeds
will be used: Nordic, Stonhenge, Jasper 3, Predator, Sea Breeze,
and Quatro, or that have performed in the top statistical grouping
from the most recent NTEP trials conducted for the species.
d. TYPE 4: Turf Type Tall Fescue (Festuca arundinacea):
This seed shall only be used on low maintenance athletic fields
with poorer quality soil and draughty site conditions.
Equal parts by weight of at least three of the following grass seed
cultivars will be used: Millennium SRP, Shenandoah III, SR
8650, Falcon V, Silverstar, Forte, Bingo and others as
recommended by Rutgers University Breeding Program
e. Type 5: P-5 Premium Ryegrass turf blend:
This grass seed may be used for repair and overseeding as
specified by the Cornell Grounds Department.
This seed mix will consist of the following, or at least 3 approved
endophyte enhanced ryegrasses. Blends are available through
Banfield-Baker, Lakeside Sod, Winfield or Crosman Seed
Company or may be blended at vendor of your choice
20% Palmer IV
20% Prelude IV
20% Dazzle
20% Quest II
20% Drifter
or that have performed in the top statistical grouping form the
most recent NTEP trials conducted for the species
5. Seed may NOT be mixed on site. If seed mixed by a dealer, the contractor
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-7
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
shall furnish the owner the dealer’s guaranteed statement of the
composition of the mixture. A sufficient number of All seed labels for seed
used on campus will be furnished to the Owner’s Representative for
review, and then incorporated into the owner’s project files.
2.2 Turfgrass Sod
A. Turfgrass Sod: Number 1 Quality/Premium, including limitations on thatch, weeds,
diseases, nematodes, and insects, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod
Materials" in Turfgrass Producer International’s "Guideline Specifications to
Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable, big roll sod of uniform density, color, and
texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when
planted.
2.3 Topsoil
A. As specified in Cornell Design Standard 32 91 00 Soils and Planting Preparation
2.4 Miscellaneous Landscape Materials
A. Anti-Erosion Mulch: Provide clean, seed-free salt hay or threshed straw of wheat,
rye, oats or barley.
B. Filtration/Separation Fabric: Water permeable filtration fabric of fiberglass or
polypropylene fabric.
C. Temporary Lawn Protection: Shall include 1” x 1” hardwood stakes, 4’ (four feet)
high a maximum of 10’ (ten feet) apart with a single line of double stranded white
polypropylene twine, flagged with 1” wide red weather resistant flag tape. The
maximum length of the flagging tapes will be 4” (four inches).
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Turf Area Preparation
A. Preparation of Planting Soil for plantings and lawn restoration in disturbed areas:
Prepare per CU Standard 32 91 00 Soils and Planting Preparation.
B. Preparation of Unchanged Grades: Where lawns are to be planted in areas that have
not been altered or disturbed by excavating, grading, or stripping operations, prepare
soil for lawn planting as follows:
1. Completely remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf with non-selective
herbicide unless otherwise approved. Dispose of such material outside of
Owner’s property; do not turn over into soil being prepared for lawns.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-8
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
Allow for sod thickness in areas to be sodded.
2. Till to a depth of not less than 6" (six inches); apply soil amendments and
initial fertilizers as specified; remove high areas and fill in depressions; till
soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture, free of lumps, clods, stones,
roots, and other extraneous matter.
3. Apply specified commercial fertilizer at rates specified and thoroughly mix
into upper 3" (three inches) of topsoil. Delay application of fertilizer if
lawn planting will not follow within seven days.
C. Fine grade lawn areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture.
Rake and drag lawn areas, remove ridges and fill depressions, as required to meet
finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas which can be planted immediately after
grading. Allow for soil settlement.
D. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and
allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil
condition.
E. Restore lawn areas to specified condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine
grading and prior to planting.
3.2 Seeding New Lawns
A. Do not use wet seed or seed which is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or
storage.
B. Sow grass seed at rate specified for seed mixture type. Increase by 20% for new
seeding on slopes in excess of a 3:1 ratio. And when expecting significant seed loss.
C. Method of Seeding
1. Mechanical drills or seeders shall place the seed to a depth not exceeding
1/4" (one quarter inch). Two passes of seeder shall be made over each area,
the second pass being made at right angles to the direction of the first, one-
half of the required amount of seed being sown in each pass. Cover
broadcast seed to a depth not exceeding 1/4" (one-quarter inch) by raking,
brush or chain harrowing, or other approved method. Do not broadcast
during windy weather. After sowing, the seeded areas shall be lightly
rolled and the seed bed before and after seeding shall weigh not more than
65 pounds per foot of width. Cultipaker, or similar equipment, may be used
in one operation to cover the seed and firm the seed bed after seeding.
D. Protect seeded slopes against erosion with an organic erosion netting such as jute or
other methods acceptable to the Owner’s Representative for all slopes exceeding 1:3.
E. Protect seeded areas against erosion by spreading chopped (certified weed free)
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-9
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
straw mulch, or acceptable organic hydroseeding cellulose mulch within 24 hours
after seeding. During the months of June, July and August, only straw mulch will be
used. Place straw mulch uniformly in a continuous blanket at the rate of 2-2/2 tons
per acre, or 2-50 pound bales per 1,000 sq ft of area. A mechanical blower may be
used for straw mulch application when acceptable to the Landscape Architect.
F. Time of Seeding (for conventional method):
1. Seed immediately after preparation of seed bed. Seeding shall be done
between April 1 and June 1, or between August 15 and September 30.
When delays in operations carry the work beyond the seasons specified, or
when conditions of high winds (winds that exceed 5 mph velocity),
drought, excessive moisture or ice are such that satisfactory results are not
likely to be obtained at any stage of the work, the work will stop and it
shall be resumed only when the desired results are likely to be obtained, or
when approved corrective measures and procedures are adopted.
Fungicide coated seed may be required for seeding between June 1 and
August 15. Seeding outside of these periods to be reviewed with the
Owner’s Representative to review seed type and warranty provisions.
G. Seed indicated areas within contract limits and areas adjoining contract limits
disturbed as a result of construction operations after proper soil preparation as
specified in Section 3.01.
H. Work notification: Notify Architect at least seven (7) working days prior to start of
seeding operations.
I. Protect existing utilities, paving, and other facilities from damage caused by seeding
operations.
J. Perform seeding work only after planting and other work affecting ground surface
has been completed or as otherwise approved by Architect.
K. Restrict traffic from lawn areas until grass is established. Erect signs and barriers as
required.
L. Provide hose and lawn watering equipment as required.
3.3 Reconditioning Existing Lawns
A. Recondition existing lawn areas damaged by Contractor’s operations, including
storage of materials and equipment, and movement of vehicles. Also, recondition
existing lawn areas where minor regrading is required.
B. Provide fertilizer, seed or sod, and soil amendments as specified for new lawns, and
as required, to provide a satisfactorily reconditioned lawn.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-10
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
C. Cultivate bare and compacted areas thoroughly to a depth of 8” (eight inches) to
provide a satisfactory and pliable planting bed.
D. Remove dead and unsatisfactory lawn areas; do not bury into soil. Remove topsoil
containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor’s operations, including oil
drippings or other harmful chemicals, stone, gravel, and other loose building
materials.
E. Where greater than 60% of lawn remains, mow, de-compact, fertilize and over-seed.
In areas where there is less than 60% of disturbed grass rake, fill low spots, remove
humps, cultivate soil to create proper seed bed, fertilize, and seed. Remove weeds
before seeding, if extensive, apply selective chemical weed killers as required. Apply
a seedbed mulch, if required, to maintain moist condition.
F. Water newly planted lawn areas and keep moist until new grass is established and
accepted in writing by the Owner’s Representative.
G. Begin maintenance immediately after planting.
3.4 Sodding New Lawns
A. Lay sod within 24 hours from time of stripping. No sodding when ground is frozen
or soil temp less than 40F. (Note to designer: Sod blend to be specified based on
location and type of use, considering current availability and may not include nylon
reinforcement mesh).
B. Lay big roll sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of
sod strips; do not overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. Work
from boards to avoid damage to subgrade or sod. Tamp or roll lightly to ensure
contact with subgrade. Work sifted soil into minor cracks between pieces of sod;
remove excess to avoid smothering of adjacent grass. Anchor sod on slopes steeper
than 2:1 with wood pegs to prevent slippage.
C. Water sod thoroughly to a depth of 2” – 3” below sod with a fine spray immediately
after planting.
3.5 Turf Maintenance
A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming,
replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable
turf as outlined in Section 1.8. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and re-
mulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the
same as those used in the original installation.
B. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00-11
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written
recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in
proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.
Environmentally friendly products to be considered if viable alternate.
3.6 Satisfactory Turf
A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by the Owner’s
Representative:
1. When landscape work is completed, including maintenance, the Owner’s
Representative will, upon request, make an inspection to determine
acceptability.
a. Landscape work may be inspected for acceptance in parts agreeable to
Architect, provided work offered for inspection is complete, including
maintenance.
2. Where inspected landscape work does not comply with requirements,
replace rejected work and continue specified maintenance until re-
inspected by Architect and found to be acceptable. Legally remove rejected
material promptly from project site.
3. Upon final acceptance, and within one week of such acceptance, Architect
will notify the Director of the Grounds Department, in writing, before final
turn over.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 33 00 00
DRAINAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Summary ................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................... 2
1.3 Storage of Materials and Equipment....................................................................... 2
1.4 Record Documents ................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
2.0 PRODUCTS....................................................................................................................... 2
2.1 Piping Materials ...................................................................................................... 2
2.2 Miscellaneous Materials ......................................................................................... 3
3.0 EXECUTION .................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 General .................................................................................................................... 4
3.2 Existing Utilities and Services ................................................................................ 4
3.3 Piping Earthwork .................................................................................................... 4
3.4 Piping Installation ................................................................................................... 5
3.5 Miscellaneous Installation ...................................................................................... 6
3.6 Field Quality Control .............................................................................................. 7
3.7 Cleaning and Finishing ........................................................................................... 8
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DRAINAGE 33 00 00-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY Section 33 00 00
Ithaca, New York DRAINAGE
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Summary
1.1.1 Description of Systems
A. General
The Work for each system includes, as appropriate to the design and
location of the system, connections to existing work, required components,
related earthwork, structures, concrete work and testing, necessary to
provide a complete, functioning system.
B. Storm Drainage
Type PVC-PSM, polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe.
C. Sanitary Drainage
Type PVC-PSM, polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe.
D. Underdrain
a) Steam Tunnels - Type PVC - PSM, polyvinyl chloride perforated
pipe.
b) Other – Perforated corrugated polyethylene underdrain tubing.
1.1.2 Related Work Specified Under Other Sections
A. Section 01 30 00 - Submittals
B. Section 02 32 00 – Soils Exploration Data
C. Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork
D. Section 31 05 00 - Soils and Aggregates
E. Section 33 10 00 - Water Utilities
F. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
G. Section 23 33 13 - Steam and Condensate Piping
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DRAINAGE 33 00 00-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.2 Quality Assurance
1.2.1 Reference Specifications
A. ASTM C94 Ready-Mix Concrete
B. ASTM D3034 Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe
and Fittings
C. ASTM D2321 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of
Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity
Flow Applications
D. AASHTO M278 PS46 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe
E. NYSDOT 2019 Standard Specifications, Construction and Materials
1.3 Storage of Materials and Equipment
A. Store and protect plastic pipe to prevent ultraviolet deterioration and to minimize
bowing.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Piping Materials
A. Elbows, tees, reducing tees, wyes, couplings, increasers, crosses, transitions and
end caps shall be of the same Type and Class of materials as the pipe, or of
material having equal strength and chemical resistance properties.
2.1.1 Type PVC-PSM, Polyvinyl Chloride Sewer Pipe
A. Pipe, fittings and joining materials: Per ASTM D3034, SDR 35 with
elastomer gasket joint.
2.1.2 Polyvinyl Chloride Perforated Drain Pipe (For Tunnels Only)
A. Pipe, fittings and joining materials: per AASHTO M278, SDR 35.
2.1.3 Perforated Corrugated Polyethylene Underdrain Tubing
A. Perforated corrugated polyethylene underdrain tubing per NYSDOT Sec.
706-13.
2.1.4 Piping Transitions
A. Transitions: Provide for joining different types of pipe materials for
joining different pipe sizes, and for joining cut pipe, where approved.
Fabricate transitions with materials capable of resisting normal corrosion.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DRAINAGE 33 00 00-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1. Cantex Industries, "CT-Adapters"
2. Fernco, "PVC Donut"
3. Joints Coupplings, “Calder”
4. Fernco, “Shielded Couplings”
2.1.5 Tap Saddles
A. High impact plastic saddle for 6 inch branch openings complete with
quick sealing epoxy and compressions sealing donut. Manufacturer:
1. Predco Fast-Fit Sewer Tap Saddle.
2.2 Miscellaneous Materials
A. Bituminous coating:
1. Carboline, "Bitumastic 50"
B. Gasket Joint Lubricant: Pipe manufacturer's recommended gasket lubricant.
C. Epoxy Bonding Compound: Two-component system suitable for bonding wet or
dry concrete to each other and to other materials.
1. HB Fuller
2. WR Grace
D. Underdrain Fabric: Nonwoven filtration (drainage) geotextile. Furnish in
protective wrapper to resist abrasion and ultraviolet radiation.
1. Site Type: For use in exterior areas more than 5 ft. outside of building
wall lines, where underdrains are 10 ft. or less deep. Not for use within
building wall lines.
a. Amoco Propex, "Style 4545"
b. Celanese Corporation, "Trevira 1114"
E. Embedment (bedding and initial backfill): Refer to Section 31 00 00, and 31 05
00.
F. Concrete: Compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days, per ASTM C94, with
5-7% entrained air per Section 03 30 00.
G. Marking tape: Service identified 3 inch wide, yellow color foil-backed
polyethylene tape. The tape shall be of a type specified by the Owner's
Representative.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DRAINAGE 33 00 00-4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 General
A. The following construction methods are not intended to be completely detailed.
Provide properly functioning systems per applicable codes, manufacturer's
instructions and standards and best accepted safe practice of the Trade.
3.2 Existing Utilities and Services
3.2.1 New Connections
A. Make complete connections to new or existing structures. Repair damage
caused as a result of Work to comply with the Contract Documents at no
increase in the Contract sum.
3.2.2 Temporary Service
A. Take measures to reroute storm and sanitary flows during construction
either by pumping through temporary lines or sequencing such that
existing lines can remain in service until replacement line is complete.
3.3 Piping Earthwork
3.3.1 Excavation and Backfill
A. Perform excavating and backfilling required for the Work, per the
procedures specified in Section 31 00 00, and the following requirements.
B. Use manual methods in areas adjacent to buried construction and utilities
to avoid damage or unscheduled service interruption. Limit trench width
or embankment conditions to preclude excessive earth loads on installed
piping system.
3.3.2 Embedment (Bedding and Initial Backfill)
A. Trim rough trench to subgrade and provide embedment as defined in
Section 31 00 00 and as indicated. Provide stable, uniform support
consisting of minimum compacted thickness below bottom of exterior
surface of pipe, including bell, as indicated but not less than 4 inches.
Shape bedding to provide full length barrel support and to prevent point
loading at pipe joints. Place and compact per Section 31 00 00.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DRAINAGE 33 00 00-5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. When the bottom of the excavation cannot support the pipe, excavate to
further depth and width and refill to pipe laying grade with bedding
material per Section 31 00 00.
3.4 Piping Installation
3.4.1 General
A. Prior to lowering pipe into trench, clean and visually inspect for apparent
defects. Remove defective pipe from the site promptly. Prior to and
during laying of pipe, maintain excavations dry and clear of water and
extraneous materials. Provide minimum 4 inches of clearance in all
directions for pipe passing under or through building grade beams or
provide surface penetrations as indicated.
B. Where pipe is embedded in an underground concrete structure, provide a
joint within 12 inches of exterior surface of the structure, capable of
absorbing movement without leakage.
C. Where connections between the different piping materials are made, use
manufactured "specials" and "transitions" to produce permanently tight
joints.
D. Clean and lubricate elastomer joints prior to assembly. Check recessed
gaskets with feeler gages.
E. During the progress of construction, protect open ends of 18 inch and
smaller pipe fittings to prevent the admission of foreign matter. Place
plugs or end boards in the ends of installed work whenever work stops.
Plugs shall be commercially manufactured products.
3.4.2 Construction Tolerances
A. The maximum deviation from the design elevation at any point along the
sewer shall not exceed 0.04 feet for all pipe sizes.
B. The maximum deviation from line at any point along the sewer (normally
at straight line between points of change in direction) shall not exceed
0.20 feet for pipes 15 inches in diameter and smaller and 0.40 feet for
pipes larger than 15 inches in diameter. Corrections for deviation from
line within the preceding tolerances shall be made at a rate not to exceed
0.10 feet for any one length of pipe.
3.4.3 Type PV-PSM, Polyvinyl Chloride Sewer Pipe
A. Install per ASTM D2321 except as modified by Contract Documents.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DRAINAGE 33 00 00-6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. At no point shall the completed installation have out-of-round pipe
deflections greater than 5%. The Owner's Representative may require
deflectometer or go-no-go gauging tests run on pipeline acceptance. Pipe
deflection greater than 5% will be unacceptable and will require removal
and replacement of the pipe.
3.4.4 Underdrain Installation
A. Place Underdrain Fabric in prepared trench, overlapping ends at least
2 feet and spread material without wrinkles.
B. Lay pipe per manufacture's instructions. Do not use more than 45 bends,
or clean-out is required.
C. Place drainage stone filter material around pipe and compact as indicated
and as specified in Section 31 00 00 and 31 05 00.
D. Wrap Underdrain Fabric over filter materials and pipe, overlapping at least
12 inches. Cover fabric within 10 days of removing protective wrapper.
Precautions must be taken to prevent runoff from displacing any mud or
any other foreign material from mixing with underdrain stone.
3.4.5 Epoxy Bonding to Existing Materials
A. Use Epoxy Bonding Compound to set sleeves or pipes in existing concrete
or to bond dissimilar materials.
B. The compound, when applied per the manufacturer's instructions, shall be
capable of initial curing within 48 hours at temperatures as low as 40F
and shall be capable of bonding any combination of the following properly
prepared materials: Wet or dry, cured or uncured concrete or mortar;
vitrified clay; cast iron, and carbon steel.
3.4.6 Marking Tape
A. Install approximately 6 to 8 inches below grade per manufacturer's
instructions.
3.5 Miscellaneous Installation
3.5.1 Concrete Work
A. Perform concrete work per Section 03 30 00 and to the details shown,
including reinforcing.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DRAINAGE 33 00 00-7
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.6 Field Quality Control
3.6.1 General Piping System Testing Requirements
A. At the discretion of the Owner and at the Owner's expense, the crushing
strength of PVC may be tested per ASTM C301.
B. One half of one percent of the number of pipe sections of each pipe size
and type to be installed may be selected by the Owner for testing; in no
case shall less than two pipes in each size and type be tested. Failure to
meet tests may be cause for rejection of the entire lot of pipe.
C. After backfilling is completed, flash a light between manholes. Remedy
any displaced pipe, misalignment or poor joints revealed by such a test.
3.6.2 Underdrain
A. Test per requirements of the manufacturer.
3.6.3 Sewer Testing
A. Hydrostatic Leakage Test
1. Test system in sections not exceeding 500 feet in length.
2. Tests shall be made by bulk heading sewer at the lower end of the
test section and filling pipe with water to an elevation 2 feet above
the top of the upstream end of the pipe or 2 feet above the highest
ground water elevation along the section under test, whichever is
highest. The leakage will be taken as the measured amount of
water added to maintain the water at this elevation. The test shall
be run for a period of at least 4 hours.
3. No additional allowance will be made for leakage from manholes,
plugs or cleanouts.
4. Allowable leakage:
a) Sanitary sewers: 0.2 gph/inch dia./100 feet of pipe.
B. Pneumatic Test
1. Exercise safety precautions for compressed air.
2. Apply pneumatic test in the event of possible water freezing or at
Contractor's option. Apply test pressure to entire system or to
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall DRAINAGE 33 00 00-8
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
portions thereof. However, each piping joint shall be subjected to
test pressure.
3. Close openings and apply, pressure regulated and relieved,
compressed air or inert gas to a pressure of over 3.5 psig but not
exceeding 4 psi greater than the average back pressure of ground
water that may be over the line being tested. Allow at least two
minutes for the air pressure to stabilize. When pressure has
stabilized above the 3.5 psig level, reduce the pressure to 3.5 psig
and start test. All compressed air used shall pass through a single
control panel. Leakage detection may be expedited by addition of
a safe odorant such as oil of wintergreen.
4. The time required in minutes for the pressure to decrease from 3.5
to 2.5 psig greater than the average back pressure of any ground
water that may be over the pipe shall not be less than the time
shown.
Pipe Diameter (inches)
4
6
8
10
12
15
18
21
24
Minutes
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
5.5
7.5
8.5
10.0
11.5
5. To determine the ground water level, install a 1/2 inch diameter
capped galvanized pipe nipple through manhole wall on top of one
of the lines entering the manhole. Prior to the acceptance test,
determine the ground water level by removing the pipe cap,
blowing air through the nipple to clear it and then connecting a
clear plastic tube to the pipe nipple. Hold the tube vertical and
measure height of water over the invert of the pipe after water
stops rising.
3.7 Cleaning and Finishing
A. Upon completion of work in each respective area, clean and protect work. Just
prior to final acceptance, perform additional cleaning as necessary to provide
clean equipment and areas to the Owner.
** END OF SECTION **
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 33 10 00
WATER UTILITIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Summary ................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Submittals ............................................................................................................... 2
1.4 Record Documents .................................................................................................. 3
1.5 References ............................................................................................................... 3
2.0 PRODUCTS....................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Piping Materials ...................................................................................................... 3
3.0 EXECUTION .................................................................................................................... 8
3.1 Examination ............................................................................................................ 8
3.2 Schedule .................................................................................................................. 8
3.3 Trench excavation and Bedding .............................................................................. 8
3.4 Pipe and Fittings ..................................................................................................... 9
3.5 Protective Warning Tape and Tracer Wire ........................................................... 10
3.6 Valves and Hydrants ............................................................................................. 10
3.7 Hydrostatic Testing and Disinfection of Water Systems ...................................... 11
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WATER UTILITIES 33 10 00-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 33 10 00
Ithaca, New York WATER UTILITIES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Summary
1.1.1 Scope
A. The Work for each system includes, as appropriate to the design and
location of each system, connections to existing work, required
components, related earthwork, concrete work and testing, all as necessary
to provide a complete, functioning system.
B. Interface with the aboveground systems within building limits as indicated
or specified, and provide flange at interface.
C. Complete the disinfection, testing, and flushing work of this Section
separately from the aboveground systems.
1.1.2 Description of Systems
A. Cold Domestic (Potable) Water
1. Type DIWP, ductile iron water pipe.
2. Polyethylene pressure pipe
B. Fire Protection Water
1. Type DIWP, ductile iron water pipe.
1.1.3 Related Work Specified Under Other Sections
A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
B. Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork
C. Section 33 13 00 - Hydrostatic Testing & Disinfection of Water
D. Section 23 22 13 - Steam and Condensate
1.2 Quality Assurance
1.2.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies
A. Pipe and fittings: Marked with manufacturer’s name, nominal diameter of
openings, pressure ratings, class or thickness, linings, material, date and
country of manufacture. Submit manufacturer’s certificate.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WATER UTILITIES 33 10 00-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. Valves: Marked on the bonnet or valve body with manufacturer’s name,
year of the casting was made and manufacture’s model number.
C. Hydrants: Marked on hydrant with manufacturer’s name, year the hydrant
casting was made and manufacturer’s model number.
D. Provide fire protection work per standards of NFPA, and the requirements
of the Owner's Underwriters, except as modified and supplemented by the
Contract Documents.
E. The provisions and recommendations of the NFPA constitute mandatory
minimum requirements for work specified herein. No payment will be
made by Owner for extra charges for work added in order to comply with
NFPA Standards and Owner's Underwriter requirements.
1.2.2 Owner's Underwriters
A. The Associated Factory Mutual Fire Insurance Companies (FM) are the
Owner's Underwriters.
B. The Industrial Risk Insurers (IRI) are the Owner's Underwriters.
C. The Owner is self-insured and has designated the following to handle
approvals:
1. Cornell University Life/Safety Dept.
2. Cornell University Utilities Dept.
1.2.3 Contractor Qualifications
A. Fire protection system work shall be supervised and performed by
personnel regularly engaged in the installation of fire protection systems
per Underwriter's and NFPA Standards.
1.3 Submittals
A. Provide a letter certifying that pipe, gaskets, valves, hydrants and other
materials meet this specification.
B. PE Pipe Fusion Technician’s Qualifications: Provide evidence of fusion,
electrofusion, and mechanical coupling training within the past year. The
training shall be on the equipment and pipe components to be utilized for
this project.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WATER UTILITIES 33 10 00-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
C. Fusion Technician’s Joint Report: Provide report including critical
parameter of each fusion joint, as required by the manufacturer and these
specifications, recorded either manually or by an electronic data logging
device.
D. Submit bacteriological tests including acceptance by authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.4 Record Documents
A. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, fittings, valves, service
connection taps and curb boxes and invert elevations.
1.5 References
A. ANSI/AWWA C104 – Cement motor lining for ductile iron pipe & fittings for
water.
B. ANSI/AWWA C111 – Rubber gasket joints for ductile iron pipe & fittings.
C. ANSI/AWWA C151 – Ductile iron pipe, Centrifugally Cast in metal molds or
sand line molds for Water & other Liquids.
D. ANSI/AWWA C153 – Ductile iron compact fittings
E. ANSI/AWWA C502 – Dry barrel fire hydrants
F. ANSI/AWWA C515 – Reduced wall, resilient gate valves for water supply
service.
G. ANSI/AWWA C600 – Installation of ductile iron water mains and appurtenances.
H. ANSI/AWWA C906 – Polyethylene (PE) pressure pipe and fittings.
I. ANSI/AWWA M55 – Manual of water supply practices, PE pipe design and
installation.
J. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe
K. Plastic Pipe Institute – Polyethylene piping system field manual for Municipal
water applications.
L. Plastic Pipe Institute TR-33 – Generic butt fusion joining procedure for field
joining polyethylene pipe.
M. Plastic Pipe Institute TN-42 – Recommended Minimum Training Guidelines for
PE pipe butt fusion joining operators for Municipal and Industrial Projects.
N. NSF 61 – Drinking water system components health effects.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Piping Materials
A. Elbows, tees, reducing tees, wyes, couplings, increasers, crosses, transitions and
end caps shall be of the same Type and Class of materials as the pipe, or of equal
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WATER UTILITIES 33 10 00-4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
or greater pressure rating and of equivalent chemical resistance properties where
different materials are proposed and permitted.
2.1.1 Type DIWP, Ductile Iron Water Pipe
A. Push-on and mechanical joint pipe, Class 52 in accordance with the
requirements of ANSI/AWWA C151; pipe and fittings with double cement
lining in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104; stainless steel and rubber
locking gaskets for push-on joints in accordance with ANSI/AWWA
C111/A21.11.
B. Flanged pipe: Thickness Class 53, Flange Class 125, in accordance with
AWWA C151 and C115; double cement lining in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C104.
C. Fittings: Ductile Iron, compact mechanical joint, working pressure of 350
psi in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153. Rubber gaskets for joints in
accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111.
D. Mechanical Joint Pipe Restraint: Ductile iron wedge action retainer gland
with auto-torque edge bolts. Acceptable Manufactures:
1. EBAA Iron, “Megalug Series 1100”
2. Stargrip, “Stargrip 3000”
3. Romac Industries, “RomaGrip”
E. Acceptable Pipe Manufacturers:
1. U.S. Pipe, "Tyton Joint Pipe with Field Lok Gaskets".
F. Encasement: V-Bio Enhanced Polyethylene Encasement consisting of three
layers of co-extruded linear low density polyethylene fused into a single
thickness of not less than 8 mils in accordance with ANSI/AWWA
C105/A21.5. Inner layer of encasement to be infused with anti-microbial
biocide and corrosion inhibitor. Outer layer to be UV resistant.
2.1.2 Polyethylene (PE) Pipe & Fittings
A. Polyethylene pipe shall be made for PE compounds meeting the physical
property requirements of ASTM D3350 having a minimum material
designation code of PE 4710. The pipe shall meet the requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C906, and shall be tested and certified as suitable for sue
with potable water in accordance with the applicable requirement in
NSF/ANSI 61. The outside diameter of the pipe shall be based on SIPS
sizing system. The pipe shall be rated for use at a pressure class of 200 psi
and have a dimension ratio (DR) 11.Flanged pipe: Thickness Class 53,
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WATER UTILITIES 33 10 00-5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
Flange Class 125, in accordance with AWWA C151 and C115; double
cement lining in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104.
B. Polyethylene fittings shall be made of PE 4710, meet the requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C906 and have a DR and pressure rating equal to the pipe.
1. Mechanical Joint (MJ) Adapters: MJ adapters shall be made with
sufficient through-bore length to be clamped in a butt fusion
joining machine without the use of a stub-end holder. All MJ
adapters shall be supplied as a complete assembly with gasket,
bolts, nuts and gland ring form a single manufacturer.
2. Flange Adapters: Flange adapters shall have bolt-holes and bolt-
circles conforming to ASME B16-5 Class 150. Flange adapters
shall be made with sufficient through-bore length to be clamped in
a butt fusion joining machine without the use of a stub-end holder.
The sealing surface of the flange adapter shall be machined with a
series of small v-shaped grooves to provide gasket less sealing, or
to restrain the gasket blow-out. All flange adapters shall be
supplied as a complete assembly with all necessary components
from a single manufacture.
2.1.3 Insulation (Inside Buildings)
A. 1 1/2-inch Fiberglass insulation with vapor barrier. To be installed as per
manufacturer’s recommendations for cold water application.
2.1.4 Valves - Direct Bury Domestic/Fire Water Systems
A. Gate Valves 12-inch and smaller diameter.
B. 150 Gate Valves: Shall conform to the latest revision of AWWA Resilient
Seated gate valves Standard C-515, shall be UL listed and FM. Ductile
iron body, bronze trim, single wedge, non-rising stem with square nut for
mechanical joint ends. Stainless steel bolts, studs and nuts for bonnet.
Rated working pressure of 250 psi through 12-inch size for AWWA
service and 200 psi for UL/FM service. Each valve shall be factory tested
to 250 psig and shell tested to 500 psig. All components in contact with
potable water shall be fabricated from materials with a maximum lead
content of 0.25% by weight.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Mueller Company
2. Kennedy Valve Company
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WATER UTILITIES 33 10 00-6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
2.1.5 Hydrant
A. Dry barrel hydrant in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C502, UL 246.
Inside dimension of 7 inches minimum, with minimum 5 ¼ -inch diameter
valve seat opening. “Break-top” flange, open counterclockwise. Two 2 ½-
inch hose nozzles and one 4 ½-inch pumper nozzle with National Standard
Threading. Mechanical joint 6-inch inlet connection. Nozzle caps attached
by chain to hydrant head. All components in contact with potable water
shall be fabricated from materials with a maximum lead content of 0.25%
by weight.
B. Coating: Hydrant barrel below grade to be factory coated with two coats of
black asphaltum paint. Hydrant bonnet and upper barrel to be factory
coated with damp-proof red primer.
C. Manufactures:
1. Clow Valve Company, “Medallion Hydrant”
2. Kennedy Valve Company, “Guardian K81D”
3. American Darling, “B-84-b-5”
2.1.6 Bedding Materials
PE and Ductile iron pipe: Embedment (Bedding and Initial Backfill): Refer to
Section 31 05 00 for definitions of soils and aggregates, their uses and installation
methods.
2.1.7 Accessories
A. Provide 3,000 psi concrete for thrust blocks and pipe encasement bolt-
through mechanical restraint coupling: Ductile iron, epoxy coated bolt
through positive restraint mechanism to connect fittings and valves at
linear distance not to exceed 3-inches and without attachment pipe. InFact
Foster Adapter or approved equal.
B. Gate Valve Boxes: Cast-iron three-piece screw type with minimum wall
thickness of ¼-inch and barrel diameter of 5 ¼-inch; two feet of height
adjustment with minimum 6-inch laps. Cover cast with the word
“WATER”. Box and cover bituminous coated.
C. Valve Box Base Adapter: Rubber adapter to seal base of 5 ¼-inch valve
box to valve bonnet, and prevent shifting and settling of valve box.
Adapter Inc., #6 Base Adapter or approved equal.
D. Valve Box Debris Plug: Cross-linked laminated heat-fused closed cell
polyethylene with 350 lb. test polyethylene handle, 6-inch thick, diameter
to conform 5 ¼ -inch valve box. InFact, Mud Plug or approved equal.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WATER UTILITIES 33 10 00-7
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
E. Hydrant Extensions: Fabricate in multiples of 6-inches with rod and
coupling to increase barrel length. Coat extension in same manner as
hydrant. Maximum one extension for any one hydrant.
F. Joint Accessories, including lubricant for push-on and mechanical joint
pipe and fittings.
G. Bituminous Coating: 12 mil thick coating.
1. Carboline, "Bitumastic 50"
H. Sleeves: Standard weight carbon steel pipe with continuously welded
collar plates, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
I. Expansible Seal: Mechanically-expansible elastomer seal devices with
stainless steel hardware.
1. GPT Industries, "Link Seal"
J. Gasket Joint Lubricant: Use either pipe manufacturer's recommended
gasket lubricant or a hydrated bentonite gel applied per manufacturer's
instructions as joint lubricant.
1. American Colloid Company, "Volclay"
K. Epoxy Bonding Compound: Two-component system suitable for bonding
wet or dry concrete to each other and to other materials.
1. HB Fuller
2. WR Grace
L. Chlorine Solution for Disinfection Work: Chlorine solution not less than
50 parts per million (ppm) of chlorine obtained from chlorine gas, calcium
hypochlorite or commercial laundry bleach with minimum 5.25 percent
available chlorine.
1. Calcium Hypochlorite:
a. HTH
b. Perchloron
c. Pittchlor
2. Laundry Bleach:
a. Clorox
b. Roman Cleaner
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WATER UTILITIES 33 10 00-8
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
Material Required for 1000 Gallons of Solution
Solution Strength
Calcium Hypochlorite (lbs)
Laundry Bleach (gallons)
50 ppm
0.6
1.0
100 ppm
1.2
2.0
M. Marking Tape: Service identified 3-inch wide, yellow color foil-backed
polyethylene tape. The tape shall be of a type specified by the Owner's
Representative.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
A. Verify that water main size, location and elevation are as shown on the drawing.
B. Thoroughly clean inside of pipe and fittings before installation.
C. Open and close gate valves, curb valves, corporation stops and hydrant valves and
caps to determine proper operation before installation. Tighten bolts and lubricate
as per manufacturer’s instructions. Keep valves fully open or shut.
D. Verify required bury depth for valve boxes.
E. Verify restraint of existing main at connections to water system.
3.2 Schedule
A. Schedule work involving disruption of water services with Cornell Utilities
Department a minimum of five (5) working days prior to beginning any work. Do
not interrupt existing service without authorization from Cornell Utilities
Department.
3.3 Trench excavation and Bedding
A. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Section 31 00 00 “Earthwork”. Hand
trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.
B. Compact subgrade as required.
C. Place bedding material at trench bottom across entire width of trench in such
thickness that a minimum of 6-inches will be under the bottom of the pipe and the
bottom quadrant of the pipe will be below the level surface of the bedding
material each side of the pipe barrel.
D. Shape the bed to receive the pipe. Work bedding material under the pipe using
hand tools or mechanical vibratory tapping equipment to completely fill all void
spaces and provide continuous support for pipe or fitting.
E. Remove any temporary blocking form trench in conjunction with the installation
of the bedding material.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WATER UTILITIES 33 10 00-9
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.4 Pipe and Fittings
A. Maintain minimum 10 feet horizontal separation, unless shown otherwise, of
water main from sanitary sewer runs. Maintain minimum 18-inch vertical
separation of water and sanitary sewers at crossings.
B. Install pipe to indicated elevations to within tolerance of 3-inches.
C. Install ductile iron pipe and fittings in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600.
D. Install polyethylene encasement on ductile iron pipe, fittings and valves at
locations shown on the drawings and in accordance with AWWA C105, Method
A or Method B.
E. Install PE pipe and fittings in accordance with the requirements of
ANSI/AWWWA C906, the PPI Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe, and AWWA
Manual of Practice M55.
1. Butt Fusion: The pipe shall be made in compliance with the pipe or fitting
manufacturer’s recommendations. Fusion joints shall be made by qualified
fusion technicians per PPI TN-42.
2. Electrofusion: Electrofusion joining shall be done in accordance with the
manufacture’s recommended procedure. Other sources of electrofusion
joining information are in PPI TN-34. The process of electrofusion
requires an electric source, a transformer, commonly called an
electrofusion box that has wire leads, a method to read electronically (by
laser) or otherwise input the barcode of the fitting and a fitting that is
compatible with the type of electrofusion box used. The electrofusion box
must be capable of reading and storing the input parameters and the fusion
results for later download to a record file. Qualification of the fusion
technician shall be demonstrated by evidence of electrofusion training
with the past year on the equipment to be utilized for this project.
3. Mechanical connection of PE pipe to valves and fittings where shown,
shall use mechanical joint adapters in conformance with the PPI
Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe and AWWA Manual of Practice M55.
4. Provide flange adapters where shown and install in conformance with the
PPI Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe and AWWA Manual of Practice M55.
5. Joining Recording: the critical parameters of each fusion joint, as required
by the manufacturer and these specifications, shall be recorded either
manually or by electronic data logging device. All fusion joint data shall
be included in the Fusion Technician’s joint report.
F. Lay pipe flat or slope up to building. Do not create high points in the main.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WATER UTILITIES 33 10 00-10
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
G. Route pipe in direct route between fittings.
H. Install sampling taps at locations necessary to permit testing and disinfection of
water system.
I. Form and place concrete for thrust blocks against solid rock or undisturbed earth
at each bend or change of direction of pipe main. Leave all mechanical joint nuts
and bolts accessible after form work has been removed.
J. Establish elevations of buried pipe and pipe bored or jacked under highways, to
ensure not less than 4.5 feet of cover, unless shown otherwise.
K. Close all open ends or fittings at the end of each construction day with watertight
expandable plugs. Do not use plywood, burlap, plastic or any other non-watertight
covers.
L. Backfill trenches in accordance with Section 31 00 00 Earthwork.
3.5 Protective Warning Tape and Tracer Wire
A. Conductive Water Pipe: Install continuous warning tape at 18-inches below final
grade.
B. Non-conductive Water Pipe: Install tracer wire attached to the pipe and
continuous warning tape at 18-inches below final grade.
3.6 Valves and Hydrants
A. Confirm exact locations of hydrants and associated guard valves with Cornell
Utilities Department prior to installing main and hydrant tees. Confirm guard
valve falls within on homogeneous surface material with a minimum 12-inch
separation to any curbing. Substitute anchor tee with standard M.J. tee and length
of 6-inch pipe as necessary to adjust guard valve location. Locate hydrant with
24-inch minimum from face of hydrant body to centerline of guard valve.
B. Set gate valves and bed as described here-in. Hydrant guard valves to be bolted
directly to hydrant anchor tee unless noted otherwise.
C. Center, plumb and straighten valve box over valve. Install valve box base adapter
and debris plug per manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Provide a drainage pit beneath and around hydrant shoe, fill with Drainage stone
and cove with filter fabric as shown on hydrant detail. Bed all remaining pipe and
fittings as described herein.
E. Set all hydrants vertically on a minimum of 4 x 8 x 16 inch solid concrete block.
Plumb and grade hydrant body as necessary between subgrade and finish grade in
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall WATER UTILITIES 33 10 00-11
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
three directions with lumber. Remove bracing once hydrant is backfilled to sub
grade level.
F. Set all hydrants to proposed finished grades with nozzles at 1-inches above grade.
Provide hydrant extensions or vertical offset fittings where necessary to match
finished grades. Only one (1) hydrant extension to be allowed for each hydrant.
G. Adjust all valve boxes to be flush with finished grades in landscaped areas and ½-
inch below finished grade in pavements.
H. Provide Cornell Utilities Department access to hydrants for painting purposes.
I. Grease all Hydrant nozzle threads.
3.7 Hydrostatic Testing and Disinfection of Water Systems
A. Flush, hydrostatic test and disinfect all water pipe in accordance with Section
33 13 00 Hydrostatic Testing and Disinfection of Water Systems.
** END OF SECTION **
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 33 13 00
HYDROSTATIC TESTING AND DISINFECTION OF WATER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL .....................................................................................................................1
1.1 General Requirements ..........................................................................................1
1.2 Section Includes ...................................................................................................1
1.3 Related Work Specified Under Other Sections .....................................................1
1.4 References ...........................................................................................................1
1.5 Submittals ............................................................................................................1
1.6 Project Record Documents ...................................................................................2
1.7 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................2
1.8 Qualifications .......................................................................................................2
1.9 Regulatory Requirements .....................................................................................3
2.0 PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................3
2.1 Disinfection Chemicals ........................................................................................3
3.0 EXECUTION .................................................................................................................3
3.1 Examination .........................................................................................................3
3.2 Execution .............................................................................................................3
3.3 Quality Control ....................................................................................................6
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall HYDROSTATIC TESTING & DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM 33 13 00-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 33 13 00
Ithaca, New York Hydrostatic Testing & Disinfection of Water System
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 General Requirements
A.Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.2 Section Includes
A.Hydrostatic testing and disinfection of water system
B.Testing and reporting results
1.3 Related Work Specified Under Other Sections
A. Section 33 10 00 -Water Utilities
1.4 References
A.ANSI/AWWA B301 – Standards for Liquid Chlorine.
B.ANSI/AWWA C600 – Installation of Ductile-iron Water Mains and their
Appurtenances.
C.ANSI/AWWA B651 – Standards for Disinfecting Water Mains
D.ANSI/AWWA C655 – Field Dichlorination
E.AWWA M55 – Manual of Water System Practices, PE Pipe Design and
Installation
F.ASTM F2164 – Standard Practice for Leak Testing of Polyethylene (PE) and
Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Pressure Piping Systems Using Hydrostatic
Pressure.
G.Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI) Handbook of Polyethylene Pipe
1.5 Submittals
A.Testing and Disinfection Plan: Submit a detailed plan for all aspects of the
required testing and disinfection work.
B.Test Reports: Indicate results comparative to specified requirements.
C.Certificates: Certify that integrity and cleanliness of water distribution system
meets or exceeds specified requirements.
D.“Cornell Utilities Water Main Acceptance Form” filled in for each test.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall HYDROSTATIC TESTING & DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM 33 13 00-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.6 Project Record Documents
A.Test reports are to be completed by the Owner.
B.Pressure and Leakage Reports
1.Time, date and location of testing point
2.Piping material, length and diameter of pipe tested.
3.Average test pressure during leakage test in pounds per square inch.
4.Actual leakage in gallons per hour for ductile iron piping.
5.Pressure after 1 hour and percent change for polyethylene piping
C.Disinfection Report; Record:
1.Type and form of disinfectant used.
2.Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion.
3.Test Locations.
4.Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals (Quantity in treated water) in ppm
for each outlet tested.
5.Date and time of flushing start and completion.
6.Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested.
D.Bacteriological Report; Record:
1.Date issued, project name, and testing laboratory name, address, and
telephone number.
2.Date and time of water sample collection.
3.Name of person collecting samples
4.Test Locations.
5.Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested.
6.Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested.
7.Certificate that water conforms, or fails to conform, to bacterial standards
of NYSDOH.
8.Bacteriologist’s signature and authority.
1.7 Quality Assurance
A.Perform hydrostatic testing of ductile pipe in accordance with ANSI/AWWA
C600.
B.Perform Hydrostatic testing of polyethylene (PE) pipe in accordance with
AWWA M55, ASTM F2164 and the PPI Handbook of Polyethylene Piping.
C.Perform disinfection in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C651.
1.8 Qualifications
A.Water Treatment Firm: Company specializing in disinfecting potable water systems
in this section with three years documented experience.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall HYDROSTATIC TESTING & DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM 33 13 00-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B.Testing Firm: Company specialized in test potable water systems, certified by the
State of New York.
1.9 Regulatory Requirements
A.Conform to applicable Cornell University rules and regulations for performing the
work of this section.
B.Provide certificate of compliance from Cornell University indicating approval of
water system.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Disinfection Chemicals
A.Chemicals: ANSI/AWWA B301, Liquid Chlorine
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
A.Verify restraint of all joints and fittings during water system installation, prior to
backfilling and prior to conducting hydrostatic testing.
B.Verify scheduling to hydrostatic testing and disinfection activities with the Owner
3.2 Execution
A.Hydrostatic Testing for Ductile Iron Piping:
1.Perform testing after piping has been installed and backfilled in trench, and
all concrete restraints have cured.
2.Provide and attach equipment and materials, including water, to perform
testing.
3.Slowly fill main through piping connected to an existing in-service main or
hydrant. The connection shall be equipped with an RPZ backflow device.
The connection to the new main shall be within 10 feet of the divisional
valve or connection point on the existing system.
4.Expel air from the line through hydrants or taps made at the high points.
5.Maintain an average test pressure for services and mains of 150 psi or 1.5
times the normal working pressure, whichever is greater, for not less than
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall HYDROSTATIC TESTING & DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM 33 13 00-4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
two hours. Measure test pressures at the highest point along the test
section.
6.Examine mains for visible leaks or pipe movement and correct obvious
defects before the leakage test is made.
7.Conduct leakage test concurrently with pressure test. Leakage is the
quantity of water that must be supplied into the newly laid pipe, or any
valved section thereof, to maintain pressure within 5 psi of the specified
test pressure after the air in the pipeline has been filled with water.
Leakage shall not be measured by a drop in pressure in a test section over a
period of time. No installation will be accepted until the leakage is less
than the number of gallons per hour as determined by the formula:
L = SD(P)1/2
133,200
8.In which L equals the allowable leakage in gallons per hour; S is the length
of pipe tested in feet; D is the nominal diameter of the pipe, in inches; and
P is the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square
inch gauge.
B. Leak Testing for Polyethylene (PE) Piping:
1.Perform testing after piping has been installed and backfilled in trench, and
all concrete restraints have cured.
2.Provide and attach required equipment and materials, including water, to
perform test.
3.Slowly fill main through a piping connected to an existing in-service main
or hydrant. The connection shall be equipped with an RPZ backflow
device. The connection to the new main shall be within 10 feet of the
divisional valve or connection point on the existing system.
4.Expel air from the line through hydrants or taps made at the high points.
5.Allow a minimum 8 hours between filling and pressurizing the test section
to allow the piping to thermally stabilize.
6.The target test pressure at the lowest point along the test section shall be
1.5 times the pipe pressure class, or based on the pressure rating of the
lowest pressure rated fitting or other component in the test section,
whichever is less. Pressure shall be observed at the pressurizing pump.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall HYDROSTATIC TESTING & DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM 33 13 00-5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
7.Pressurize and maintain the pressure in the test section at the target test
pressure for a maximum or 3 hours. Test is acceptable and leakage is not
indicated if pressure remains within 5% of the target test pressure for 1 full
hour. If the test in not completed for any reason, the test section shall be
depressurized for at least 8 hours before starting the next testing sequence.
Under no circumstances shall the total time for initial pressurization and
time at test pressure exceed 8 hours.
8.Observe piping for visible leaks or pipe movement. If leakage is observed,
complete rupture may be imminent. Evacuate persons from the area of any
leak and depressurize the piping immediately.
C.Disinfection:
1.Provide and attach required equipment and materials, including sampling
taps and tapped plugs, to perform flushing and disinfection.
2.Flush all mains prior to disinfection at a minimum velocity of 3.0 feet per
second for 3 full turnovers of the water volume or until water flows clear,
whichever is longer. All dead ends and hydrant stubs must be flushed.
Coordinate and open one division valve and one hydrant, or temporary
terminating valve, at a time as necessary to obtain minimum velocity.
Operation of divisional valves shall be performed by Cornell Utilities
Department staff or under their direct supervision.
3.Inject chlorine solution into system using a continuous feed method.
Proportion the rate of chlorine application to inject a solution with a
minimum concentration of 25 mg/I and maximum concentration of 50
mg/I of available chlorine.
4.Continue injection of the chlorine solution until entire main is filled.
Measure and confirm the initial concentration with a colorimetric testing
device.
5.Maintain chlorinated water in main for a minimum 24 hours and maximum
48 hours. Operate all valves and hydrants for their disinfection.
6.Water samples are to be collected by Owner through sampling taps
installed by the Contractor at maximum 1,000-foot intervals along the
main. Chlorine concentrations at the end of the 24- hour period shall be at
least 10 mg/I.
7.Inject additional water from the existing system to flush the mains until the
chlorine concentration leaving the mains at the far end is no higher than
that generally in the system or less than 1.0 mg/I.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall HYDROSTATIC TESTING & DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM 33 13 00-6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
8.Discharge of the chlorine solution shall be to an existing sanitary sewer
system if available and if approved by the Owner.
9.If discharged to a storm sewer or ground surface, the chlorine solution
shall be neutralized in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C655 Field
Dechlorination. Furnish all necessary equipment and chemicals, and
operate equipment to neutralize the chlorinated water flushed from the
mains to below 0.05 mg/I.
10.Make provisions for Cornell facilities staff to collect samples for water
analyses.
11.Owner will pay the costs of a testing firm to determine via water analyses
that the system is potable in accordance with NYSDOH requirements.
12.Remove all temporary sampling taps and other appurtenances. Replace
temporary corporation stops with threaded brass plugs.
3.3 Quality Control
A.Do not place water distribution system in service until test results indicate that it is
bacteriologically safe.
** END OF SECTION **
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 33 21 13.13
UNDERGROUND HOT WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 GENERAL..................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Summary ............................................................................................................. 1
1.2 Related Work Specified in Other Sections ........................................................... 2
1.3 Submittals............................................................................................................ 2
1.4 Quality Control Submittals .................................................................................. 3
1.5 Quality Assurance ............................................................................................... 4
1.6 Delivery, Storage & Handling .............................................................................. 5
1.7 Project Conditions ............................................................................................... 6
2.0 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................. 6
2.1 Pre-Insulated Bonded Steel Pipe and Fittings ....................................................... 6
2.2 Bonded Steel Field Joints ..................................................................................... 7
2.3 Identification ....................................................................................................... 7
2.4 Tracer Wire and Accessories ............................................................................... 7
3.0 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................ 8
3.1 Underground Piping Installation .......................................................................... 8
3.2 Preparation of Buried Pipe Foundation ................................................................ 8
3.3 Installation of Bonded Steel pipe and Fittings ...................................................... 8
3.4 Backfill and Compaction ................................................................................... 10
3.5 Identification ..................................................................................................... 10
3.6 Testing .............................................................................................................. 10
3.7 Flushing and Cleaning of Hydronic Piping Systems ........................................... 13
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND HOT WATER DISTRIBUTTION PIPE 33 21 13.13-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 33 21 13.13
Ithaca, New York UNDERGROUND HOT WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Summary
A.This Section includes hot water distribution piping and related components outside
the building for hydronic heating.
1.Hydronic hot water piping shall be European standard thin-wall direct
buried piping, including isolation valves, integrated pipe supports,
expansion compensation pads, leak detection wiring, pipe fittings and
appurtenances in conformance with ASME/ANSI B31.1.
B.All pre-insulated piping systems shall be waterproof and shall provide for sufficient
movement for thermal expansion and contraction.
C.The system supplier's representative shall be responsible for directing the
installation and testing of the piping system, including training the installing
contractor, overseeing the installation process, and reviewing manufacturer’s
installation instructions with the Contractor and Owner’s inspectors. Submit the
factory representative’s resume for approval by the Owner. Where the
manufacturer’s warranty requires the factory representative to be on site during all
phases of construction, that factory representative shall be assigned for the duration
of the project. Where the manufacturer’s warranty does not require 100% factory
representative on-site at all times, this specification is not requiring 100% on-site at
all times. The Contractor is responsible for compliance with manufacturer’s
instructions. The Owner and Engineer may inspect the installation as clarified below
but neither party has responsibility for the installation or quality control measures
for the warranty. It shall be certified in writing by the supplier that the factory
representative is technically qualified and has a minimum of 5 years’ experience in
the design and/or inspection of the systems. Where required by the warranty, the
supplier's representative shall be present 100% of the time during the work phases
listed below to approve the contractor’s methods, otherwise, inspections will be
performed as follows (but the clarifications have no bearing on warranty):
1.Inspection and unloading: At a minimum, regardless of warranty
requirement by the manufacturer, the factory representative shall witness
the first unloading procedure. At this first trip, the factory representative
shall review the manufacturer’s instructions with the Owner, Contractor,
and Engineer.
2.Inspection of trench prior to laying of pipe: At a minimum, regardless of
warranty requirements, the factory representative shall inspect the first set
up. If 100% on-site is not required for warranty, the Owner may perform
inspections with spot inspections by the Engineer.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND HOT WATER DISTRIBUTTION PIPE 33 21 13.13-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.Inspection of expansion elbows/pads: If 100% on-site factory representative
is not required by warranty, the Owner and Engineer may perform
inspections.
4.Inspection of joining of system: At a minimum, regardless of the
manufacturer’s warranty requirement for the on-site factory representative,
the factory representative shall witness the first joint closure procedure. If
100% on-site is not required for warranty, the Owner may witness all
subsequent pipe joining work.
5.Hydrostatic Testing (piping): Regardless of manufacturer’s warranty
requirements for the on-site factory representative, the Owner will witness.
6.Repair of any patchwork: At a minimum, regardless of warranty
requirements, the factory representative shall inspect the first repair. If
100% on-site is not required for warranty, the Owner may perform
inspections with spot inspections by the Engineer.
7.Back filling of pipe sections: If 100% on-site factory representative is not
required by warranty, the Owner and Engineer may perform inspections.
D.The Piping Installation Contractor shall not perform any of the above stated work in
the absence of the Piping Supplier's representative. Where 100% on-site attendance
is not required by the Piping Supplier’s representative, the Piping Installation
Contractor shall not perform any of the above stated work in the absence of the
Owner’s inspector.
E.The Piping Supplier’s representative shall prepare and daily submit field reports for
each of the inspections and tests witnessed above. Field reports shall be submitted
daily to the Owner and Engineer.
F.The Piping Installation Contractor performing the work shall be responsible for the
installation of the preapproved system and all other components of the underground
hot water distribution systems, including the piping and equipment in the manholes
and buildings. This responsibility shall include all site work and purchase of the
preapproved system from the system supplier.
1.2 Related Work Specified in Other Sections
A.Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork
1.3 Submittals
A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data, including installation
instructions, and dimensioned drawings for the type of manufactured piping
specialty.
B.Shop Drawings: Submit for fabricated specialties, indicating details of fabrication,
materials, and method of support. A complete engineering stress analysis indicating
all anchors, fittings, dimensions in three axes, maximum anticipated stresses and
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND HOT WATER DISTRIBUTTION PIPE 33 21 13.13-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
maximum allowable stresses must be submitted.
C.Piping Supplier shall submit factory prepared and certified Underground Piping
System layout drawings at same scale as Contract Drawings.
D.Piping Supplier shall submit factory prepared and certified Underground Piping
System stress and thermal movement calculations for hot water carrier pipe.
E.Piping Supplier shall submit anchor details and calculations.
F.Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts list for each type of
manufactured piping specialty. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in
maintenance manual.
G.Hydrostatic Test Plan: Submit a schematic hydrostatic test plan showing the overall
layout of the temporary hydrostatic pressure test, size and location of temporary
pumps, ports, valves, drains, bypasses, gauges and other appurtenances needed.
Include all procedures and shutdowns necessary for the hydrostatic test.
H.Cleaning and Flushing Plan: Submit a schematic cleaning and flushing plan showing
the overall layout of the temporary flushing setup, size and location of temporary
pumps, ports, valves, gauges, vents and drains. Flushing plan shall include a
sequence of steps in the cleaning and flushing procedure.
I.Leak Detection System: Submit a leak detection schematic showing cable routing,
proposed quantity and location of leak detection control panels, etc.
1.4 Quality Control Submittals
A.Submit certified factory test results for insulation testing prior to shipment.
B.Technical qualification certification of the supplier’s on-site representative.
1.Submit welders' certificates specified in Quality Assurance below.
2.Welding procedures.
C.Excavation Support and Protection:
1.Prior to starting work, submit for review and approval, calculations and shop
drawings showing each proposed method of supporting adjacent earth and
structures; i.e. retention system and other methods of bracing. Include the
following:
a.Lists of material to be used, including design mixes.
b.Sequence of operations.
c.Detailed sections clearly illustrating the scope of work.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND HOT WATER DISTRIBUTTION PIPE 33 21 13.13-4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
d.Relationship of piles, lagging, walls, and bracing to new and existing
structures.
e.Location of utilities and details of support when required.
f.Procedures and details of testing.
2.Shop drawings and calculations: Prepared by qualified Licensed
Professional Engineers registered in the State of New York and bearing their
seals and signatures.
3.Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance"
Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of
complete projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses
of architects and owners, and other information specified.
D.All piping, fittings, and accessories shall be provided by a single manufacturer.
E.Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining
construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused
by excavation support and protection systems.
F.Special Precautions
1.Torch cutting will be permitted only with the specific written approval of
the Utilities. Any cutting method, which may create sparks, must include
"Fire Watch". Submit "Fire Watch" procedure for approval.
2.Draining operations must not damage building components or endanger
human health.
G.Country of Fabrication:
1.All piping, fittings, and piping accessories not manufactured, fabricated,
and/or assembled in the United States of America or Canada must be
manufactured, fabricated, and/or assembled by an ISO 9001 registered
corporation.
2.Submit ISO 9001 registration certificates for all corporations where the
piping, fittings, and piping accessories are not manufactured, fabricated,
and/or assembled in the United States or Canada.
3.For all piping, fittings, and piping accessories not fabricated in the United
States or Canada, submit an independent test report for all materials to be
provided.
4.No piping, fittings, and piping accessories manufactured, fabricated, and/or
assembled in China including Taiwan are permitted to be provided in this
Contract.
1.5 Quality Assurance
A.Codes and Standards:
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND HOT WATER DISTRIBUTTION PIPE 33 21 13.13-5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.The hydronic hot water piping system shall be designed, fabricated, erected,
and tested in accordance with ASME B31.1.
2.All welders performing welding to this procedure shall be qualified to this
procedure in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications.”
3.Welding procedures and testing shall comply with ASME B31.1-Code
Power Piping Code and The American Welding Society, Welding
Handbook.
4.Provide certified factory test results for insulation testing.
5.Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and ASME B31.1
Power Piping Code for administrative and technical requirements for Boiler
External Piping and Non-boiler External Piping.
6.Comply with the latest editions of the publications of the following
Agencies to the extent referenced in this Section:
a.ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
b.ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
c.ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.
d.AWS - American Welding Society.
e.AWWA - American Water Works Association.
f.UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
7.Comply with AWWA C901/C906, ASTM D2239, ASTM D2737, ASTM
D3035, and ASTM D 3350 for selection, design, and installation of
thermoplastic water piping.
8.Comply with the following European Standards:
a.European Standard EN253 Pre-Insulated Bonded Piping Systems
b.European Standard EN448 Pre-Insulated Fitting Assemblies
c.European Standard EN489 Joint Assemblies on Pre-Insulated Pipes
d.European Standard EN13941 Design and Installation of Pre-Insulated,
Bonded Pipe Systems for District Heating
e.P235GH According to EN10217-2 (ASME-A53 Grade B Equal)
f.ISO 9001 Quality Systems
g.ISO 14001 Environmental Management System
B.The Contractor shall maintain a log of the installation and testing of the leak
detection system wiring. The log shall include pre-installation resistances for each
length of pipe, precise lengths of alarm wiring, continuity measurements as work
progresses, GPS coordinates of joint connections, and names of personnel
making/testing each wiring connection.
1.6 Delivery, Storage & Handling
A.Provide factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe. Maintain end-caps
through shipping, storage and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND HOT WATER DISTRIBUTTION PIPE 33 21 13.13-6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B.Protect stored pipes. Elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof
wrapping. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor.
C.Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt by inside storage and
enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping
1.7 Project Conditions
A.Interruption of Existing Services: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions:
1.Request Owner’s permission for service interruption no fewer than 7 days
in advance of proposed interruption of service.
2.Do not proceed with interruption of services without Owner's written
permission.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Pre-Insulated Bonded Steel Pipe and Fittings
A.General
1.Design Conditions: 125psig at 225°F
B.Carrier Pipe
1.Longitudinally or spirally welded, dimensions ≥ 76.1 P235GH according to
EN 10217-2 or EN 10217-5. Piping shall bear inspection certificate in
accordance with EN 10204-3.1. Beveling in accordance with ISO 6761. The
surface of the pipe shall be treated to promote adhesion of the polyurethane
foam insulation.
C.Insulation
1.Polyurethane foam, spray applied or injected into the annular space between
the carrier pipe and outer jacket with a minimum thickness of 12mm.
Cyclopentane blowing agent. Foam shall have a maximum thermal
conductivity of 0.027 W/m K at 50°C.
D.Outer Jacket
1.High Density Polyethylene, bimodal. Minimum PE 80, ISO 12162. MFR
variation ≤ 0.5 g/10 min. Oxidation induction time (OIT): > 20 min. at
210°C. Slow crack formation (notch sensitivity) > 300 h. Inside of outer
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND HOT WATER DISTRIBUTTION PIPE 33 21 13.13-7
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
jacket shall be corona-treated or wrapped with corona-treated PE foil prior
to insulation to promote adhesion.
E.Leak Detection System
1.Provide a real location monitoring Leak Detection System
2.Leak detection cabling to include two 1.5mm copper surveillance wires, one
bare and one tinned finish to facilitate installation.
F.Anchors
1.Provide as required by stress analysis
G.Expansion Pads
1.Polyethylene foam, non-degradable. Install to dimensions indicated by
stress analysis and thermal expansion compensation.
2.2 Bonded Steel Field Joints
1.Prefabricated, pressure-testable field joint kit consisting of polyurethane
foam insulation shells, cross-linked polyethylene outer layer and uncross-
linked polyethylene inner layer with embedded electrofusion elements.
2.3 Identification
A.Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: solid yellow in color with continuously printed
caption in black letters “CAUTION – HOT WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
BELLOW” or similar wording.
2.4 Tracer Wire and Accessories
A.Wire: All tracer to have HDPE insulation intended for direct buried installation,
yellow color unless otherwise noted.
1.Standard open trench Copper clad steel, #12 AWG, with minimum 450 lbs.
break load and minimum 40 insulation thickness.
B.Connectors: Connectors shall be 3-way lockable connectors with mainline to
laterals lug connectors specifically manufactured for use in underground tracer wire
installation; dielectric silicone filled to seal out moisture and corrosion; installed in
a manner so as to prevent any uninsulated wire exposure. Non locking friction fit,
twist on or taped connectors are prohibited.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND HOT WATER DISTRIBUTTION PIPE 33 21 13.13-8
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Underground Piping Installation
A.The installing contractor shall handle the system in accordance with the directions
furnished by the manufacturer and as approved by the engineer. Seal the ends of
pipes with caps or tape to prevent debris from entering the pipe prior to welding.
Follow the manufacturer’s approved method for cleaning the piping prior to testing.
B.The contractor shall take all precautions necessary to prevent groundwater or
stormwater from entering the uncompleted pipe (service pipe, insulation, or outer
jacket), including storing the prefabricated piping outside the trench, installing
pumps to artificially lower the groundwater table, providing temporary watertight
end closures, or other acceptable method. The contractor shall submit his plans for
maintaining the pipe dry. Pipe that becomes wet shall be replaced by the contractor
at no additional cost to the owner.
3.2 Preparation of Buried Pipe Foundation
A.Grade trench bottom to provide a smooth, firm, stable, and rock-free foundation
throughout the length of the piping.
B.Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are
to be laid and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level.
C.Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of piping. Fill unevenness with tamped sand
backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve the bells of all loads and to ensure
continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation.
3.3 Installation of Bonded Steel pipe and Fittings
A.Install all bonded steel pressure pipe as specified on plans or a method approved by
the Owner / Engineer and manufactures requirements prior to construction.
B.Field Supervision. Factory trained field supervision shall be provided for all critical
periods of pre-insulated pipe installation including but not limited to: unloading,
field joint construction, field insulation of joints and fittings, and testing.
C.Alarm Wiring
1.Installation and test procedure for alarm wiring shall be reviewed by the
Owner and manufacturer prior to start of work.
2.Use qualified personnel in the installation, testing and commissioning of the
alarm system.
3.The alarm wires that are embedded in the polyurethane insulation consist of
two copper wires, one clean and one tinned wire. Resistance test each pipe
at storage prior to installation.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND HOT WATER DISTRIBUTTION PIPE 33 21 13.13-9
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
4.Verify alarm wires are installed and operating in each pipe and component
prior to preforming any work on that piece.
5.When placing the pipe in the trench, ensure that the alarm wires are located
as per pipe manufacturer’s recommendations and as indicated on alarm
wiring drawing or as directed by the Owner.
6.Connect both end wires in all joints and piping ends by qualified personnel.
7.Join each connection with jointing clamps as supplied by the manufacturer
and solder each joint.
8.Check each pipe and joint connection for continuity using an ohmmeter.
Verify that additional resistance is within 5% of calculated increase in wire
resistance.
9.Ensure continuity of system as work progresses by means of high voltage
tester (Megger).
10.Check the resistance of the connections and the resistance between the wire
and steal pipe. Record readings.
11.Make accurate record drawings of alarm wire system for Supply and Return
Pipes with GPS locations for each weld. Record precise lengths of alarm
wiring in system on record drawing. Note wiring take offs to branches and
buildings.
12.Do no weld any piping when leak detection units are connected to the
system.
D.Install piping to the alignment and grades indicated on the drawings. Support each
pipe on bedding and insulation material as indicated on drawings, ensuring firm
bearing along entire length of pipe. Bedding shall be thoroughly compacted to
specification and completely surround the pipes. The sand bedding and surround
is designed to act as a friction anchor for the system and it shall be the
responsibility of the contractor to instruct his labor in the proper backfilling
procedures accordingly.
E.Temporary supports may be used to raise the piping or to allow rotation of the pipe
to facilitate welding joints. If temporary supports are used, they shall consist of
sandbags or cushioned dunnage spaced at 12-feet maximum.
F.Provide all temporary supports and remove prior to backfilling.
G.Prior to welding steel pipe, ensure shrink sleeves and collars are in place on the
straight pipes for each joint. Protect shrink sleeves from heat caused by sun and
welding.
H.Steel pipe ends shall be properly beveled, aligned and spaced for welding in
accordance with Contractor’s Weld Procedure Specification. All welding on pipes,
fittings and valves shall be performed by personnel who have passed an approved
competence test and have been certified.
I.The ends of the pipe in the trench not being fitted or welded shall be securely capped
at all times to prevent the entrance of foreign material.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND HOT WATER DISTRIBUTTION PIPE 33 21 13.13-10
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
J.All cuts of the exterior polyethylene jacket shall be made as per manufacturer’s
recommendations to prevent stress fractures.
K.Pipes required to be cut to length shall be cut and thoroughly cleaned leaving 11-
inches of exposed, clean steel. Remove all polyurethane foam from the weld area
prior to welding.
L.Keep exposed insulation dry and covered during installation.
M.Field Joints. All field joints shall be insulated and sealed after successful inspection
of welds. Joint areas shall be backfilled after installation of joint kit in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommendation.
N.Install pre-formed heat shrink sleeves on all field cuts of pre-insulated piping in
accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.
3.4 Backfill and Compaction
A.Refer to Earthwork specifications for backfill materials and compaction
requirements.
B.Install hydronic piping systems on 6-inch tamped pipe bedding. Place backfill in 6-
inch loose lifts, compacting each lift prior to placing the next.
3.5 Identification
A.Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench
for underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly
over piping.
B.Install tracer wire attached to pipe. Install tracer wire connectors at tees. Make all
necessary connections of wires and jumpers.
1.Owner to test, approve and accept tracer wire system prior to final
payment. Contractor shall correct any deficiencies in tracer wire system
prior to acceptance by Owner.
3.6 Testing
A.Contractor is responsible for providing all necessary temporary piping, connections,
valves, unions,vents, drains, pumps, power sources and potable water for filling and
hydrostatically testing the hydronic piping system. Temporary equipment and
pumps shall be rated for the required test pressure and shall be sized to generate the
test pressure within the system without requiring excessive time to pressurize.
Contractor shall legally dispose of hydrostatic test water upon completion of each
test.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND HOT WATER DISTRIBUTTION PIPE 33 21 13.13-11
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B.Hydrostatic Pressure Test
1.General
a.Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages.
The gage shall be accurate to within 3 PSIG and shall be calibrated
within six months of the test as recorded on a sticker on the gage. Test
piping system before insulation is installed. Pressure testing shall be
performed following the completion of postweld heat treatment,
nondestructive examinations, and all other fabrication, assembly, and
erection activities required to the provide the system or portions thereof
subjected to the pressure test with pressure retaining capability. Remove
control devices before testing. Test each natural section of each piping
system independently but do not use piping system valves to isolate
sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each
section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. The
Contractor shall provide air vents at all high points in the system to
purge air pockets while the system is filling.
b.The Contractor shall test each section of pipe before it is connected to
the existing piping. Provide temporary piping including welded caps
prior to the termination into near end of new piping so that new piping
can be hydrostatically tested. After successfully hydrostatic testing,
remove the temporary caps and provide new piping to tie into existing
piping. It is recognized that the final connection pieces to existing piping
will not be hydrostatically tested; however, flow (at normal operating
pressure) shall be established through the final connection pieces and
fittings, with no visual evidence of weeping or leakage prior to
insulation.
c.Testing shall be performed with calibrated test gages (Contractor
furnished) in the presence of the Owner or Engineer.
d.The Contractor shall furnish all temporary pipe, fittings, and pumps
required to perform the tests.
e.Pipe hangers, snubbers, or restraints shall be blocked, disconnected, or
pinned, as required, prior to pressure testing or cleaning and shall be
restored to operating condition following such test.
f.Equipment and instruments shall be isolated and openings shall be
plugged, as required, to accomplish the required testing and cleaning
and to prevent over pressurizing connecting piping or equipment. Relief
and safety valves shall be removed and the respective nozzle blanked
for testing of the associated equipment. Do not gag relief valves –
remove them.
g.The equipment to which any piping system is attached shall not be
subjected to any line tests. The test pressures apply to the piping
materials as specified but shall not be assumed to apply to piping
specialties, accessories, or equipment, including safety heads, rupture
disks, relief valves, expansion joints, instruments, or filters. Items that
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND HOT WATER DISTRIBUTTION PIPE 33 21 13.13-12
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
may be damaged by the test pressure shall either be removed or blanked
off.
h.Lines containing check valves shall have the source of test pressure
located on the upstream side.
2.Test Pressure:
a.The test pressure shall be 1.5 times the design pressure stated in Section
2.1. Do not deviate from stated test pressure.
b.The test pressure shall be continuously maintained for a minimum time
of 4 hours. During this 4-hour period, no pressure drop shall be
measured. After the 4-hour period, if necessary, the pressure may then
be reduced to design pressure and held for such time as may be
necessary to continue to conduct the examinations for leakage.
Examinations for leakage shall be made of all joints and connections.
The piping system shall show no visual evidence of weeping or leaking.
Hydrostatic testing shall be witnessed by the Owner or Engineer. After
any leaks are found and corrected, the test shall be repeated.
3.Test Blinds:
a.If during the field testing of piping it becomes necessary to insert test
blinds in any part of this piping, the Contractor shall provide test blinds
and all work required including the flanges and welding of flanges.
b.Test blinds shall be equipped with a long handle.
c.The Contractor shall submit a written description of the location of test
blinds before testing.
d.The Contractor shall remove all test blinds after testing.
4.Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by
disassembly and re- installation, using new materials to extent required to
overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or
other temporary repair methods.
5.Records:
a.It is the responsibility of the Contractor to keep accurate, updated records
of all pressure testing. The Contractor shall submit a final log of all
pressure testing for the Owner's records.
b.The Contractor shall maintain a constantly updated list of the following
for all pressure tests:
1)Date and time of test.
2)Test pressure.
3)Testing medium.
4)Piping system tested.
5)Extent of piping system tested so that it can be clearly identified
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND HOT WATER DISTRIBUTTION PIPE 33 21 13.13-13
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
up to what point a piping system has been tested.
6)Test results. All failures shall be indicated with the cause
explicitly stated.
7)Signed witnesses of each test which shall be one
employee of the Contractor, Engineer, an Owner
representative, and the Commissioning Agent.
3.7 Flushing and Cleaning of Hydronic Piping Systems
A.Contractor shall visually inspect internal portion of each length of pipe during
installation. Remove all dirt and foreign matter prior to installing additional lengths.
B.Fill piping with water and conduct the specified hydrostatic pressure testing and
completely drain system to system low point(s), as described in Paragraph 3.5 above.
C.Provide temporary setup for flushing the hydronic systems, including required
temporary piping, connections, valves, unions, hoses, tanks, vents, drains,
strainer(s), pump(s), test ports, chemical injection ports, power sources and potable
water for filling and circulating the cleaning solution. Provide strainers upstream of
pumps to prevent damage from foreign materials. Contractor shall legally dispose
of cleaning solutions. All cleaning and flushing shall be performed such that all
debris will be pulled or flushed downhill. Contractor shall coordinate rental of fire
hydrant meters with local authority or utility owner.
1.Refill system and add compound at the rate of 0.5 to 1 gallon per 100 gallons
of system volume. Circulate for not less than 8 hours at minimum 2 ft. per
second velocity. Monitor velocity and pressure of the system to determine
the condition of the temporary strainer(s). Remove and clean temporary
strainer(s) as needed.
2.Following circulation period, flush cleaning compound from system with
automatic water make-up open and circulating pump on.
3.Flush until rinse water runs clear, and pH is within 0.5 units of the incoming
water.
4.Test system to ensure no excess detergent remains, and conductivity
approaches incoming water conductivity.
5.Replace strainers and reconnect all apparatus bypassed.
D.Contractor shall phase the work to provide access at all low points through valves,
tees,flanges, etc. to facilitate the cleaning and flushing process. If temporary fittings
or piping are required, they shall be provided by the Contractor and removed by the
Contractor after successful cleaning.
E.After flushing and cleaning is completed, Contractor shall provide necessary pipe
and fittings required to complete the piping system. Each cleaned section of piping
shall be capped and protected to keep mud, debris, water, etc. from entering the
piping. If a piping section is left open or unprotected, or is found to be contaminated,
it shall be re-cleaned prior to being filed and energized at no cost to the Owner.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND HOT WATER DISTRIBUTTION PIPE 33 21 13.13-14
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
F.Prepare reports for all purging activities.
END OF SECTION
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
SECTION 33 21 13.14
UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description Page No.
1.0 General .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Summary ............................................................................................................ 1
1.2 Related Work Specified in Other Sections ........................................................... 1
1.3 Submittals ........................................................................................................... 1
1.4 Quality Control Submittals ................................................................................ 2
1.5 Quality Assurance .............................................................................................. 3
1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling ......................................................................... 3
1.7 Project Conditions .............................................................................................. 5
2.0 Products ........................................................................................................................ 5
2.1 HDPE Pipe and Fittings ..................................................................................... 5
2.2 Pre-Insulated HDPE Pipe and Fittings............................................................... 6
2.3 HDPE Field Joints .............................................................................................. 6
2.4 Valves ................................................................................................................. 7
2.5 Valve Boxes ....................................................................................................... 7
2.6 Identification ...................................................................................................... 7
2.7 Tracer Wire and Accessories ............................................................................. 7
3.0 Execution ...................................................................................................................... 8
3.1 Underground Piping Installation ........................................................................ 8
3.2 Preparation of Buried Pipe Bedding .................................................................. 8
3.3 Installation of HDPE Pipe and Pipe Fittings ..................................................... 8
3.4 Installation of Valves ....................................................................................... 10
3.5 Backfill and Compaction ................................................................................. 10
3.6 Installation of Identification ............................................................................. 10
3.7 Testing .............................................................................................................. 10
3.8 Flushing and Cleaning of Hydronic Piping Systems ....................................... 11
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE 33 21 13.14-1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 332113.14
Ithaca, New York UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Summary
A.This Section includes chilled water distribution piping and related components
outside the building for hydronic cooling.
1.Hydronic chilled water piping shall be pre-insulated High Density
Polyethylene (HDPE) with fusion bonded joints in accordance with
AWWA C901/C906, ASTM D2239, ASTM D2737, ASTM D3035 and
ASTM D3350 for selection, design and installation of thermoplastic
water piping.
1.2 Related Work Specified in Other Sections
A.Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork
1.3 Submittals
A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including
installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for the type of manufactured
piping specialty.
B.Shop Drawings:Submit for fabricated specialties,indicating details of
fabrication,materials,and method of support. A complete engineering stress
analysis indicating all anchors, fittings, dimensioned in three axes, maximum
anticipated stresses and maximum allowable stresses must be submitted.
C.Piping Supplier shall submit factory prepared and certified Underground Piping
System layout drawings at same scale as Contract Drawings.
D.Piping Supplier shall submit anchor details and calculations.
E.Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts list for each type
of manufactured piping specialty. Include this data, product data, and shop
drawings in maintenance manual in accordance with requirements of
Division 1.
F.Hydrostatic Test Plan:Submit a schematic hydrostatic test plan showing the
overall layout of the temporary hydrostatic pressure test,size and location of
temporary pumps,ports,valves,drains, bypasses, gauges and other
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE 33 21 13.14-2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
appurtenances needed. Include all procedures and shutdowns necessary for the
hydrostatic test.
G.Cleaning and Flushing Plan: Submit a schematic cleaning and flushing plan
showing the overall layout of the temporary flushing setup, size and location
of temporary pumps,ports,valves,gauges, vents and drains. Flushing plan shall
include a sequence of steps inthe cleaning and flushing procedure.
1.4 Quality Control Submittals
A.Submit certified factory test results for insulation testing prior to shipment.
B.Excavation Support and Protection:
1.Prior to starting work, submit for review and approval, calculations
and shop drawings showing each proposed method of supporting
adjacent earth and structures;i.e.retention system and other methods
of bracing. Include the following:
a.Lists of material to be used, including design mixes
b.Sequence of operations.
c.Detailed sections clearly illustrating the scope of work.
d.Relationship of piles,lagging,walls,and bracing to new and existing
structures.
e.Location of utilities and details of support when required.
f.Procedures and details of testing.
2.Shop drawings and calculations: Prepared by qualified Licensed
Professional Engineers registered inthe State of New York and
bearing their seals and signatures.
3.Qualification Data:For firms and persons specified in “Quality
Assurance"Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
Include lists of complete projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
C.All piping, fittings, and accessories shall be provided by a single manufacturer.
D.Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of
adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as
damage caused by excavation support and protection systems.
E.Country of Fabrication:
1.All piping,fittings,and piping accessories not manufactured,
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE 33 21 13.14-3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
fabricated, and/or assembled in the United States of America or Canada
must be manufactured,fabricated,and/or assembled by an ISO 9001
registered corporation.
2.Submit ISO 9001 registration certificates for all corporations where the
piping, fittings,and piping accessories are not manufactured, fabricated,
and/or assembled in the United States or Canada.
3.For all piping, fittings, and piping accessories not fabricated in the
United States or Canada, submit an independent test report for all
materials to be provided.
4.No piping, fittings, and piping accessories manufactured, fabricated,
and/or assembled in China, including Taiwan, are permitted to be
provided in this Contract.
1.5 Quality Assurance
A.Comply with AWWA C901/C906, ASTM D2239, ASTM D2737, ASTM
D3035, and ASTM D 3350 for selection, design,and installation of
thermoplastic water piping.
1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling
A.Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, according to the following:
1.Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and
corrosion.
2.Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.
3.Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent
rattling.
B.During Storage: Use precautions for valves, according to the following:
1.Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection;then
reinstall for storage.
2.Protect from weather.Store indoors and maintain temperature higher
than ambient dew-point temperature.Support off the ground or
pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.
C.Handling:Useslingto handle valves if size requires handling by crane or lift.Rig
valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as
lifting or rigging points.
D.Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.
E.Pipe Handling,Storage and Delivery
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE 33 21 13.14-4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.Storage
a.Thesupplier shall provide recommended guidelines for the storage
of pre-insulated pipe.
2.Handling
a.The pre-insulated pipe sections shall be loaded, moved, and
transported using a suitably sized crane and a pair of 8-inch wide
nylon slings. In no case shall bare metal contact the polyethylene
outer jacket. No wire slings shall be used. The handling operations
shall not cause any damage to the pipe.The supplier shall provide
recommended guidelines for handling the pipe for use by the
Contractor.
3.Inspection Upon Loading
a.All pipe and fittings shall be examined for damage such as scratches
or gouges at the time of loading. Pipe or fittings found to damage
according to the criteria set out below shall be removed and
replaced as described below. A log of damage shall be accurately
kept and submitted as described below.
1)Damage: Any breaks in the surface of the pipe greater than
5 percent of the wall thickness in depth shall be considered
damage. All damage shall be sequentially numbered on the
pipe using an easily visible paint and measured to determine
the remaining wall thickness from the deepest part of the
damage to the inside of the wall of the pipe.
2)Measuring: The measuring shall be non-destructive and
utilize ultrasonic measurement techniques. The
measurement of wall thickness shall be adjacent to the
deepest part of the damage. If the damage is circumferential
measurements shall be made every 30 degrees. The deepest
part of the damage shall then be measured and subtracted
from the measured wall thickness to determine the
remaining wall thickness.
3)Rejection: The damaged pipe will be rejected and removed
when the remainingwall thickness is less than 90 percent of
the specified minimum wall thickness for that pipe diameter
and SDR.
4)Repair: Damaged pipe that is not rejected shall have all edges
of the damage ground off to a smooth surface. The area that
has been ground down shall then be re-measured and its wall
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE 33 21 13.14-5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
thickness must still exceed the rejection criteria in paragraph
3,or this pipe section will be subject to removal as
described below in paragraph 5.
5)Removal: The removal of pipe shall not change the total
delivered pipeline length from that shown in the Bid
Documents.An entirely new pipe length shall replace the
removed piece or the portion of the damaged pipe shall be
cut out and removed, and a new length of pipe shall be
fusion welded onto the remaining undamaged pipe section
by the manufacturer prior to delivery to the purchaser site.
Fusion weld beads on the inside of the pipe from such a
repair operation shall be removed by the manufacturer.
6)Costs: Furnish labor, material, instruments, and bear other
costs in connection with all inspection, removal, and
replacement of damaged pipe.
1.7 Project Conditions
A.Interruption of Existing Chilled Water Service: Do not interrupt service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the
following conditions:
1.Request Owner's permission for service interruption no fewer than
7 days in advance of proposed interruption of service.
2.Do not proceed with interruption of chilled water service without
Owner's written permission.
2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 HDPE Pipe and Fittings
A.Carrier Pipe
1.Provide polyethylene pressure pipe manufactured from PE4710 high
density polyethylene meeting AWWA C906 and ASTM F714
standards, ductile iron pipe standard (DIPS), Polyethylene (PE)
Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter or ASTM D3035,
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Controlled
Outside Diameter. Resin shall meet the requirements of
ASTM 3350.
2.Pressure rating:
a.All HDPE pipe shall not be less than 200 psi (SDR 11.0)
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE 33 21 13.14-6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
3.Pipe shall be legibly marked at intervals of no more than 5 feet, in accordance
with the requirements of ASTM F714 and AWWA C906
B.Fabricated PE Fittings shall have the full rating of the HDPE pipe.
2.2 Pre-Insulated HDPE Pipe and Fittings
A.Carrier Pipe
1.HDPE, ASTM D2239, SDR 11.0; with PE compound number required
to give pressure rating not less than 200 psig.
B.Fabricated HDPE Fittings shall have the full rating of the HDPE pipe.
C.Insulation
1.Polyurethane foam,spray applied or injected into the annular space
between the carrier pipe and outer jacket with a minimum thickness
of 1 inch. Insulation shall be rigid, 90- 95% closed cell polyurethane
with a 2.0 to 3.0 pounds per cubic foot density and coefficient of
thermal conductivity (K-factor)of 0.16 and shall conform to ASTM
C-591.
D.Outer Jacket
1.Extruded high-density polyethylene (HDPE) having a minimum wall
thickness of 100 mils.
2.3 HDPE Field Joints
A.High Density Polyethylene joints shall be butt-fusion welded and field insulated
(as indicated on Contract Drawings. All HDPE elbows shall be long radius
sectionalized.
1.Insulation joints on pre-insulated pipe shall be performed in accordance
with the insulation manufacturer’s instructions.
2.Field insulated joints shall be closed using successive heat shrink
sleeves. Exposed insulation at all pipe ends shall be sealed with
Canusa Tubular Stops – PLX. Then, Canusa CSCX shrink sleeves
shall be applied over the insulated joint providing a watertight seal.
B.Polyethylene Flange Adapters: Flange adapters shall be made with sufficient
through-bore length to be clamped in a butt fusion joining machine without the
use of a stub-end holder.The sealing surface of the flange adapter shall be
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE 33 21 13.14-7
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
machined with a series of small v-shaped grooves to provide gasketless sealing
or to restrain the gasket against blow-out.
C.Back-up Rings and Flange Bolts: Flange adapters shall be fitted with lap joint
flanges pressure rated equal to or greater than the mating pipe. The lap joint
flange bore shall be chamfered or radiused to provide clearance to the flange
adapter radius. Flange bolts and nuts shall be Grade 2 or higher. Bolt pattern
for flanges shall be per ANSI B16.5. Back up rings shall be carbon steel.
Washers shall be Belville washers.
D.Polyethylene Mechanical Joint Adapters: MJ adapters shall be made with
sufficient through-bore length to be clamped in a butt fusion joining machined
without the use of a stub-end holder. MJ adapter shall be pressure rated equal
to or greater than the mating pipe. Provide stainless steel internal stiffener
ring.
E.Mechanical Joint: Provide rubber gasket, ductile iron backing ring and all
necessary hardware to firmly connect HDPE mechanical joint adapter fitting
to ductile iron mechanical joint valve connection.
2.4 Valves
A.Gate Valves:AWWA C509, resilient seated, ductile-iron body and bonnet,
non-rising bronze stem, 250-psi working pressure, with a 2-inch square
operating nut which shall turn counterclockwise to open, one flanged, and one
mechanical joint end. Mechanical joint end shall be connected to HDPE
piping when valve is connected to dissimilar piping materials.
2.5 Valve Boxes
A.Cast-iron box having top section and cover with lettering "CHILLED
WATER”, bottom section with base of size to fit over valve, and barrel
approximately 5-1/4 inches in diameter, and screw adjustable cast-iron
extension of length required for buried depth of valve. Covers shall be powder-
coated blue with color RAL6004.Provide #6 Base Adaptor byAdaptor, Inc.
2.6 Identification
A.Plastic Underground Warning Tapes:solid yellow in color with continuously
printed caption in black letters "CAUTION -CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION
PIPING BELOW" or similar wording.
2.7 Tracer Wire and Accessories
A.Wire:All tracer to have HDPE insulation intendedfor direct burial installation,
yellow color unless otherwise noted.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE 33 21 13.14-8
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.Standard open trench:Copper clad steel,#12 AWG,with minimum
450 lbs break load and minimum 40 mil insulation thickness.
B.Connectors: Connectors shall be 3-way lockable connectors with mainline to
lateral lug connectors specifically manufactured for use in underground tracer
wire installation; dielectric silicon filled to seal out moisture and corrosion;
installed in a manner to prevent any uninsulated wire exposure. Non locking
friction fit,twist on or taped connectors are prohibited.
3.0 EXECUTION
3.1 Underground Piping Installation
A.The installing contractor shall handle the system in accordance with the
directions furnished by the manufacturer and as approved by the engineer. Seal
the ends of pipes with caps or tape to prevent debris from enteringthe pipe prior
to welding. Follow the manufacturer's approved method for cleaning the
piping prior to testing.
B.The contractor shall take all precautions necessary to prevent groundwater or
stormwater from entering the uncompleted pipe (service pipe, insulation,or
outer jacket), including storing the prefabricated piping outside the trench,
installing pumps to artificially lower the groundwater table, providing
temporary watertight end closures,or other acceptable method.The contractor
shall submit his plans for maintaining the pipe dry. Pipe that becomes wet shall
be replaced by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner.
3.2 Preparation of Buried Pipe Bedding
A.Grade trench bottom to provide a smooth, firm, stable, and rock-free bedding
throughout the length of the piping.
B.Remove unstable,soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which
pipes are to be laid and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level.
C.Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of piping. Fill unevenness with tamped
sand backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve the bells of all loads
and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation.
3.3 Installation of HDPE Pipe and Pipe Fittings
A.Install all HDPE pressure pipe as specified on plans or a method approved by
the Owner / Engineer and manufacture’s requirements prior to construction.
B.Fusion Joining
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE 33 21 13.14-9
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
1.Butt Fusion Joining - Make joints between plain end pipes and
fittings by butt fusion using only procedures that are recommended
by the pipe and fitting Manufacturer and ASTM F2620.
a.Ensure that persons making butt fusion joints are certified according
to the standards and have proven experience to make fusion welds
following Manufacturer’s recommended procedures.
b.Maintain records of trained personnel and certify that training was
received not more than 12 months before commencing
construction.
c.External and internal beads resulting from butt fusion joining shall
not be removed.
d.All fusion joining shall be recorded, reviewed and downloaded to a
central database via Datalogger. Data log records shall be submitted
for all pipe fusion joints daily (within 24 hours of fusion joining).
2.Electrofusion couplings and fittings meeting ASTM F1055 are
acceptable.
3.Use caution to protect the exposed butt ends of pipes from exposure to
oils, greases, or hydrocarbons. Any pipe exposed to hydrocarbons of
any type shall be cut-out and removed prior to butt fusion.
C.Flange Joint Connection Joining
1.Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be joined to other materials by
means of flanged connections (flange adapters, transition fittings and
back-up rings) designed for joining polyethylene pipe to another
material. Some type of flange adapter and back-up rings shall be used
and installed in accordance with the manufacturer. In no case shall
flange connections be permitted in areas that will be direct buried and
backfilled.
2.Install flange connections in accordance with the Manufacturer's
recommended procedure and Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) TN-38 "Bolt
Torque for Polyethylene Flanged Joints". Center and align flange
faces to each other before assembling and tightening bolts. Do not
use the flange bolts to draw the flanges into alignment. Lubricate
bolt threads, and fit Belville washers under the flange nuts. Tighten
bolts evenly according to the tightening pattern and torque step
recommendations of the Manufacturer and PPI TN-38.At least one
hour after initial assembly,re-tighten flange connections following
the tightening pattern and torque step recommendations of the
Manufacturer and PPI TN-38.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE 33 21 13.14-10
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
D.Mechanical Joint Connection Joining
1.Connect polyethylene pipe using mechanical joints where indicated on
Drawings.Mechanical joint adapter shall be fusion bonded to the
HDPE, and installed with all associated gaskets, stiffeners and
hardware.
E.Chilled Water Connection: Connect to existing chilled water piping with sizes
and in locations indicated.Keep trench open at the top until the piping has
been tested so the connection can be inspected for leakage. Prior to chilled
water installation, the Contractor shall field verify existing chilled water
supply and return lines for tie-in purposes. The Owner and Engineer shall
be present during verifying procedure.
3.4 Installation of Valves
A.General Application:Use mechanical joint end valves for 3-inch and larger,
buried installation.
B.AWWA-Type Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried valves
with stem pointing up and with cast-iron valve box. Back fill and compact
under and around valve box to ensure no vertical loads are transmitted to the
valve operators or bonnets.
3.5 Backfill and Compaction
A.Refer to Earthwork specifications for backfill materials and compaction
requirements.
3.6 Installation of Identification
A.Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of
trench for underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished
grade, directly over piping.
B.Install tracer wire attached to pipe. Install tracer wire connectors at tees. Make all
necessary connections of wires and jumpers.
1.Owner to test, approve and accept tracer wire system prior to final
payment. Contractor shall correct any deficiencies in tracer wire
system prior to acceptance by Owner.
3.7 Testing
A.Contractor is responsible for providing all necessary temporary piping,
connections,valves,unions, vents, drains, pumps, power sources and potable
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE 33 21 13.14-11
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
water for filling and hydrostatically testing the hydronic piping system.
Temporary equipment and pumps shall be rated for the required test pressure
and shall be sized to generate the test pressure within the system without
requiring excessive time to pressurize. Contractor shall legally dispose of
hydrostatic test water upon completion of each test.
B.HDPE
1.Butt Fusion Testing: On the first day butt fusions are to be made for
each pipe size, the first fusion shall be a trial fusion.After the trial
fusion is allowed to cool completely, cut out fusion test straps and test
per ASTM F2620. The test strap shall be 12 inches (min) or 30 times
the wall thickness in length with the fusion in the center, and 1 inch
(min)or 1.5 times the wall thickness in width.Bend the test strap until
the ends of the strap touch. If the fusion fails at the joint, make a new
trial fusion, cool completely, and re-test. Do not commence butt
fusion of pipe to be installed until a trial fusion has passed the bent
strap test. Tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Owner /
Engineer and the technical assistant provided by the pipe
manufacturer or fusion equipment provider. Testing via ASTM F2634
is an approved alternative to the bent strap test of ASTM F2620.
2.During the initial trial fusion and all subsequent fusions, a Data Logger
shall be used to monitor the fusion process to record the necessary
parameters critical to the fusion process.Upon a successful trial fusion
as tested by the bend back test strap, all subsequent butt fusions shall be
recorded using the Data Logger and shall match the condition of the
initial successful and approved trial fusion. Provided the conditions
recorded onthe Data Logger match the conditions of the trial fusion, no
additional bent strap tests will be required.
3.The technical assistant provided by the pipe supplier shall be onsite for
the first full day of fusing. Perform all fusion joints in the presence of
the Owner or Engineer as directed. Record the temperature and
corresponding time for each fusion joint.
4.Hydrostatic Pressure Testing: Pressure test HDPE pipes in accordance
with ASTM F2164, "Standard Practice for Field Leak Testing of
Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Piping Systems Using Hydrostatic
Pressure". Provide means for air to be removed from the piping during
hydrostatic testing.
3.8 Flushing and Cleaning of Hydronic Piping Systems
A.Contractor shall visually inspect internal portion of each length of pipe during
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPE 33 21 13.14-12
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
installation. Remove all dirt and foreign matter prior to installing additional
lengths.
B.Fillpiping with water and conduct the specified hydrostatic pressure testing and
completely drain system to system low point(s), as described in Paragraph 3.5
above.
C.Provide temporary setup for flushing the hydronic systems, including required
temporary piping, connections, valves, unions, hoses, tanks, vents, drains,
strainer(s), pump(s), test ports, chemical injection ports, power sources and
potable water for filling and circulating the cleaning solution. Provide strainers
upstream of pumps to prevent damage from foreign materials. Contractor shall
legally dispose of cleaning solutions. All cleaning and flushing shall be
performed such that all debris will be pulled or flushed downhill. Contractor
shall coordinate rental of fire hydrant meters with local authority or utility
owner.
1.Refill system and add compound at the rate of 0.5 to 1gallon per 100
gallons of system volume. Circulate for not less than 8 hours at
minimum 2 ft. per second velocity.Monitor velocity and pressure of
the system to determine the condition of the temporary strainer(s).
Remove and clean temporary strainer(s) as needed.
2.Following circulation period, flush cleaning compound from system
with automatic water make-up open and circulating pump on.
3.Flush until rinse water runs clear and pH is within 0.5 units of the
incoming water.
4.Test system to ensure no excess detergent remains, and conductivity
approaches incoming water conductivity.
5.Replace strainers and reconnect all apparatus bypassed.
D.Contractor shall phase the work to provide access at all low points through
valves, tees, flanges, etc. to facilitate the cleaning and flushing process. If
temporary fittings or piping are required, they shall be provided by the
Contractor and removed by the Contractor after successful cleaning.
E.After flushing and cleaning is completed, Contractor shall provide necessary
pipe and fittings required to complete the piping system. Each cleaned
section of piping shall be capped and protected to keep mud, debris,water,
etc. from entering the piping. If a piping section is left open or unprotected, or is
found to be contaminated, it shall be re-cleaned prior to being filled and
energized at no cost to the Owner.
F.Prepare reports for all purging activities.
END OF SECTION
Cornell Utilities Water Main Acceptance Form
Location of Water Main:
Size of Water Main (in):Lenght of Water Main (ft):
Hydrostatic Test
Water main shall be tested to150 psi or 1.5 times the normal working pressure, which ever one is greater, guaged at the high point in the main for a period of
2 hours. Leakage will be determined by the amount of water added to the tested water main to maintain test pressure within 5 psi. Target test pressures will
be given to the contractor by the design engineer or a Cornell Utilities Representative. Fill equipment shall be disconnected for the main during the 2 hour
test period.
Target test pressure (psi):
Start Test Pressure (psi):Witness:
(Utilities representative only)
End Test Pressure (psi):Witness:
(Utilities representative only)
Is the tested main within the allow leakage limits?
Witness:
(Utilities representative only)
Disinfection
The continous feed method shall be used to inject a solution of not less than 25 mg/L into the water main. All non-isolating valves and fire hydrants
connected to the test main shall be operated. Chlorine residuals shall be measured at all hydrants connected to the test main and a chlorine residual of 25
mg/L shall be obtained at the these hydrant. The solution will set in the main for a period of 24 hours and then tested to ensure a chlorine residual of
atleast 10 mg/L is obtained. Cornell Utilities representative will obtain all chlorine residual samples.
Pressure Zone Connection:
Date/Time:
Date/Time:
Intial free chlorine:Date/Time:
Residual free chlorine:Date/Time:
Final Flushing
Final flushing shall be accomplished as soon as possible after the successful completion of disinfection of the water main. This is to prevent
damaging the pipe lining or to prevent corrisoion to the pipe itself. Super chlorinated water shall be flush to the sewer system or dechlorinated to
level that will not harm the enviroment.
Final flushing chlorine level:Date/Time:
Where is the super chlorinated water being flushed to:
Company Performing Work:
Flushing
Water mains shall be flushed at a velocity fo 3'/sec.
Select size of main to obtain minium flow:
Was minium flow obtained:
Witness:
(Utilities representative only)
Witness:
(Utilities representative only)
Date/Time:
Was the sample found free of bacteria:
Water Main Commisioning
Line put into service date/time:
Yes No
Yes No
Bacteriological Test
Sample taken by:
Yes No
Analyzing Lab:
Utilities Representative Signature:
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
KENNEDY HALL TO CLARK HALL
THERMAL SYSTEM UPGRADE
HIGH PERFORMANCE
BUTTERFLY VALVES AND ACCESSORIES
(STEAM SERVICE)
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
August 2020
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall HP BUTTERFLY VALVES AND ACCESSORIES Page 1
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
TECHINCAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR
HIGH PERFORMANCE
BUTTERFLY VALVES AND ACCESSORIES (STEAM SERVICE)
1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 Items to be Supplied
A. The equipment to be supplied shall be complete and, without being limited
thereby, shall include the items listed hereunder, and shall be in accordance with
the details described elsewhere in this specification.
1. Valves as listed in Appendix A (Valve Data Sheets)
2. Factory testing
3. One (1) complete set of special tools (as required)
4. Two (2) prints of all drawings
5. Two (2) sets complete installation instructions and operating manuals
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Equipment provided under this specification shall comply with all applicable
federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations and to the latest edition of
the following Codes and Standards:
1. ANSI American National Standards Institute
2. API American Petroleum Institute
3. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
4. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
5. MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society
3.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
3.1 General
A. The design operating conditions for the butterfly valves can be found on the Valve
Data Sheets in Appendix A. Each of the steam system butterfly valves shall be a
high performance valve suitable for the steam service conditions indicated on the
data sheets.
3.2 Valve Design
A. The valves shall be suitable for steam service in accordance with the design
parameters given in the Valve Data Sheets in Appendix A.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall HP BUTTERFLY VALVES AND ACCESSORIES Page 2
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
B. The valves shall have stainless steel seats designed for bi-directional, dead-
endable, bubble-tight service. The valves shall have double flanged end
connections. The valves shall be built in accordance with ANSI B16.5, B16.34,
B31.1, and MSS Standards SP-68, High Pressure Offset Seat Butterfly Valves.
C. The valves shall be fully bi-directional and bi-directionally dead-endable to the
full pressure rating of the seat. This is defined to mean that the seat rating is not
reduced when pressure is applied in either direction and the valve is capable of
serving as a blank flange, when bolted to the end of a line, from either side of the
valve body with no mating flange attached.
D. The means of attaching the body to the pipe flange, and of attaching the seat ring
to the body shall meet the ANSI class rating of the valve without mechanical
failure.
E. The valves shall allow for tightening of the packing without removing the
insulation.
F. External disc position indicators shall be provided.
G. The actuators shall be reversible by 180 degrees.
H. The valves must be fully factory assembled, set and tested, including seat and
packing leakage tests.
I. The butterfly valve design shall be as detailed below:
Body Carbon steel
Body Style Double Flanged (Face to Face ISO 5272)
Trim Stainless Steel Double Offset Stem
Disc As per Manufacturer’s Recommendation
Seat Stainless Steel seated, fully bi-directional and bi-
directionally dead-endable
Seat P/T Rating As per Data Sheet
Body P/T Rating As per Data Sheet
Actuator Handwheel Gear Operator
Paint As per Manufacturer’s standard
J. The manual valve actuators shall be designed to shut off against full inlet pressure
with 0 psig backpressure. The actuator gear shall be sized such that the maximum
unseating, seating or operating torque of the valve can be achieved with no greater
than 80 pounds force applied at the rim of the handwheel at maximum differential
pressure.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall HP BUTTERFLY VALVES AND ACCESSORIES Page 3
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
4.0 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES
1. Jamesbury “Series 800”
2. Xomox, “Tufline”
3. Tri Seal, “Contromatics”
4. Watts, “QT System”
5.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING
A. The valve body shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with API Standard
598 - Valve Inspection and Testing.
B. Shaft seal and seat pressure tests shall be in accordance with API Standard 598.
C. The valves shall be opened and closed to functionally ensure that they operate
correctly and do not stick open or closed. Any actuator stops shall be factory set.
6.0 PACKING, MARKING AND SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Seller shall remove all waste such as metal chips, filings, welding stubs, dirt and
debris from the interior of the valve before testing or shipment.
B. The valve and its accessories shall be properly tagged with the following
identifying information and in accordance with MSS-SP-25, Standard Marking
System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions.
Tag number
Manufacturer's name
Serial number
Model number
Body rating
Body and trim material
Valve size
C. The tags shall be minimum 1½-inch diameter and made of stainless steel or other
equally weather-resistant material, permanently fastened with stainless wire or
screws.
D. The valve shall be painted in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard
practice.
E. All equipment is to be skid or pallet mounted, as applicable. Preparations for
shipment shall be in accordance with these specifications.
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall HP BUTTERFLY VALVES AND ACCESSORIES Page 4
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
F. All flanged opening connections shall be secured with bolted on wood blind
flanges. All threaded end connections shall be Teflon taped and capped. All
other openings in equipment shall be protected by temporary closure.
G. All loads are to be appropriately weather proofed for shipping. The
weatherproofing shall be intact upon delivery and suitable for short-term outdoor
storage. Crating and skidding shall be in accordance with NEMA standards.
Fittings shall be shipped in a covered truck.
All equipment, all parts which are shipped loose and all containers shall be suitably
marked, preferably with wired-on waterproof or metal tags showing the valve tag
number.
7.0 SELLER'S DATA SUBMISSION
A. The following technical data shall accompany the bids:
Complete Product Data
Completed Valve Data Sheets (Appendix "A")
Standard Outline Dimensional Drawings
Cross-sectional Drawing showing valve and actuator arrangement and
weights
Spare Parts List (Priced with valid prices for one (1) year from delivery)
Proposed delivery schedule
User's List for similar service
APPENDIX “A”
BUTTERFLY VALVE DATA SHEET (STEAM SERVICE)
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall HP BUTTERFLY VALVES AND ACCESSORIES Page 5
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
(To be completed by Vendor)
VALVE TAG Nos. Roberts
Areaway
Clark
Sub-basement
Clark
Sub-basement
VALVE TYPE High Performance
Butterfly
High Performance
Butterfly
High Performance
Butterfly
FLUID Saturated / Super-
heated Steam
Saturated / Super-
heated Steam
Saturated / Super-
heated Steam
VALVE DETAILS:
Manufacturer
Model No.
Type/End Connections
Size (in)
Line Size (in)/Wall Thickness (in)
Steam Line Orientation
Pressure Class, ANSI
Double Flanged
12
12" NPS / std wt
Horizontal
150
Double Flanged
10
10" NPS / std wt
Horizontal
150
Double Flanged
6
6" NPS / std wt
Horizontal
150
STEAM LINE CONDITIONS:
Design press./temp. (psig/ F)
Cv at max. Valve opening
150/550
150/550
150/550
VALVE MATERIALS:
Body, ASTM
Body Seat, ASTM
Disc, ASTM
Disc Seal
Disc Seal Retainer
Shaft
Shaft Bearing
Thrust Bearing
Packing
Paint / Coating
APPENDIX “A”
BUTTERFLY VALVE DATA SHEET (STEAM SERVICE)
Kennedy Hall to Clark Hall HP BUTTERFLY VALVES AND ACCESSORIES Page 6
Thermal System Upgrade August 26, 2020
VALVE TAG Nos. Roberts
Areaway
Clark
Sub-basement
Clark
Sub-basement
ACTUATOR DETAILS:
Type
Manufacturer
Force on handwheel to open/close
(lb)
Turns of handwheel to open
Can actuator orientation be altered
in Field (yes/no)
Weight of valve with actuator (lb)
Body, ASTM
Worm Gear, ASTM
Hand Wheel Shaft, ASTM
Handwheel Gear
Handwheel Gear
Handwheel Gear
Notes:
1. The steam flow for the LP steam valves will be saturated or superheated, depending on
loading, time of year, etc. Maximum normal steam line velocity for saturated steam is
approximately 125 fps, and for superheated steam 150 fps.
2. The normal operating steam temperature for the LP steam valves will range from 450°F to
500°F. The steam temperature may reach 550°F briefly during startup or turbine trip, but this
situation represents an occasional condition as opposed to normal operation. Valves shall be
suitable for an occasional upset to 550°F, say, once a year.